FCC ID: B94-AX201D2WS Intel WiFi 6 AX201

User Guide Software terms By installing, copying, downloading, or otherwise using any software product preinstalled on this computer, you agree to be bound by the terms of the HP End User License Agreement (EULA). If you do not accept these license terms, your sole remedy is to return the entire unused product (hardware and software) within 14 days for a full refund subject to the refund policy of your seller. For any further information or to request a full refund of the price of the computer, please contact your seller. This user guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. Not all features are available in all editions or versions of Windows. Systems may require upgraded and/or separately purchased hardware, drivers, software or BIOS update to take full advantage of Windows functionality. Windows 10 is automatically updated, which is always enabled. ISP fees may apply and additional requirements may apply over time for updates. See http://www.microsoft.com. To access the latest user guides, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Then select User Guides. Copyright 2018 HP Development Company, L.P. Product notice AMD is a trademark of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by HP Inc. under license. Intel, Celeron, and Pentium are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. Windows is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: August 2018 Document Part Number: L11079-001 Safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to come into contact with the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950-1). iii iv Safety warning notice Processor configuration setting (select products only) IMPORTANT: Select computer products are configured with an Intel Pentium N35xx/N37xx series or a Celeron N28xx/N29xx/N30xx/N31xx series processor and a Windows operating system. If your computer is configured as described, do not change the processor configuration setting in msconfig.exe from 4 or 2 processors to 1 processor. If you do so, your computer will not restart. You will have to perform a factory reset to restore the original settings. v vi Processor configuration setting (select products only) Table of contents 1 Welcome ....................................................................................................................................................... 1 Finding information ............................................................................................................................................... 2 2 Components .................................................................................................................................................. 3 Locating hardware ................................................................................................................................................. 3 Locating software .................................................................................................................................................. 3 Labels ..................................................................................................................................................................... 4 3 Network connections ..................................................................................................................................... 6 Connecting to a wireless network ......................................................................................................................... 6 Using the wireless controls ................................................................................................................. 6 Wireless button ................................................................................................................. 6 Operating system controls ............................................................................................... 6 Connecting to a WLAN ......................................................................................................................... 7 Using HP Mobile Broadband (select products only) ............................................................................ 7 Using GPS (select products only) ........................................................................................................ 8 Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select products only) ................................................................... 8 Connecting Bluetooth devices .......................................................................................... 8 Using NFC to share information (select products only) ...................................................................... 8 Sharing .............................................................................................................................. 9 Connecting to a wired network .............................................................................................................................. 9 Connecting to a local area network (LAN) (select products only) ....................................................... 9 Using HP LAN-Wireless Protection (select products only) ................................................................ 10 Turning on and customizing HP LAN-Wireless Protection ............................................. 10 Using HP MAC Address Pass Through to identify your computer on a network (select products only) ............. 11 Customizing MAC Address Pass Through .......................................................................................... 11 4 Navigating the screen .................................................................................................................................. 12 Using TouchPad and touch screen gestures ........................................................................................................ 12 Tap ..................................................................................................................................................... 12 Two-finger pinch zoom ..................................................................................................................... 13 Two-finger slide (TouchPad only) ..................................................................................................... 13 Two-finger tap (TouchPad only) ........................................................................................................ 13 Four-finger tap (TouchPad only) ....................................................................................................... 13 Three-finger swipe (TouchPad only) ................................................................................................. 14 One-finger slide (touch screen only) ................................................................................................. 15 vii Using an optional keyboard or mouse ................................................................................................................. 15 Using an on-screen keyboard (select products only) .......................................................................................... 15 5 Entertainment features ............................................................................................................................... 16 Using a camera (select products only) ................................................................................................................ 16 Using audio .......................................................................................................................................................... 16 Connecting speakers ......................................................................................................................... 16 Connecting headphones .................................................................................................................... 16 Connecting a microphone ................................................................................................................. 16 Connecting headsets ......................................................................................................................... 17 Using sound settings ......................................................................................................................... 17 Using video .......................................................................................................................................................... 17 Connecting a DisplayPort device using a USB Type-C cable (select products only) ......................... 17 Connecting a Thunderbolt device using a USB Type-C cable (select products only) ....................... 18 Connecting video devices by using a VGA cable (select products only) ........................................... 19 Connecting video devices using an HDMI cable (select products only) ............................................ 20 Setting up HDMI audio .................................................................................................... 21 Connecting a Thunderbolt DisplayPort device ................................................................................. 21 Discovering and connecting wired displays using MultiStream Transport ...................................... 22 Connect displays to computers with AMD or Nvidia graphics (with an optional hub) ... 22 Connect displays to computers with Intel graphics (with an optional hub) ................... 23 Connect displays to computers with Intel graphics (with a built-in hub) ...................... 23 Discovering and connecting to Miracast-compatible wireless displays (select products only) ...... 24 Discovering and connecting to Intel WiDi certified displays (select Intel products only) ................ 24 Using data transfer .............................................................................................................................................. 24 Connecting devices to a USB Type-C port (select products only) ..................................................... 24 6 Managing power .......................................................................................................................................... 26 Using Sleep and Hibernation ............................................................................................................................... 26 Initiating and exiting Sleep ............................................................................................................... 26 Initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) ................................................................. 27 Shutting down (turning off) the computer .......................................................................................................... 27 Using the Power icon and Power Options ............................................................................................................ 28 Running on battery power ................................................................................................................................... 28 Using HP Fast Charge (select products only) .................................................................................... 28 Displaying battery charge ................................................................................................................. 29 Finding battery information in HP Support Assistant (select products only) .................................. 29 Conserving battery power ................................................................................................................. 29 Identifying low battery levels ........................................................................................................... 29 Resolving a low battery level ............................................................................................................ 30 Resolving a low battery level when external power is available ................................... 30 viii Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available ................................. 30 Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation .................. 30 7 Security ...................................................................................................................................................... 31 Protecting the computer ..................................................................................................................................... 31 Using passwords .................................................................................................................................................. 31 Setting passwords in Windows ......................................................................................................... 32 Setting passwords in Computer Setup ............................................................................................. 33 Managing a BIOS administrator password ........................................................................................ 33 Entering a BIOS administrator password ....................................................................... 34 Using DriveLock Security Options ..................................................................................................... 35 Selecting Automatic DriveLock (select products only) ................................................... 35 Enabling Automatic DriveLock ..................................................................... 35 Disabling Automatic DriveLock .................................................................... 35 Entering an Automatic DriveLock password ................................................ 36 Selecting manual DriveLock ........................................................................................... 36 Setting a DriveLock master password ......................................................... 37 Enabling DriveLock and setting a DriveLock user password ......................................... 37 Disabling DriveLock ........................................................................................................ 38 Entering a DriveLock password ...................................................................................... 38 Changing a DriveLock password ..................................................................................... 38 Windows Hello (select products only) ................................................................................................................. 39 Using antivirus software ...................................................................................................................................... 39 Using firewall software ........................................................................................................................................ 39 Installing software updates ................................................................................................................................. 40 Using HP Client Security (select products only) .................................................................................................. 40 Using HP Device as a Service (HP DaaS) (select products only) .......................................................................... 40 Using an optional security cable (select products only) ..................................................................................... 40 Using a fingerprint reader (select products only) ............................................................................................... 41 Locating the fingerprint reader ......................................................................................................... 41 8 Maintenance ............................................................................................................................................... 42 Improving performance ....................................................................................................................................... 42 Using Disk Defragmenter .................................................................................................................. 42 Using Disk Cleanup ............................................................................................................................ 42 Using HP 3D DriveGuard (select products only) ................................................................................ 43 Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status .............................................................................. 43 Updating programs and drivers .......................................................................................................................... 43 Cleaning your computer ...................................................................................................................................... 43 Cleaning procedures .......................................................................................................................... 44 Cleaning the display ........................................................................................................ 44 ix Cleaning the sides or cover ............................................................................................. 44 Cleaning the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse (select products only) ............................. 44 Traveling with or shipping your computer .......................................................................................................... 44 9 Backing up, restoring, and recovering ........................................................................................................... 46 Using Windows tools ........................................................................................................................................... 46 Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) ........................................................................................... 46 Using HP Recovery Manager to create recovery media .................................................................... 47 Before you begin ............................................................................................................. 47 Creating the recovery media ........................................................................................... 47 Using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create recovery media .......................................... 48 Restoring and recovery ........................................................................................................................................ 48 Restoring, resetting, and refreshing using Windows tools .............................................................. 48 Restoring using HP Recovery Manager and the HP Recovery partition ........................................... 48 Recovering using HP Recovery Manager ........................................................................................... 48 Recovering using the HP Recovery partition (select products only) ................................................ 49 Recovering using HP Recovery media ............................................................................................... 49 Changing the computer boot order ................................................................................................... 50 Removing the HP Recovery partition (select products only) ............................................................ 50 10 Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start ............................................................................................ 51 Using Computer Setup ......................................................................................................................................... 51 Starting Computer Setup .................................................................................................................. 51 Navigating and selecting in Computer Setup ................................................................................... 51 Restoring factory settings in Computer Setup ................................................................................. 51 Updating the BIOS ............................................................................................................................. 52 Determining the BIOS version ......................................................................................... 52 Downloading a BIOS update ........................................................................................... 52 Changing the boot order using the f9 prompt .................................................................................. 53 TPM BIOS settings (select products only) ........................................................................................................... 53 Using HP Sure Start (select products only) ......................................................................................................... 54 11 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics .............................................................................................................. 55 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows (select products only) ................................................................. 55 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows ....................................................................... 55 Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows version ....................... 56 Downloading HP Hardware Diagnostics Windows by product name or number

(select products only) ..................................................................................................... 56 Installing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows ............................................................................. 56 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI ............................................................................................................. 56 x Starting HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI ....................................................................................... 57 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive .............................................. 57 Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version .............................. 57 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number

(select products only) ..................................................................................................... 57 Using Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings (select products only) ............................................. 58 Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI ................................................................. 58 Downloading the latest Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version ................. 58 Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number ............................................................................................................................ 58 Customizing Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings .................................................... 58 12 Specifications ............................................................................................................................................ 60 Input power .......................................................................................................................................................... 60 Operating environment ....................................................................................................................................... 61 13 Electrostatic Discharge .............................................................................................................................. 62 14 Accessibility .............................................................................................................................................. 63 Accessibility ......................................................................................................................................................... 63 Finding the technology tools you need ............................................................................................ 63 Our commitment ............................................................................................................................... 63 International Association of Accessibility Professionals (IAAP) ....................................................... 63 Finding the best assistive technology .............................................................................................. 64 Assessing your needs ..................................................................................................... 64 Accessibility for HP products .......................................................................................... 64 Standards and legislation .................................................................................................................................... 65 Standards .......................................................................................................................................... 65 Mandate 376 EN 301 549 ............................................................................................ 65 Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) ................................................................ 65 Legislation and regulations .............................................................................................................. 65 United States ................................................................................................................... 66 21st Century Communications and Video Accessibility Act (CVAA) ............................... 66 Canada ............................................................................................................................. 66 Europe ............................................................................................................................. 67 United Kingdom .............................................................................................................. 67 Australia .......................................................................................................................... 67 Worldwide ....................................................................................................................... 67 Useful accessibility resources and links .............................................................................................................. 68 Organizations .................................................................................................................................... 68 Educational institutions .................................................................................................................... 68 xi Other disability resources ................................................................................................................. 68 HP links .............................................................................................................................................. 68 Contacting support .............................................................................................................................................. 69 xii 1 Welcome After you set up and register the computer, we recommend the following steps to get the most out of your smart investment:

TIP: To quickly return to the computer Start screen from an open app or the Windows desktop, press the Windows key on your keyboard. Pressing the Windows key again will return you to the previous screen. Connect to the InternetSet up your wired or wireless network so that you can connect to the Internet. For more information, see Network connections on page 6. Update your antivirus softwareProtect your computer from damage caused by viruses. The software is preinstalled on the computer. For more information, see Using antivirus software on page 39. Get to know your computerLearn about your computer features. See Components on page 3 and Navigating the screen on page 12 for additional information. Find installed softwareAccess a list of the software preinstalled on the computer:

Select the Start button. or Right-click the Start button, and then select Apps and Features. Back up your hard drive by creating recovery discs or a recovery USB flash drive. See Backing up, restoring, and recovering on page 46. 1 Finding information To locate resources that provide product details, how-to information, and more, use this table. Resource Setup Instructions HP support For HP support, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Contents Overview of computer setup and features Online chat with an HP technician Support telephone numbers Replacement parts videos (select products only) Maintenance and service guides HP service center locations Proper workstation setup Safety & Comfort Guide To access this guide:

Select the Start button, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. Electrical and mechanical safety information Guidelines for posture and work habits that increase your comfort and decrease your risk of injury or Go to http://www.hp.com/ergo. IMPORTANT: You must be connected to the Internet to access the latest version of the user guide. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices To access this document:

Select the Start button, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. Limited Warranty*

To access this document:

Select the Start button, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. or Go to http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments. IMPORTANT: You must be connected to the Internet to access the latest version of the user guide. Important regulatory notices, including information about proper battery disposal, if needed. Specific warranty information about this computer

*You can find your HP Limited Warranty located with the user guides on your product and/or on the CD or DVD provided in the box. In some countries or regions, HP may provide a printed warranty in the box. For countries or regions where the warranty is not provided in printed format, you can request a copy from http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments. For products purchased in Asia Pacific, you can write to HP at POD, PO Box 161, Kitchener Road Post Office, Singapore 912006. Include your product name, and your name, phone number, and postal address. 2 Chapter 1 Welcome 2 Components Locating hardware To find out what hardware is installed on your computer:

Type device manager in the taskbar search box, and then select the Device Manager app. A list displays all the devices installed on your computer. For information about system hardware components and the system BIOS version number, press fn+esc

(select products only). Locating software To find out what software is installed on your computer:

Select the Start button. or Right-click the Start button, and then select Apps and Features. Locating hardware 3 Labels The labels affixed to the computer provide information you may need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the computer. Labels may be in paper form or imprinted on the product. IMPORTANT: Check the following locations for the labels described in this section: the bottom of the computer, inside the battery bay, under the service door, on the back of the display, or on the bottom of a tablet kickstand. Service labelProvides important information to identify your computer. When contacting support, you may be asked for the serial number, the product number, or the model number. Locate this information before you contact support. Your service label will resemble one of the examples shown below. Refer to the illustration that most closely matches the service label on your computer. Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) HP product name Model number Product ID Serial number Warranty period Component

(1)

(2) HP product name Product ID 4 Chapter 2 Components Component

(3)

(4) Serial number Warranty period Regulatory label(s)Provide(s) regulatory information about the computer. Wireless certification label(s)Provide(s) information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings for the countries or regions in which the devices have been approved for use. Labels 5 3 Network connections Your computer can travel with you wherever you go. But even at home, you can explore the globe and access information from millions of websites using your computer and a wired or wireless network connection. This chapter will help you get connected to that world. Connecting to a wireless network Your computer may be equipped with one or more of the following wireless devices:

WLAN deviceConnects the computer to wireless local area networks (commonly referred to as Wi-Fi networks, wireless LANs, or WLANs) in corporate offices, your home, and public places such as airports, restaurants, coffee shops, hotels, and universities. In a WLAN, the mobile wireless device in your computer communicates with a wireless router or a wireless access point. HP Mobile Broadband Module (select products only)A wireless wide area network (WWAN) device that gives you wireless connectivity over a much larger area. Mobile network operators install base stations

(similar to cell phone towers) throughout large geographic areas, effectively providing coverage across entire states, regions, or even countries. Bluetooth deviceCreates a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-enabled devices such as computers, phones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. In a PAN, each device communicates directly with other devices, and devices must be relatively close togethertypically within 10 meters (approximately 33 feet) of each other. You can control the wireless devices in your computer using one or more of these features:

Wireless button (also called airplane mode key or wireless key) (referred to in this chapter as wireless button) Using the wireless controls Operating system controls Wireless button The computer may have a wireless button, one or more wireless devices, and one or two wireless lights. All the wireless devices on your computer are enabled at the factory. The wireless light indicates the overall power state of your wireless devices, not the status of individual devices. Operating system controls The Network and Sharing Center allows you to set up a connection or network, connect to a network, and diagnose and repair network problems. To use operating system controls:

Type control panel in the taskbar search box, and then select Control Panel. Select Network and Internet, and then select Network and Sharing Center. 1. 2. or 6 Chapter 3 Network connections On the taskbar, select the network status icon, and then select Network & Internet settings. Connecting to a WLAN NOTE: When you are setting up Internet access in your home, you must establish an account with an Internet service provider (ISP). To purchase Internet service and a modem, contact a local ISP. The ISP will help set up the modem, install a network cable to connect your wireless router to the modem, and test the Internet service. To connect to a WLAN, follow these steps:

Be sure that the WLAN device is on. 1. 2. On the taskbar, select the network status icon, and then connect to one of the available networks. If the WLAN is a security-enabled WLAN, you are prompted to enter a security code. Enter the code, and then select Next to complete the connection. NOTE:

If no WLANs are listed, you may be out of range of a wireless router or access point. NOTE:

If you do not see the WLAN you want to connect to:

1. On the taskbar, right-click the network status icon, and then select Open Network & Internet settings. or 2. 3. On the taskbar, select the network status icon, and then select Network & Internet settings. Under the Network & Internet Status section, select Network and Sharing Center. Select Set up a new connection or network. A list of options is displayed, allowing you to manually search for and connect to a network or to create a new network connection. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the connection. After the connection is made, select the network status icon at the far right of the taskbar, to verify the name and status of the connection. NOTE: The functional range (how far your wireless signals travel) depends on WLAN implementation, router manufacturer, and interference from other electronic devices or structural barriers such as walls and floors. Using HP Mobile Broadband (select products only) Your HP Mobile Broadband computer has built-in support for mobile broadband service. Your new computer, when used with a mobile operators network, gives you the freedom to connect to the Internet, send e-mail, or connect to your corporate network without the need for Wi-Fi hotspots. You might need the HP Mobile Broadband Module IMEI and/or MEID number to activate mobile broadband service. The number may be printed on a label located on the bottom of your computer, inside the battery bay, under the service door, or on the back of the display. or 1. 2. 3. On the taskbar, select the network status icon. Select Network & Internet settings. Under the Network & Internet section, select Cellular, and then select Advanced Options. Connecting to a wireless network 7 Some mobile network operators require the use of a SIM card. A SIM card contains basic information about you, such as a personal identification number (PIN), as well as network information. Some computers include a SIM card that is preinstalled. If the SIM card is not preinstalled, it may be provided in the HP Mobile Broadband information provided with your computer or the mobile network operator may provide it separately from the computer. For information about HP Mobile Broadband and how to activate service with a preferred mobile network operator, see the HP Mobile Broadband information included with your computer. Using GPS (select products only) Your computer may be equipped with a Global Positioning System (GPS) device. GPS satellites deliver location, speed, and direction information to GPS-equipped systems. To enable GPS, make sure location is enabled under the Windows privacy setting. Type location in the taskbar search box, and then select Location privacy settings. Follow the on-screen instructions for using location settings. Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select products only) A Bluetooth device provides short-range wireless communications that replace the physical cable connections that traditionally link electronic devices such as the following:

Computers (desktop, notebook) Phones (cellular, cordless, smartphone) Imaging devices (printer, camera) Audio devices (headset, speakers) Mouse External keyboard Connecting Bluetooth devices Before you can use a Bluetooth device, you must establish a Bluetooth connection. Type bluetooth in the taskbar search box, and then select Bluetooth and other devices settings. Turn on Bluetooth, if it is not already turned on. Select Add Bluetooth or other device, and then in the Add a device dialog box, select Bluetooth. Select your device from the list, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If the device requires verification, a pairing code is displayed. On the device you are adding, follow the NOTE:

on-screen instructions to verify that the code on your device matches the pairing code. For more information, refer to the documentation provided with the device. If your device does not appear in the list, be sure that Bluetooth on that device is turned on. Some NOTE:

devices may have additional requirements; refer to the documentation provided with the device. Using NFC to share information (select products only) Your computer supports Near Field Communication (NFC), which allows you to wirelessly share information between two NFC-enabled devices. Information is transferred by tapping the tapping area (antenna) of the 8 Chapter 3 Network connections 1. 2. 1. 2. 3. 4. computer with the antenna of your phone or other device. With NFC and supported apps, you can share websites, transfer contact information, transfer payments, and print on NFC-enabled printers. NOTE: To locate the tapping area on your computer, see Components on page 3. Sharing 1. Confirm that the NFC function is enabled. Type wireless in the taskbar search box, and then select Turn wireless devices on or off. a. b. Confirm that the selection for NFC is On. 2. Tap the NFC tapping area with an NFC-enabled device. You may hear a sound when the devices connect. NOTE: To find the location of the antenna on the other NFC device, refer to your device instructions. 3. Follow any on-screen instructions to continue. Connecting to a wired network Select products may allow wired connections: local area network (LAN) and modem connection. A LAN connection uses a network cable and is much faster than a modem, which uses a telephone cable. Both cables are sold separately. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not plug a modem cable or telephone cable into an RJ-45 (network) jack. Connecting to a local area network (LAN) (select products only) Use a LAN connection if you want to connect the computer directly to a router in your home (instead of working wirelessly), or if you want to connect to an existing network at your office. NOTE: A feature called HP LAN-Wireless Protection may be enabled on your computer. It closes your wireless (Wi-Fi) or WWAN connection when you connect directly to a LAN. For more information about HP LAN-

Wireless Protection, see Using HP LAN-Wireless Protection (select products only) on page 10. If there is no RJ-45 port on the computer, connecting to a LAN requires an 8-pin, RJ-45 network cable or an optional docking device or expansion product. To connect the network cable, follow these steps:

1. Plug the network cable into the network jack (1) on the computer or on an optional docking device or expansion product. Connecting to a wired network 9 2. Plug the other end of the network cable into a network wall jack (2) or router. If the network cable contains noise suppression circuitry (3), which prevents interference from NOTE:

TV and radio reception, orient the circuitry end of the cable toward the computer. Using HP LAN-Wireless Protection (select products only) In a LAN environment, you can set HP LAN-Wireless Protection to safeguard your LAN network from unauthorized wireless access. When HP LAN-Wireless Protection is enabled, the WLAN (Wi-Fi) or WWAN connection is turned off when the computer is connected directly to a LAN. Turning on and customizing HP LAN-Wireless Protection 1. Connect a network cable to the network jack on the computer, or on an optional docking device or expansion product. 3. 4. 5. 2. Start Computer Setup (BIOS). Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Setup. Tablets without keyboards:

Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed. Tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. Select Advanced, and then select Built-in Device Options. Select the check box for LAN/WLAN Auto Switching and/or LAN/WWAN Auto Switching to turn off WLAN and/or WWAN connections when connected to a LAN network. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. 10 Chapter 3 Network connections Using HP MAC Address Pass Through to identify your computer on a network (select products only) MAC Address Pass Through provides a customizable way of identifying your computer and its communications on networks. This system MAC address provides unique identification even when your computer is connected through an Ethernet adapter. This address is enabled by default. Customizing MAC Address Pass Through 1. Start Computer Setup (BIOS). Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Setup. Tablets without keyboards:

2. 3. 4. 5. or Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed. Tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. Select Advanced, and then select MAC Address Pass Through. In the box to the right of Host Based MAC Address, select either System Address to enable MAC address Pass Through or Custom Address to customize the address. If you selected Custom, select MAC ADDRESS, enter your customized system MAC address, and then press enter to save the address. If the computer has an embedded LAN and you would like to use the embedded MAC address as the system MAC address, select Reuse Embedded LAN Address. Select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Using HP MAC Address Pass Through to identify your computer on a network (select products only) 11 4 Navigating the screen You can navigate the computer screen in one or more of the following ways:

Use touch gestures directly on the computer screen Use touch gestures on the TouchPad Use an optional mouse or keyboard (purchased separately) Use an on-screen keyboard Use a pointing stick Using TouchPad and touch screen gestures The TouchPad helps you navigate the computer screen and control the pointer using simple touch gestures. You can also use the left and right TouchPad buttons as you would use the corresponding buttons on an external mouse. To navigate a touch screen (select products only), touch the screen directly using gestures described in this chapter. You can also customize gestures and view demonstrations of how they work. Type control panel in the taskbar search box, select Control Panel, and then select Hardware and Sound. Under Devices and Printers, select Mouse. NOTE: Unless noted, gestures can be used on the TouchPad or a touch screen (select products only). Tap Use the tap/double-tap gesture to select or open an item on the screen. Point to an item on the screen, and then tap one finger on the TouchPad zone or touch screen to select the item. Double-tap an item to open it. 12 Chapter 4 Navigating the screen Two-finger pinch zoom Use the two-finger pinch zoom to zoom out or in on images or text. Zoom out by placing two fingers apart on the TouchPad zone or touch screen and then moving your fingers together. Zoom in by placing two fingers together on the TouchPad zone or touch screen and then moving your fingers apart. Two-finger slide (TouchPad only) Use the two-finger slide to move up, down, or sideways on a page or image. Place two fingers slightly apart on the TouchPad zone and then drag them up, down, left, or right. Two-finger tap (TouchPad only) Use the two-finger tap to open the menu for an object on the screen. NOTE: The two-finger tap performs the same function as right-clicking with the mouse. Tap two fingers on the TouchPad zone to open the options menu for the selected object. Four-finger tap (TouchPad only) Use the four-finger tap to open the action center. Using TouchPad and touch screen gestures 13 Tap four fingers on the Touchpad to open the action center and view current settings and notifications. Three-finger swipe (TouchPad only) Use the three-finger swipe to view open windows and to switch between open windows and the desktop. Swipe 3 fingers away from you to see all open windows. Swipe 3 fingers toward you to show the desktop. Swipe 3 fingers left or right to switch between open windows. 14 Chapter 4 Navigating the screen One-finger slide (touch screen only) Use the one-finger slide to pan or scroll through lists and pages, or to move an object. To scroll across the screen, lightly slide one finger across the screen in the direction you want to move. To move an object, press and hold your finger on an object, and then drag your finger to move the object. Using an optional keyboard or mouse An optional keyboard or mouse allows you to type, select items, scroll, and perform the same functions as you do using touch gestures. The keyboard also allows you to use action keys and hot keys to perform specific functions. Using an on-screen keyboard (select products only) 1. To display an on-screen keyboard, tap the keyboard icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. 2. Begin typing. NOTE: Suggested words may be displayed above the on-screen keyboard. Tap a word to select it. NOTE: Action keys and hot keys do not display or function on the on-screen keyboard. Using an optional keyboard or mouse 15 5 Entertainment features Use your HP computer for business or pleasure to meet with others via the camera, mix audio and video, or connect external devices like a projector, monitor, TV, or speakers. See Components on page 3 to locate the audio, video and camera features on your computer. Using a camera (select products only) Your computer has a camera (integrated camera) that records video and captures photographs. Some models allow you to video conference and chat online using streaming video. To access the camera, type camera in the taskbar search box, and then select Camera from the list of applications. Using audio Connecting speakers You can download and listen to music, stream audio content (including radio) from the web, record audio, or mix audio and video to create multimedia. You can also play music CDs on the computer (on select models) or attach an external optical drive to play CDs. To enhance your listening enjoyment, attach headphones or speakers. You can attach wired speakers to your computer by connecting them to a USB port or to the audio-out

(headphone)/audio-in (microphone) combo jack on your computer or on a docking station. To connect wireless speakers to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. To connect high-definition speakers to the computer, see Setting up HDMI audio on page 21. Before connecting speakers, lower the volume setting. Connecting headphones WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, lower the volume setting before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To access this guide:

Select the Start button, select HP, and then select HP Documentation. You can connect wired headphones to the headphone jack or to the audio-out (headphone)/audio-in

(microphone) combo jack on your computer. To connect wireless headphones to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. Connecting a microphone To record audio, connect a microphone to the microphone jack on the computer. For best results when recording, speak directly into the microphone and record sound in a setting free of background noise. 16 Chapter 5 Entertainment features Connecting headsets WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, lower the volume setting before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To access this guide:

Select the Start button, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. Headphones combined with a microphone are called headsets. You can connect wired headsets to the audio-

out (headphone)/audio-in (microphone) combo jack on your computer. To connect wireless headsets to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. Using sound settings Use sound settings to adjust system volume, change system sounds, or manage audio devices. To view or change sound settings:

and then select Sound. Type control panel in the taskbar search box, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, Your computer may include an enhanced sound system by Bang & Olufsen, DTS, Beats audio, or another provider. As a result, your computer may include advanced audio features that can be controlled through an audio control panel specific to your audio system. Use the audio control panel to view and control audio settings. Type control panel in the taskbar search box, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, and then select the audio control panel specific to your system. Using video Your computer is a powerful video device that enables you to watch streaming video from your favorite websites and download video and movies to watch on your computer when you are not connected to a network. To enhance your viewing enjoyment, use one of the video ports on the computer to connect an external monitor, projector, or TV. IMPORTANT: Be sure that the external device is connected to the correct port on the computer, using the correct cable. Follow the device manufacturer's instructions. For information on using your video features, refer to HP Support Assistant. Connecting a DisplayPort device using a USB Type-C cable (select products only) NOTE: To connect a USB Type-C DisplayPort device to your computer, you need a USB Type-C cable, purchased separately. To see video or high-resolution display output on an external DisplayPort device, connect the DisplayPort device according to the following instructions:

1. Connect one end of the USB Type-C cable to the USB SuperSpeed and DisplayPort port on the computer. Using video 17 2. 3. Connect the other end of the cable to the external DisplayPort device. Press f1 to alternate the computer screen image between 4 display states:

PC screen only: View the screen image on the computer only. Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across both the computer and external device. Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only. Each time you press f1 the display state changes. NOTE:

For best results, especially if you choose the "Extend" option, increase the screen resolution of the external device, as follows. Select the Start button, select Settings, and then select System. Under Display, select the appropriate resolution, and then select Keep changes. Connecting a Thunderbolt device using a USB Type-C cable (select products only) NOTE: To connect a USB Type-C Thunderbolt device to your computer, you need a USB Type-C cable, purchased separately. To see video or high-resolution display output on an external Thunderbolt device, connect the Thunderbolt device according to the following instructions:

1. Connect one end of the USB Type-C cable to the USB Type-C Thunderbolt port on the computer. 18 Chapter 5 Entertainment features 2. 3. Connect the other end of the cable to the external Thunderbolt device. Press fn+f4 to alternate the computer screen image between 4 display states:

PC screen only: View the screen image on the computer only. Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across both the computer and external device. Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only. Each time you press fn+f4 the display state changes. NOTE:

For best results, especially if you choose the "Extend" option, increase the screen resolution of the external device, as follows. Select the Start button, select Settings, and then select System. Under Display, select the appropriate resolution, and then select Keep changes. Connecting video devices by using a VGA cable (select products only) NOTE: To connect a VGA video device to your computer, you need an VGA cable, purchased separately. To see the computer screen image on an external VGA monitor or projected for a presentation, connect a monitor or projector to the computer's VGA port. 1. Connect the VGA cable from the monitor or projector to the VGA port on the computer as shown. Using video 19 2. Press f4 to alternate the screen image between 4 display states:

PC screen only: View the screen image on the computer only. Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and the external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across both the computer and the external device. Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only. Each time you press f4, the display state changes. NOTE:

For best results, especially if you choose the "Extend" option, increase the screen resolution of the external device, as follows. Select the Start button, select Settings, and then select System. Under Display, select the appropriate resolution, and then select Keep changes. Connecting video devices using an HDMI cable (select products only) NOTE: To connect an HDMI device to your computer, you need an HDMI cable, purchased separately. To see the computer screen image on a high-definition TV or monitor, connect the high-definition device according to the following instructions:

1. Connect one end of the HDMI cable to the HDMI port on the computer. 20 Chapter 5 Entertainment features 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. Connect the other end of the cable to the high-definition TV or monitor. Press f4 to alternate the computer screen image between 4 display states:

PC screen only: View the screen image on the computer only. Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and the external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across both the computer and the external device. Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only. Each time you press f4, the display state changes. NOTE:

For best results, especially if you choose the "Extend" option, increase the screen resolution of the external device, as follows. Select the Start button, select Settings, and then select System. Under Display, select the appropriate resolution, and then select Keep changes. Setting up HDMI audio HDMI is the only video interface that supports high-definition video and audio. After you connect an HDMI TV to the computer, you can then turn on HDMI audio by following these steps:

Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then select Playback devices. On the Playback tab, select the name of the digital output device. Click Set Default, and then click OK. To return the audio stream to the computer speakers:

Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then click Playback devices. On the Playback tab, click Speakers. Click Set Default, and then click OK. Connecting a Thunderbolt DisplayPort device The Thunderbolt DisplayPort connects an optional high-resolution display device or a high-performance data device. This port delivers higher performance than the VGA external monitor port and improves digital connectivity. Using video 21 Install all the latest drivers for your Thunderbolt device before connecting the device to the NOTE:

Thunderbolt DisplayPort. Thunderbolt cable and Thunderbolt device (sold separately) must be compatible with Windows. To determine whether your device is Thunderbolt Certified for Windows, go to https://thunderbolttechnology.net/products. 1. Connect one end of the Thunderbolt DisplayPort cable to the Thunderbolt DisplayPort on the computer. 2. 3. Connect the other end of the cable to the digital display device. Press f4 to alternate the computer screen image between 4 display states:

PC screen only: View the screen image on the computer only. Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across both the computer and external device. Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only. Each time you press f4 the display state changes. For best results, especially if you choose the "Extend" option, increase the screen resolution of NOTE:

the external device, as follows. Select the Start button, select Settings, and then select System. Under Display, select the appropriate resolution, and then select Keep changes. Discovering and connecting wired displays using MultiStream Transport MultiStream Transport (MST) allows you to connect multiple wired display devices to your computer by connecting to the VGA or DisplayPorts on your computer and also to the VGA or DisplayPorts on a hub or an external docking station. You can connect in several ways, depending on the type of graphics controller installed on your computer and whether or not your computer includes a built-in hub. Go to Device Manager to find out what hardware is installed on your computer. Type device manager in the taskbar search box, and then select the Device Manager app. A list displays all the devices installed on your computer. Connect displays to computers with AMD or Nvidia graphics (with an optional hub) NOTE: With an AMD graphics controller and optional hub, you can connect up to 6 external display devices. NOTE: With an Nvidia graphics controller and optional hub, you can connect up to 4 external display devices. 22 Chapter 5 Entertainment features 1. 2. 3. To set up multiple display devices, follow these steps:

Connect an external hub (purchased separately) to the DisplayPort on your computer, using a DP-to-DP cable (purchased separately). Be sure that the hub power adapter is connected to AC power. Connect your external display devices to the VGA ports or DisplayPorts on the hub. To see all of your connected display devices, type device manager in the taskbar search box, and then select the Device Manager app. If you don't see all of your connected displays, be sure that each is connected to the correct port on the hub. NOTE: Multiple display choices include Duplicate, which mirrors your computer screen on all enabled display devices, or Extend, which spans your computer screen across all enabled display devices. Connect displays to computers with Intel graphics (with an optional hub) NOTE: With an Intel graphics controller and optional hub, you can connect up to 3 display devices. To set up multiple display devices, follow these steps:

1. Connect an external hub (purchased separately) to the DisplayPort on your computer, using a DP-to-DP cable (purchased separately). Be sure that the hub power adapter is connected to AC power. 2. Connect your external display devices to the VGA ports or DisplayPorts on the hub. 3. When Windows detects a monitor connected to the DP hub, the DisplayPort Topology Notification dialog box is displayed. Click the appropriate options to configure your displays. Multiple display choices include Duplicate, which mirrors your computer screen on all enabled display devices, or Extend, which extends the screen image across all enabled display devices. If this dialog box does not appear, be sure that each external display device is connected to the NOTE:

correct port on the hub. Select the Start button, select Settings, and then select System. Under Display, select the appropriate resolution, and then select Keep changes. Connect displays to computers with Intel graphics (with a built-in hub) With your internal hub and Intel graphics controller, you can connect up to 3 display devices in the following configurations:

Two 1920 x 1200 DP monitors connected to the computer + one 1920 x 1200 VGA monitor connected to an optional docking station One 2560 x 1600 DP monitor connected to the computer + one 1920 x 1200 VGA monitor connected to an optional docking station To set up multiple display devices, follow these steps:

1. Connect your external display devices to the VGA ports or DisplayPorts (DP) on the computer base or the docking station. 2. When Windows detects a monitor connected to the DP hub, the DisplayPort Topology Notification dialog box is displayed. Click the appropriate options to configure your displays. Multiple display choices include Duplicate, which mirrors your computer screen on all enabled display devices, or Extend, which extends the screen image across all enabled display devices. If this dialog box does not appear, be sure that each external display device is connected to the NOTE:

correct port on the hub. Select the Start button, select Settings, and then select System. Under Display, select the appropriate resolution, and then select Keep changes. Using video 23 Discovering and connecting to Miracast-compatible wireless displays (select products only) NOTE: To learn what type of display you have (Miracast-compatible or Intel WiDi), refer to the documentation that came with your TV or secondary display. To discover and connect to Miracast-compatible wireless displays without leaving your current apps, follow the steps below. To open Miracast:

Type project in the taskbar search box, and then click Project to a second screen. Click Connect to a wireless display, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Discovering and connecting to Intel WiDi certified displays (select Intel products only) Use Intel WiDi to wirelessly project individual files such as photos, music, or videos, or to duplicate your entire computer screen to a TV or a secondary display device. Intel WiDi, a premium Miracast solution, makes it easy and seamless to pair your secondary display device;

provides for full-screen duplication; and improves speed, quality, and scaling. To connect to Intel WiDi certified displays:

Type project in the taskbar search box, and then click Project to a second screen. Click Connect to a wireless display, and then follow the on-screen instructions. To open Intel WiDi:

Type Intel WiDi in the taskbar search box, and then click Intel WiDi. Using data transfer Your computer is a powerful entertainment device that enables you to transfer photos, videos, and movies from your USB devices to view on your computer. To enhance your viewing enjoyment, use one of the USB Type-C ports on the computer to connect a USB device, such as a cell phone, camera, activity tracker, or smartwatch, and transfer the files to your computer. IMPORTANT: Be sure that the external device is connected to the correct port on the computer, using the correct cable. Follow the device manufacturer's instructions. For information on using your USB Type-C features, refer to HP Support Assistant. Connecting devices to a USB Type-C port (select products only) NOTE: To connect a USB Type-C device to your computer, you need a USB Type-C cable, purchased separately. 1. Connect one end of the USB Type-C cable to the USB Type-C port on the computer. 24 Chapter 5 Entertainment features 2. Connect the other end of the cable to the external device. Using data transfer 25 6 Managing power Your computer can operate on either battery power or external power. When the computer is running on battery power and an external power source is not available to charge the battery, it is important to monitor and conserve the battery charge. Some power management features described in this chapter may not be available on your computer. Using Sleep and Hibernation CAUTION: Several well-known vulnerabilities exist when a computer is in the Sleep state. To prevent an unauthorized user from accessing data on your computer, even encrypted data, HP recommends that you always initiate Hibernation instead of Sleep anytime the computer will be out of your physical possession. This practice is particularly important when you travel with your computer. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of possible audio and video degradation, loss of audio or video playback functionality, or loss of information, do not initiate Sleep while reading from or writing to a disc or an external media card. Windows has two power-saving states, Sleep and Hibernation. SleepThe Sleep state is automatically initiated after a period of inactivity. Your work is saved to memory, allowing you to resume your work very quickly. You can also initiate Sleep manually. For more information, see Initiating and exiting Sleep on page 26. HibernationThe Hibernation state is automatically initiated if the battery reaches a critical level or the computer has been in the Sleep state for an extended period of time. In the Hibernation state, your work is saved to a hibernation file and the computer powers down. You can also initiate Hibernation manually. For more information, see Initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) on page 27. Initiating and exiting Sleep You can initiate Sleep in any of the following ways:

Select the Start button, select the Power icon, and then select Sleep. Close the display (select products only). Press the Sleep hot key (select products only); for example, fn+f1 or fn+f12. Briefly press the power button (select products only). You can exit Sleep in any of the following ways:

Briefly press the power button. If the computer is closed, raise the display (select products only). Press a key on the keyboard (select products only). Tap the TouchPad (select products only). When the computer exits Sleep, your work returns to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on exiting Sleep, you must enter your Windows password NOTE:

before your work returns to the screen. 26 Chapter 6 Managing power Initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) You can enable user-initiated Hibernation and change other power settings and timeouts using Power Options. 1. Right-click the Power icon

, and then select Power Options. 2. 3. In the left pane, select Choose what the power buttons do (wording may vary by product). Depending on your product, you can enable Hibernation for battery power or external power in any of the following ways:

Power buttonUnder Power and sleep buttons and lid settings (wording may vary by product), select When I press the power button, and then select Hibernate. Sleep button (select products only)Under Power and sleep buttons and lid settings (wording may vary by product), select When I press the sleep button, and then select Hibernate. Lid (select products only)Under Power and sleep buttons and lid settings (wording may vary by product), select When I close the lid, and then select Hibernate. Power menuSelect Change Settings that are currently unavailable, and then, under Shutdown settings, select the Hibernate check box. The Power menu can be accessed by selecting the Start button. 4. Select Save changes. To initiate Hibernation, use the method that you enabled in step 3. To exit Hibernation, briefly press the power button. If you have set a password to be required on exiting Hibernation, you must enter your Windows NOTE:

password before your work returns to the screen. Shutting down (turning off) the computer CAUTION: Unsaved information is lost when the computer shuts down. Be sure to save your work before shutting down the computer. The Shut down command closes all open programs, including the operating system, and then turns off the display and the computer. Shut down the computer when it will be unused and disconnected from external power for an extended period. The recommended procedure is to use the Windows Shut down command. If the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation, first exit Sleep or Hibernation by briefly NOTE:

pressing the power button. Save your work and close all open programs. 1. 2. Select the Start button, select the Power icon, and then select Shut down. Shutting down (turning off) the computer 27 If the computer is unresponsive and you are unable to use the preceding shutdown procedures, try the following emergency procedures in the sequence provided:

Press ctrl+alt+delete, select the Power icon, and then select Shut down. Press and hold the power button for at least 10 seconds. If your computer has a user-replaceable battery (select products only), disconnect the computer from external power, and then remove the battery. Using the Power icon and Power Options The Power icon is located on the Windows taskbar. The Power icon allows you to quickly access power settings and view the remaining battery charge. To view the percentage of remaining battery charge, place the mouse pointer over the Power icon

. To use Power Options, rightclick the Power icon

, and then select Power Options. Different Power icons indicate whether the computer is running on battery or external power. Placing the mouse pointer over the icon reveals a message if the battery has reached a low or critical battery level. Running on battery power WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased from HP. When a charged battery is in the computer and the computer is not plugged into external power, the computer runs on battery power. When the computer is off and unplugged from external power, the battery in the computer slowly discharges. The computer displays a message when the battery reaches a low or critical battery level. Computer battery life varies, depending on power management settings, programs running on the computer, screen brightness, external devices connected to the computer, and other factors. NOTE: When you disconnect external power, the display brightness is automatically decreased to conserve battery charge. Select computer products can switch between graphic controllers to conserve battery charge. Using HP Fast Charge (select products only) The HP Fast Charge feature allows you to quickly charge your computer battery. Charging time may vary by

+/- 10%. Depending on your computer model and the HP AC adapter provided with your computer, HP Fast Charge operates in one or more of the following ways:

When the remaining battery charge is between zero and 50%, the battery will charge to 50% of full capacity in no more than 30 to 45 minutes, depending on your computer model. When the remaining battery charge is between zero and 90%, the battery will charge to 90% of full capacity in no more than 90 minutes. To use HP Fast Charge, shut down your computer, and then connect the AC adapter to your computer and to external power. 28 Chapter 6 Managing power Displaying battery charge To view the percentage of remaining battery charge, place the mouse pointer over the Power icon

. Finding battery information in HP Support Assistant (select products only) To access battery information:

1. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. 2. Select Troubleshooting and fixes, and then in the Diagnostics section, select HP Battery Check. If HP Battery Check indicates that your battery should be replaced, contact support. HP Support Assistant provides the following tools and information about the battery:

HP Battery Check Information about battery types, specifications, life cycles, and capacity Conserving battery power To conserve battery power and maximize battery life:

Lower the brightness of the display. Select the Power saver setting in Power Options. Turn off wireless devices when you are not using them. Disconnect unused external devices that are not plugged into an external power source, such as an external hard drive connected to a USB port. Stop, disable, or remove any external media cards that you are not using. Before you leave your work, initiate Sleep or shut down the computer. Identifying low battery levels When a battery that is the sole power source for the computer reaches a low or critical battery level, the following behavior occurs:

The battery light (select products only) indicates a low or critical battery level. or NOTE:

on page 28. The Power icon shows a low or critical battery notification. For additional information about the Power icon, see Using the Power icon and Power Options Running on battery power 29 The computer takes the following actions for a critical battery level:

If Hibernation is disabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer remains briefly in the Sleep state and then shuts down and loses any unsaved information. If Hibernation is enabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer initiates Hibernation. 1. 2. Resolving a low battery level Resolving a low battery level when external power is available Connect one of the following to the computer and to external power:

AC adapter Optional docking device or expansion product Optional power adapter purchased as an accessory from HP Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available Save your work and shut down the computer. Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation Connect the AC adapter to the computer and to external power. Exit Hibernation by pressing the power button. 30 Chapter 6 Managing power 7 Security Protecting the computer Standard security features provided by the Windows operating system and the Windows Computer Setup utility (BIOS, which runs under any operating system) can protect your personal settings and data from a variety of risks. NOTE: Security solutions are designed to act as deterrents. These deterrents may not prevent a product from being mishandled or stolen. NOTE: Before you send your computer for service, back up and delete confidential files, and remove all password settings. NOTE: Some features listed in this chapter may not be available on your computer. NOTE: Your computer supports Computrace, which is an online security-based tracking and recovery service available in select regions. If the computer is stolen, Computrace can track the computer if the unauthorized user accesses the Internet. You must purchase the software and subscribe to the service in order to use Computrace. For information about ordering the Computrace software, go to http://www.hp.com. Computer risk Security feature Unauthorized use of the computer HP Client Security software, in combination with a password, smart card, contactless card, registered fingerprints, or other authentication credential BIOS power-on password Unauthorized access to Computer Setup (BIOS) BIOS administrator password in Computer Setup*

Unauthorized access to the contents of a hard drive DriveLock password (select products only) in Computer Setup*

Unauthorized startup from an optional external optical drive

(select products only), optional external hard drive (select products only), or internal network adapter Boot options feature in Computer Setup*

Unauthorized access to a Windows user account Windows user password Unauthorized access to data Windows BitLocker Unauthorized removal of the computer Security cable slot (used with an optional security cable on select products only)

*Computer Setup is an embedded, ROM-based utility that can be used even when the operating system is not working or will not load. You can use a pointing device (TouchPad, pointing stick, or USB mouse) or the keyboard to navigate and make selections in Computer Setup. NOTE: On tablets without keyboards, you can use the touch screen. Using passwords A password is a group of characters that you choose to secure your computer information. Several types of passwords can be set, depending on how you want to control access to your information. Passwords can be set in Windows or in Computer Setup, which is preinstalled on the computer. Protecting the computer 31 BIOS administrator, power-on, and DriveLock passwords are set in Computer Setup and are managed by the system BIOS. Windows passwords are set only in the Windows operating system. If you forget both the DriveLock user password and the DriveLock master password set in Computer Setup, the hard drive that is protected by the passwords is permanently locked and can no longer be used. You can use the same password for a Computer Setup feature and for a Windows security feature. Use the following tips for creating and saving passwords:

When creating passwords, follow requirements set by the program. Do not use the same password for multiple applications or websites, and do not reuse your Windows password for any other application or website. Use the Password Manager feature of HP Client Security to store your user names and passwords for your websites and applications. You can securely read them in the future if they cannot be remembered. Do not store passwords in a file on the computer. The following tables list commonly used Windows and BIOS administrator passwords and describe their functions. Setting passwords in Windows Password Function Administrator password*

Protects access to a Windows administrator-level account. NOTE: Setting the Windows administrator password does not set the BIOS administrator password. User password*

Protects access to a Windows user account.

*For information about setting a Windows administrator password or a Windows user password, type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. 32 Chapter 7 Security Setting passwords in Computer Setup Password Function BIOS administrator password*

Protects access to Computer Setup. Power-on password DriveLock master password*

DriveLock user password*

If features have been enabled to prevent removing the NOTE:

BIOS administrator password, you may not be able to remove it until those features have been disabled. Must be entered each time you turn on or restart the computer. If you forget your power-on password, you cannot turn on or restart the computer. Protects access to the internal hard drive that is protected by DriveLock, and is set under DriveLock Passwords during the enable process. This password is also used to remove DriveLock protection. Protects access to the internal hard drive that is protected by DriveLock, and is set under DriveLock Passwords during the enable process.

*For details about each of these passwords, see the following topics. Managing a BIOS administrator password To set, change, or delete this password, follow these steps:

Setting a new BIOS administrator password 1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Setup. Tablets without keyboards:

Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. 2. Select Security, select Create BIOS administrator password or Set Up BIOS administrator Password

(select products only), and then press enter. 3. When prompted, type a password. 4. When prompted, type the new password again to confirm. 5. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Changing a BIOS administrator password 1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Using passwords 33 2. 3. 2. 3. Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Tablets without keyboards:

Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. Enter your current BIOS administrator password. Select Security, select Change BIOS administrator Password or Change Password (select products only), and then press enter. 4. When prompted, type your current password. 5. When prompted, type your new password. 6. When prompted, type your new password again to confirm. 7. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Deleting a BIOS administrator password 1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Setup. Tablets without keyboards:

Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. Enter your current BIOS administrator password. Select Security, select Change BIOS administrator Password or Change Password (select products only), and then press enter. 4. When prompted, type your current password. 5. When prompted for the new password, leave the field empty, and then press enter. 6. When prompted to type your new password again, leave the field empty, and then press enter. 7. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Entering a BIOS administrator password At the BIOS administrator password prompt, type your password (using the same kind of keys you used to set the password), and then press enter. After two unsuccessful attempts to enter the BIOS administrator password, you must restart the computer and try again. 34 Chapter 7 Security Using DriveLock Security Options DriveLock protection prevents unauthorized access to the contents of a hard drive. DriveLock can be applied only to the internal hard drive(s) of the computer. After DriveLock protection is applied to a drive, the appropriate password must be entered to access the drive. The drive must be inserted into the computer or an advanced port replicator in order for it to be unlocked. DriveLock Security Options offers the following features:

Automatic DriveLockSee Selecting Automatic DriveLock (select products only) on page 35. Set DriveLock Master PasswordSee Selecting manual DriveLock on page 36. Enable DriveLockSee Enabling DriveLock and setting a DriveLock user password on page 37. Selecting Automatic DriveLock (select products only) A BIOS administrator password must be set before you can enable Automatic DriveLock. When Automatic DriveLock is enabled, a random DriveLock user password and a DriveLock master password derived from the BIOS administrator password are created. When the computer is turned on, the random user password automatically unlocks the drive. If the drive is moved to another computer, you must enter the BIOS administrator password for the original computer at the DriveLock password prompt to unlock the drive. Enabling Automatic DriveLock To enable Automatic DriveLock, follow these steps:

1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Turn off the computer. 1. 2. 1. 2. Tablets without keyboards:

Turn off the tablet. Press the power button, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. At the BIOS administrator password prompt, enter the BIOS administrator password, and then press enter. Select Security, select Hard Drive Utilities, select DriveLock/Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. Use the enter key, left mouse click, or touch screen to select the Automatic DriveLock check box. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. 2. 3. 4. 5. Disabling Automatic DriveLock To disable Automatic DriveLock, follow these steps:

1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Using passwords 35 Press the power button, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Turn off the computer. Tablets without keyboards:

Turn off the tablet. 1. 2. 1. 2. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. At the BIOS administrator password prompt, enter the BIOS administrator password, and then press enter. Select Security, select Hard Drive Utilities, select DriveLock/Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. Select an internal hard drive, and then press enter. Use the enter key, left mouse click, or touch screen to clear the Automatic DriveLock check box. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Entering an Automatic DriveLock password While Automatic DriveLock is enabled and the drive remains attached to the original computer, you will not be prompted to enter a DriveLock password to unlock the drive. However, if the drive is moved to another computer, or the system board is replaced on the original computer, you will be prompted to provide the DriveLock password. If this happens, at the DriveLock Password prompt, type the BIOS administrator password for the original computer (using the same kind of keys you used to set the password), and then press enter to unlock the drive. After three incorrect attempts to enter the password, you must shut down the computer and try again. Selecting manual DriveLock CAUTION: To prevent a DriveLock-protected hard drive from becoming permanently unusable, record the DriveLock user password and the DriveLock master password in a safe place away from your computer. If you forget both DriveLock passwords, the hard drive will be permanently locked and can no longer be used. To manually apply DriveLock protection to an internal hard drive, a master password must be set, and DriveLock must be enabled in Computer Setup. Note the following considerations about using DriveLock protection:

After DriveLock protection is applied to a hard drive, the hard drive can be accessed only by entering either the DriveLock user password or the master password. The owner of the DriveLock user password should be the day-to-day user of the protected hard drive. The owner of the DriveLock master password may be either a system administrator or the day-to-day user. The DriveLock user password and the DriveLock master password can be identical. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 36 Chapter 7 Security Setting a DriveLock master password To set a DriveLock master password, follow these steps:

1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Turn off the computer. 1. 2. 1. 2. 1. 2. 1. 2. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 2. 3. 4. Press the power button, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Tablets without keyboards:

Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. Select Security, make the selection for Hard Drive Utilities, select DriveLock/Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. Select the hard drive you want to protect, and then press enter. Select Set DriveLock Master Password, and then press enter. Carefully read the warning. Follow the on-screen instructions to set a DriveLock master password. NOTE: You can enable DriveLock and set a DriveLock user password before exiting from Computer Setup. For more information, see Enabling DriveLock and setting a DriveLock user password on page 37. 7. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Enabling DriveLock and setting a DriveLock user password To enable DriveLock, and set a DriveLock user password, follow these steps:

1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Turn off the computer. Tablets without keyboards:

Turn off the tablet. Press the power button, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. Select Security, select Hard Drive Utilities, select DriveLock/Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. Select the hard drive you want to protect, and then press enter. Select Enable DriveLock and then press enter. Using passwords 37 Carefully read the warning. Follow the on-screen instructions to set a DriveLock user password and enable DriveLock. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Disabling DriveLock 1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Turn off the computer. Tablets without keyboards:

Turn off the tablet. 1. 2. 1. 2. Press the power button, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. Select Security, select Hard Drive Utilities, select DriveLock/Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. Select the hard drive you want to manage, and then press enter. Select Disable DriveLock, and then press enter. Follow the on-screen instructions to disable DriveLock. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Entering a DriveLock password Be sure that the hard drive is inserted into the computer (not into an optional docking device or external MultiBay). At the DriveLock Password prompt, type your DriveLock user or master password (using the same kind of keys you used to set the password), and then press enter. After three incorrect attempts to enter the password, you must shut down the computer and try again. Changing a DriveLock password To change a DriveLock password in Computer Setup, follow these steps:

Turn off the computer. Press the power button. At the DriveLock Password prompt, type the current DriveLock user password or master password that you are changing, press enter, and then press or tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. Select Security, select Hard Drive Utilities, select DriveLock/Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. 5. 6. 7. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 1. 2. 3. 4. 38 Chapter 7 Security 5. Select the hard drive you want to manage, and then press enter. 6. Make the selection for the DriveLock password that you want to change, and then follow the on-screen instructions to enter passwords. NOTE: The Change DriveLock Master Password option is visible only if the DriveLock master password was provided at the DriveLock Password prompt in step 3. 7. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Windows Hello (select products only) On products equipped with a fingerprint reader or an infrared camera, you can use Windows Hello to sign in by swiping your finger or looking at the camera. To set up Windows Hello:

To add a password, select Add. Select the Start button, select Settings, select Accounts, and then select Sign-in options. Select Get Started, and then follow the on-screen instructions enroll your fingerprint or facial ID and set up a PIN. NOTE: The PIN is not limited in length, but it must consist of numbers only. To include alphabetic or special characters, select the include letters and symbols checkbox. Using antivirus software When you use the computer to access e-mail, a network, or the Internet, you potentially expose it to computer viruses. Computer viruses can disable the operating system, programs, or utilities, or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and, in most cases, repair any damage they have caused. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. Windows Defender is preinstalled on your computer. It is strongly recommended that you continue to use an antivirus program in order to fully protect your computer. For more information about computer viruses, access the HP Support Assistant. Using firewall software Firewalls are designed to prevent unauthorized access to a system or network. A firewall can be a software program you install on your computer and/or network, or it can be a solution made up of both hardware and software. There are two types of firewalls to consider:

Host-based firewallsSoftware that protects only the computer it is installed on. Network-based firewallsInstalled between your DSL or cable modem and your home network to protect all the computers on the network. 1. 2. 3. Windows Hello (select products only) 39 When a firewall is installed on a system, all data sent to and from the system is monitored and compared with a set of user-defined security criteria. Any data that does not meet those criteria is blocked. Your computer or networking equipment may already have a firewall installed. If not, firewall software solutions are available. NOTE: Under some circumstances a firewall can block access to Internet games, interfere with printer or file sharing on a network, or block authorized e-mail attachments. To temporarily resolve the problem, disable the firewall, perform the task that you want to perform, and then reenable the firewall. To permanently resolve the problem, reconfigure the firewall. Installing software updates HP, Windows, and third-party software installed on your computer should be regularly updated to correct security problems and improve software performance. IMPORTANT: Microsoft sends out alerts regarding Windows updates, which may include security updates. To protect the computer from security breaches and computer viruses, install all updates from Microsoft as soon as you receive an alert. You can install these updates automatically. To view or change the settings:

1. 2. 3. Select the Start button, select Settings, and then select Update & Security. Select Windows Update, and then follow the on-screen instructions. To schedule a time for installing updates, select Advanced Options, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP Client Security (select products only) HP Client Security software is preinstalled on your computer. This software can be accessed through the HP Client Security icon at the far right of the taskbar or Windows Control Panel. It provides security features that help protect against unauthorized access to the computer, networks, and critical data. For more information, see the HP Client Security software Help. Using HP Device as a Service (HP DaaS) (select products only) HP DaaS is a cloud-based IT solution that enables businesses to effectively manage and secure their company assets. HP DaaS helps protect devices against malware and other attacks, monitors device health, and helps reduce time spent solving device and security issues. You can quickly download and install the software, which is highly cost effective relative to traditional in-house solutions. For more information, go to https://www.hptouchpointmanager.com/. Using an optional security cable (select products only) A security cable (purchased separately) is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. To connect a security cable to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. 40 Chapter 7 Security Using a fingerprint reader (select products only) Integrated fingerprint readers are available on select products. In order to use the fingerprint reader, you must enroll your fingerprints in HP Client Security's Credential Manager. Refer to the HP Client Security software Help. After you enroll your fingerprints in Credential Manager, you can use HP Client Security's Password Manager to store and fill in your user names and passwords in supported websites and applications. Locating the fingerprint reader The fingerprint reader is a small metallic sensor that is located in one of the following areas of your computer:

Near the bottom of the TouchPad On the right side of the keyboard On the upper-right side of the display On the left side of the display On the back of the display Depending on your product, the reader may be oriented horizontally or vertically. Using a fingerprint reader (select products only) 41 8 Maintenance It is important to perform regular maintenance to keep your computer in optimal condition. This chapter explains how to use tools like Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. It also provides instructions for updating programs and drivers, steps to clean the computer, and tips for traveling with (or shipping) the computer. Improving performance Using Disk Defragmenter You can improve the performance of your computer by performing regular maintenance tasks with tools such as Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. HP recommends using Disk Defragmenter to defragment your hard drive at least once a month. NOTE:

It is not necessary to run Disk Defragmenter on solid-state drives. To run Disk Defragmenter:

Connect the computer to AC power. Type defragment in the taskbar search box, and then select Defragment and optimize your drives. Follow the on-screen instructions. For additional information, access the Disk Defragmenter software Help. Using Disk Cleanup Use Disk Cleanup to search the hard drive for unnecessary files that you can safely delete to free up disk space and help the computer run more efficiently. To run Disk Cleanup:

Type disk in the taskbar search box, and then select Disk Cleanup. Follow the on-screen instructions. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 42 Chapter 8 Maintenance Using HP 3D DriveGuard (select products only) HP 3D DriveGuard protects a hard drive by parking the drive and halting data requests under either of the following conditions:

You drop the computer. You move the computer with the display closed while the computer is running on battery power. A short time after the end of one of these events, HP 3D DriveGuard returns the hard drive to normal operation. NOTE: Only internal hard drives are protected by HP 3D DriveGuard. A hard drive installed in an optional docking device or connected to a USB port is not protected by HP 3D DriveGuard. NOTE: Because solid-state drives (SSDs) lack moving parts, HP 3D DriveGuard is unnecessary for these drives. Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status The hard drive light on the computer changes color to show that the drive in a primary hard drive bay and/or the drive in a secondary hard drive bay (select products only) is parked. Updating programs and drivers HP recommends that you update your programs and drivers on a regular basis. Updates can resolve issues and bring new features and options to your computer. For example, older graphics components might not work well with the most recent gaming software. Without the latest driver, you would not be getting the most out of your equipment. Go to http://www.hp.com/support to download the latest versions of HP programs and drivers. In addition, register to receive automatic notifications when updates become available. If you would like to update your programs and drivers, follow these instructions:

1. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. Select My notebook, select the Updates tab, and then select Check for updates and messages. 2. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. Cleaning your computer Use the following products to safely clean your computer:

Alcohol-free glass-cleaning fluid Solution of water and mild soap Static-free cloth wipes Dry microfiber cleaning cloth or a chamois (static-free cloth without oil) Updating programs and drivers 43 CAUTION: Avoid strong cleaning solvents or germicidal wipes that can permanently damage your computer. If you are not sure that a cleaning product is safe for your computer, check the product contents to make sure that ingredients such as alcohol, acetone, ammonium chloride, methylene chloride, and hydrocarbons are not included in the product. Fibrous materials, such as paper towels, can scratch the computer. Over time, dirt particles and cleaning agents can get trapped in the scratches. Cleaning procedures Follow the procedures in this section to safely clean your computer. WARNING! To prevent electric shock or damage to components, do not attempt to clean your computer while it is on. Turn off the computer. Disconnect AC power. 1. 2. 3. Disconnect all powered external devices. CAUTION: To prevent damage to internal components, do not spray cleaning agents or liquids directly on any computer surface. Liquids dripped on the surface can permanently damage internal components. Cleaning the display Cleaning the sides or cover Gently wipe the display using a soft, lint-free cloth moistened with an alcohol-free glass cleaner. Be sure that a display is dry before you close the computer. To clean the sides or cover, use a soft microfiber cloth or chamois moistened with one of the cleaning solutions listed previously, or use an acceptable disposable wipe. NOTE: When cleaning the cover of the computer, use a circular motion to aid in removing dirt and debris. Cleaning the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse (select products only) WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. CAUTION: To prevent damage to internal components, do not allow liquids to drip between the keys. To clean the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse, use a soft microfiber cloth or a chamois moistened with one of the cleaning solutions listed previously. To prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles from the keyboard, use a can of compressed air with a straw extension. Traveling with or shipping your computer If you have to travel with or ship your computer, follow these tips to keep your equipment safe. Prepare the computer for traveling or shipping:

Back up your information to an external drive. Remove all discs and all external media cards, such as memory cards. 44 Chapter 8 Maintenance Turn off and then disconnect all external devices. Shut down the computer. Take along a backup of your information. Keep the backup separate from the computer. When traveling by air, carry the computer as hand luggage; do not check it in with the rest of your luggage. CAUTION: Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-through devices and security wands. Airport conveyer belts and similar security devices that check carry-on baggage use X-rays instead of magnetism and do not damage drives. If you plan to use the computer during a flight, listen for the in-flight announcement that tells you when you are allowed to use your computer. In-flight computer use is at the discretion of the airline. If you are shipping the computer or a drive, use suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. The use of wireless devices may be restricted in some environments. Such restrictions may apply aboard aircraft, in hospitals, near explosives, and in hazardous locations. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of a wireless device in your computer, ask for authorization to use your computer before you turn it on. If you are traveling internationally, follow these suggestions:

Check the computer-related customs regulations for each country or region on your itinerary. Check the power cord and adapter requirements for each location in which you plan to use the computer. Voltage, frequency, and plug configurations vary. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. Traveling with or shipping your computer 45 9 Backing up, restoring, and recovering 1. 2. This chapter provides information about the following processes, which are standard procedure for most products:

Backing up your personal informationYou can use Windows tools to back up your personal information (see Using Windows tools on page 46). Creating a restore pointYou can use Windows tools to create a restore point (see Using Windows tools on page 46). Creating recovery media (select products only)You can use HP Recovery Manager or HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool (select products only) to create recovery media (see Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 46). Restoring and recoveryWindows offers several options for restoring from backup, refreshing the computer, and resetting the computer to its original state (see Using Windows tools on page 46). Removing the Recovery PartitionTo remove the Recovery partition to reclaim hard drive space

(select products only), select the Remove Recovery Partition option of HP Recovery Manager. For more information, see Removing the HP Recovery partition (select products only) on page 50. Using Windows tools IMPORTANT: Windows is the only option that allows you to back up your personal information. Schedule regular backups to avoid information loss. You can use Windows tools to back up personal information and create system restore points and recovery media, allowing you to restore from backup, refresh the computer, and reset the computer to its original state. NOTE:

If computer storage is 32 GB or less, Microsoft System Restore is disabled by default. For more information and steps, see the Get Help app. Select the Start button, and then select the Get Help app. Enter the task you want to perform. NOTE: You must be connected to the Internet to access the Get Help app. Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) After you have successfully set up the computer, use HP Recovery Manager to create a backup of the HP Recovery partition on the computer. This backup is called HP Recovery media. In cases where the hard drive is corrupted or has been replaced, the HP Recovery media can be used to reinstall the original operating system. To check for the presence of the Recovery partition in addition to the Windows partition, right-click the Start button, select File Explorer, and then select This PC. If your computer does not list the Recovery partition in addition to the Windows partition, contact NOTE:

support to obtain recovery discs. Go to http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 46 Chapter 9 Backing up, restoring, and recovering On select products, you can use the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create HP Recovery media on a bootable USB flash drive. For more information, see Using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create recovery media on page 48. Using HP Recovery Manager to create recovery media If you cannot create recovery media yourself, contact support to obtain recovery discs. Go to NOTE:

http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Before you begin Before you begin, note the following:

Only one set of recovery media can be created. Handle these recovery tools carefully, and keep them in a safe place. HP Recovery Manager examines the computer and determines the required media storage capacity. To create recovery media, use one of the following options:

NOTE:

If the computer does not have a recovery partition, HP Recovery Manager displays the Windows Create a Recovery Drive feature. Follow the on-screen instructions to create a recovery image on a blank USB flash drive or hard drive. If your computer has an optical drive with DVD writer capability, be sure to use only high-quality blank DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-R DL, or DVD+R DL discs. Do not use rewritable discs such as CDRW, DVDRW, double-layer DVDRW, or BD-RE (rewritable Blu-ray) discs, which are not compatible with HP Recovery Manager software. If your computer does not include an integrated optical drive with DVD writer capability, you can use an external optical drive (purchased separately) to create recovery discs, as described above. If an external optical drive is used, you must connect it directly to a USB port on the computer. It cannot be connected to a USB port on an external device, such as a USB hub. To create a recovery USB flash drive, use a high-quality blank USB flash drive. Be sure that the computer is connected to AC power before you begin creating the recovery media. The creation process can take an hour or more. Do not interrupt this process. If necessary, you can exit the program before you have finished creating all of the recovery media. HP Recovery Manager will finish the current DVD or USB flash drive. The next time you start HP Recovery Manager, you will be prompted to continue. Creating the recovery media To create HP Recovery media using HP Recovery Manager:

IMPORTANT:

beginning these steps. For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the tablet to the keyboard base before Type recovery in the taskbar search box, and then select HP Recovery Manager. Select Create recovery media, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If you need to recover the system, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 48. 1. 2. Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) 47 1. 2. Using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create recovery media To create HP Recovery media using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool:

Go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Software and Drivers, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Restoring and recovery Restoring and recovery can be performed using one or more of the following options: Windows tools, HP Recovery Manager, or the HP Recovery partition. IMPORTANT: Not all methods are available on all products. Restoring, resetting, and refreshing using Windows tools Windows offers several options for restoring, resetting, and refreshing the computer. For details, see Using Windows tools on page 46. Restoring using HP Recovery Manager and the HP Recovery partition You can use HP Recovery Manager and the HP Recovery partition (select products only) to restore the computer to the original factory state:

Resolving problems with preinstalled applications or driversTo correct a problem with a preinstalled application or driver:

Type recovery in the taskbar search box, and then select HP Recovery Manager. Select Reinstall drivers and/or applications, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 1. 2. Using System RecoveryTo recover the Windows partition to original factory content, select the System Recovery option from the HP Recovery partition (select products only) or use the HP Recovery media. For more information, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 48. If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 46. Using Factory Reset (select products only)Restores the computer to its original factory state by deleting all information from the hard drive and recreating the partitions and then reinstalling the operating system and the software that was installed at the factory (select products only). To use the Factory Reset option, you must use HP Recovery media. If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 46. If you have replaced the hard drive in the computer, you can use the Factory Reset option to NOTE:

install the operating system and the software that was installed at the factory. Recovering using HP Recovery Manager You can use HP Recovery Manager software to recover the computer to its original factory state by using the HP Recovery media that you either created or that you obtained from HP, or by using the HP Recovery partition (select products only). If you have not already created HP Recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 46. IMPORTANT: HP Recovery Manager does not automatically provide backups of your personal data. Before beginning recovery, back up any personal data that you want to retain. See Using Windows tools on page 46. 48 Chapter 9 Backing up, restoring, and recovering IMPORTANT: Recovery through HP Recovery Manager should be used as a final attempt to correct computer issues. NOTE: When you start the recovery process, only the options available for your computer are displayed. Before you begin, note the following:

HP Recovery Manager recovers only software that was installed at the factory. For software not provided with this computer, you must either download the software from the manufacturer's website or reinstall the software from the media provided by the manufacturer. If the computer hard drive fails, HP Recovery media must be used. This media is created using HP Recovery Manager. See Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 46. If your computer does not allow the creation of HP Recovery media or if the HP Recovery media does not work, contact support to obtain recovery media. Go to http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Recovering using the HP Recovery partition (select products only) The HP Recovery partition allows you to perform a system recovery without recovery discs or a recovery USB flash drive. This type of recovery can be used only if the hard drive is still working. The HP Recovery partition (select products only) allows System Recovery only. To start HP Recovery Manager from the HP Recovery partition:

IMPORTANT:

beginning these steps (select products only). For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the tablet to the keyboard base before 1. Type recovery in the taskbar search box, select HP Recovery Manager, and then select Windows Recovery Environment. or For computers or tablets with keyboards attached:

Press f11 while the computer boots, or press and hold f11 as you press the power button. For tablets without keyboards:

Turn on or restart the tablet, quickly hold down the volume up button, and then select f11. Select Troubleshoot from the boot options menu. Select Recovery Manager, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If your computer does not automatically restart in HP Recovery Manager, change the computer NOTE:

boot order, and then follow the on-screen instructions. See Changing the computer boot order on page 50. 2. 3. Recovering using HP Recovery media If your computer does not have an HP Recovery partition or if the hard drive is not working properly, you can use HP Recovery media to recover the original operating system and software programs that were installed at the factory. Insert the HP Recovery media, and then restart the computer. Restoring and recovery 49 If your computer does not automatically restart in HP Recovery Manager, change the computer NOTE:

boot order, and then follow the on-screen instructions. See Changing the computer boot order on page 50. Changing the computer boot order If your computer does not restart in HP Recovery Manager, you can change the computer boot order. This is the order of devices listed in BIOS where the computer looks for startup information. You can change the selection to an optical drive or a USB flash drive, depending on the location of your HP Recovery media. For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the tablet to the keyboard base before To change the boot order:

IMPORTANT:

beginning these steps. 1. 2. Insert the HP Recovery media. Access the system Startup menu. For computers or tablets with keyboards attached:

Turn on or restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f9 for boot options. Turn on or restart the tablet, quickly hold down the volume up button, and then select f9. For tablets without keyboards:

or Turn on or restart the tablet, quickly hold down the volume down button, and then select f9. 3. Select the optical drive or USB flash drive from which you want to boot, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Removing the HP Recovery partition (select products only) HP Recovery Manager software allows you to remove the HP Recovery partition (select products only) to free up hard drive space. IMPORTANT: After you remove the HP Recovery partition, you will not be able to perform System Recovery or create HP Recovery media. Before removing the Recovery partition, create HP Recovery media. See Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 46. Follow these steps to remove the HP Recovery partition:

1. 2. Type recovery in the taskbar search box, and then select HP Recovery Manager. Select Remove Recovery Partition, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 50 Chapter 9 Backing up, restoring, and recovering 10 Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start Using Computer Setup Computer Setup, or Basic Input/Output System (BIOS), controls communication between all the input and output devices on the system (such as disk drives, display, keyboard, mouse, and printer). Computer Setup includes settings for the types of devices installed, the startup sequence of the computer, and the amount of system and extended memory. NOTE: Use extreme care when making changes in Computer Setup. Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. Starting Computer Setup Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Navigating and selecting in Computer Setup To select a menu or a menu item, use the tab key and the keyboard arrow keys and then press enter, or use a pointing device to select the item. To scroll up and down, select the up arrow or the down arrow in the upper-right corner of the screen, or use the up arrow key or the down arrow key on the keyboard. To close open dialog boxes and return to the main Computer Setup screen, press esc, and then follow the on-screen instructions. To exit Computer Setup, choose one of the following methods:

To exit Computer Setup menus without saving your changes, select Main, select Ignore Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup menus, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Restoring factory settings in Computer Setup NOTE: Restoring defaults will not change the hard drive mode. To return all settings in Computer Setup to the values that were set at the factory, follow these steps:

Start Computer Setup. See Starting Computer Setup on page 51. Select Main, select Apply Factory Defaults and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. 1. 2. Using Computer Setup 51 NOTE: On select products, the selections may display Restore Defaults instead of Apply Factory Defaults and Exit. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. NOTE: Your password settings and security settings are not changed when you restore the factory settings. Updating the BIOS Updated versions of the BIOS may be available on the HP website. Most BIOS updates on the HP website are packaged in compressed files called SoftPaqs. Some download packages contain a file named Readme.txt, which contains information regarding installing and troubleshooting the file. Determining the BIOS version To decide whether you need to update Computer Setup (BIOS), first determine the BIOS version on your computer. BIOS version information (also known as ROM date and System BIOS) can be accessed by pressing fn+esc (if you are already in Windows) or by using Computer Setup. Start Computer Setup. See Starting Computer Setup on page 51. Select Main, and then select System Information. To exit Computer Setup menus without saving your changes, select Main, select Ignore Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. To check for later BIOS versions, see Downloading a BIOS update on page 52. Downloading a BIOS update CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the computer or an unsuccessful installation, download and install a BIOS update only when the computer is connected to reliable external power using the AC adapter. Do not download or install a BIOS update while the computer is running on battery power, docked in an optional docking device, or connected to an optional power source. During the download and installation, follow these instructions:

Do not disconnect power on the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Sleep. Do not insert, remove, connect, or disconnect any device, cable, or cord. 1. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. Select Updates, and then select Check for updates and messages. Follow the on-screen instructions. At the download area, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. 2. 3. 4. 52 Chapter 10 Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start a. Identify the most recent BIOS update and compare it to the BIOS version currently installed on your computer. Make a note of the date, name, or other identifier. You may need this information to locate the update later, after it has been downloaded to your hard drive. b. Follow the on-screen instructions to download your selection to the hard drive. Make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the BIOS update is downloaded. You will need to access this path when you are ready to install the update. If you connect your computer to a network, consult the network administrator before installing NOTE:

any software updates, especially system BIOS updates. BIOS installation procedures vary. Follow any instructions that are displayed on the screen after the download is complete. If no instructions are displayed, follow these steps:

Type file in the taskbar search box, and then select File Explorer. Select your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:). Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder that contains the update. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe). The BIOS installation begins. 5. Complete the installation by following the on-screen instructions. NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from your hard drive. Changing the boot order using the f9 prompt To dynamically choose a boot device for the current startup sequence, follow these steps:

1. Access the Boot Device Options menu:

Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f9 to enter the Boot Device Options menu. 2. Select a boot device, press enter, and then follow the on-screen instructions. TPM BIOS settings (select products only) IMPORTANT: Before enabling Trusted Platform Module (TPM) functionality on this system, you must ensure that your intended use of TPM complies with relevant local laws, regulations and policies, and approvals or licenses must be obtained if applicable. For any compliance issues arising from your operation/usage of TPM which violates the above mentioned requirement, you shall bear all the liabilities wholly and solely. HP will not be responsible for any related liabilities. TPM provides additional security for your computer. You can modify the TPM settings in Computer Setup

(BIOS). NOTE:

If you change the TPM setting to Hidden, TPM is not visible in the operating system. To access TPM settings in Computer Setup:

Start Computer Setup. See Starting Computer Setup on page 51. Select Security, select TPM Embedded Security, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. TPM BIOS settings (select products only) 53 Using HP Sure Start (select products only) Select computer models are configured with HP Sure Start, a technology that monitors the computer's BIOS for attacks or corruption. If the BIOS becomes corrupted or is attacked, HP Sure Start automatically restores the BIOS to its previously safe state, without user intervention. HP Sure Start is configured and already enabled so that most users can use the HP Sure Start default configuration. The default configuration can be customized by advanced users. To access the latest documentation on HP Sure Start, go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Find your product, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 54 Chapter 10 Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start 11 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows (select products only) HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is a Windows-based utility that allows you to run diagnostic tests to determine whether the computer hardware is functioning properly. The tool runs within the Windows operating system in order to diagnose hardware failures. If HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is not installed on your computer, first you must download and install it. To download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows, see Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows on page 55. After HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is installed, follow these steps to access it from HP Help and Support or HP Support Assistant. 1. To access HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from HP Help and Support:

Select the Start button, and then select HP Help and Support. Right-click HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows, select More, and then select Run as administrator. To access HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from HP Support Assistant:

a. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. Select Troubleshooting and fixes. Select Diagnostics, and then select HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows. 2. When the tool opens, select the type of diagnostic test you want to run, and then follow the on-screen NOTE:

If you need to stop a diagnostic test at any time, select Cancel. 3. When HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows detects a failure that requires hardware replacement, a 24-

digit Failure ID code is generated. For assistance in correcting the problem, contact support, and then provide the Failure ID code. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows The HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows download instructions are provided in English only. You must use a Windows computer to download this tool because only .exe files are provided. a. b. or or b. c. instructions. Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows (select products only) 55 1. 2. 1. 2. 3. Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows version To download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows, follow these steps:

Go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags. The HP PC Diagnostics home page is displayed. In the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics section, select Download, and then select a location on your computer or a USB flash drive. The tool is downloaded to the selected location. Downloading HP Hardware Diagnostics Windows by product name or number (select products only) For some products, it may be necessary to download the software to a USB flash drive by using the NOTE:

product name or number. To download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows by product name or number, follow these steps:

Go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Get software and drivers, select your type of product, and then enter the product name or number in the search box that is displayed. In the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics section, select Download, and then select a location on your computer or a USB flash drive. The tool is downloaded to the selected location. Installing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows To install HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows, follow these steps:

Navigate to the folder on your computer or the USB flash drive where the .exe file was downloaded, double-click the .exe file, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI NOTE:

For Windows 10 S computers, you must use a Windows computer and a USB flash drive to download and create the HP UEFI support environment because only .exe files are provided. For more information, see Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive on page 57. HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface) allows you to run diagnostic tests to determine whether the computer hardware is functioning properly. The tool runs outside the operating system so that it can isolate hardware failures from issues that are caused by the operating system or other software components. If your PC will not boot into Windows, you can use HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to diagnose hardware issues. When HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI detects a failure that requires hardware replacement, a 24-digit Failure ID code is generated. For assistance in correcting the problem, contact support, and provide the Failure ID code. NOTE: To start diagnostics on a convertible computer, your computer must be in notebook mode, and you must use the attached keyboard. NOTE:

If you need to stop a diagnostic test, press esc. 56 Chapter 11 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Starting HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI To start HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI, follow these steps:

Turn on or restart the computer, and quickly press esc. 1. 2. Press f2. The BIOS searches three places for the diagnostic tools, in the following order:

a. Connected USB flash drive NOTE: To download the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI tool to a USB flash drive, see Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version on page 57. b. c. Hard drive BIOS 3. When the diagnostic tool opens, select a language, select the type of diagnostic test you want to run, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive can be useful in the following situations:

HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is not included in the preinstall image. HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is not included in the HP Tool partition. The hard drive is damaged. NOTE: The HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI download instructions are provided in English only, and you must use a Windows computer to download and create the HP UEFI support environment because only .exe files are provided. Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version To download the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version to a USB flash drive:

Go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags. The HP PC Diagnostics home page is displayed. In the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI section, select Download UEFI Diagnostics, and then select Run. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number (select products only) For some products, it may be necessary to download the software to a USB flash drive by using the NOTE:

product name or number. To download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number (select products only) to a USB flash drive:

Go to http://www.hp.com/support. Enter the product name or number, select your computer, and then select your operating system. In the Diagnostics section, follow the on-screen instructions to select and download the specific UEFI Diagnostics version for your computer. 1. 2. 1. 2. 3. Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI 57 Using Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings (select products only) Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is a firmware (BIOS) feature that downloads HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to your computer. It can then execute the diagnostics on your computer, and it may upload results to a preconfigured server. For more information on Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI, go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags, and then select Find out more. Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI NOTE: HP Remote PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is also available as a Softpaq that can be downloaded to a server. Downloading the latest Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version To download the latest Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version, follow these steps:

Go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags. The HP PC Diagnostics home page is displayed. In the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI section, select Download Remote Diagnostics, and then select Run. Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number For some products, it may be necessary to download the software by using the product name or NOTE:

number. To download HP Remote PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number, follow these steps:

Go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Get software and drivers, select your type of product, enter the product name or number in the search box that is displayed, select your computer, and then select your operating system. In the Diagnostics section, follow the on-screen instructions to select and download the Remote UEFI version for the product. Customizing Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings Using the Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics setting in Computer Setup (BIOS), you can perform the following customizations:

Set a schedule for running diagnostics unattended. You can also start diagnostics immediately in interactive mode by selecting Execute Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics. Set the location for downloading the diagnostic tools. This feature provides access to the tools from the HP website or from a server that has been preconfigured for use. Your computer does not require the traditional local storage (such as a disk drive or USB flash drive) to run remote diagnostics. Set a location for storing the test results. You can also set the user name and password settings used for uploads. Display status information about the diagnostics run previously. To customize Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings, follow these steps:

Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Select Advanced, and then select Settings. 1. 2. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 58 Chapter 11 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics 3. Make your customization selections. 4. Select Main, and then Save Changes and Exit to save your settings. Your changes take effect when the computer restarts. Using Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings (select products only) 59 12 Specifications Input power The power information in this section may be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. The AC power source must be rated at 100240 V, 5060 Hz. Although the computer can be powered from a standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source supplied and approved by HP for use with this computer. The computer can operate on DC power within the following specifications. The voltage and current for your computer is located on the regulatory label. Input Power Rating Operating voltage and current 5 V dc @ 2 A / 12 V dc @ 3 A /15 V dc @ 3 A 45 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 12 V dc @ 3.75 A /15 V dc @ 3 A 45 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 10 V dc @ 3.75 A / 12 V dc @ 3.75 A /

15 V dc @ 3 A / 20 V dc @ 2.25 A 45 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc @ 4.33 A / 20 V dc @ 3.25 A 65 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3A / 10 V dc @ 5 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc

@ 4.33 A / 20 V dc @ 3.25 A 65 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 10 V dc @ 5 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc

@ 5 A / 20 V dc @ 4.5 A 90 W USB-C 19.5 V dc @ 2.31 A 45 W 19.5 V dc @ 3.33 A 65 W 19.5 V dc @ 4.62 A 90 W 19.5 V dc @ 6.15 A 120 W 19.5 V dc @ 6.9 A 135 W 19.5 V dc @ 7.70 A 150 W 19.5 V dc @ 10.3 A 200 W 19.5 V dc @ 11.8 A 230 W 19.5 V dc @ 16.92 A 330 W NOTE: This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. 60 Chapter 12 Specifications Operating environment Metric U.S. Factor Temperature Operating Nonoperating Operating Nonoperating Operating (writing to optical disc) 5C to 35C Nonoperating

-20C to 60C Relative humidity (noncondensing) 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

Maximum altitude (unpressurized) 41F to 95F

-4F to 140F 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

-15 m to 3,048 m

-15 m to 12,192 m

-50 ft to 10,000 ft

-50 ft to 40,000 ft Operating environment 61 13 Electrostatic Discharge Electrostatic discharge is the release of static electricity when two objects come into contactfor example, the shock you receive when you walk across the carpet and touch a metal door knob. A discharge of static electricity from fingers or other electrostatic conductors may damage electronic components. To prevent damage to the computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information, observe these precautions:

If removal or installation instructions direct you to unplug the computer, first be sure that it is properly grounded. Keep components in their electrostatic-safe containers until you are ready to install them. Avoid touching pins, leads, and circuitry. Handle electronic components as little as possible. Use nonmagnetic tools. Before handling components, discharge static electricity by touching an unpainted metal surface. If you remove a component, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. 62 Chapter 13 Electrostatic Discharge 14 Accessibility Accessibility HP is working to weave diversity, inclusion and work/life into the fabric of our company, so it is reflected in everything we do. Here are some examples of how we are putting differences to work to create an inclusive environment focused on connecting people to the power of technology throughout the world. Finding the technology tools you need Technology can unleash your human potential. Assistive technology removes barriers and helps you create independence at home, at work, and in the community. Assistive technology helps increase, maintain, and improve the functional capabilities of electronic and information technology. For more information, see Finding the best assistive technology on page 64. Our commitment HP is committed to providing products and services that are accessible for people with disabilities. This commitment supports our company's diversity objectives and helps us ensure that the benefits of technology are available to all. Our accessibility goal is to design, produce, and market products and services that can be effectively used by everyone, including people with disabilities, either on a stand-alone basis or with appropriate assistive devices. To achieve our goal, this Accessibility Policy establishes seven key objectives to guide our actions as a company. All HP managers and employees are expected to support these objectives and their implementation in accordance with their roles and responsibilities:

Raise the level of awareness of accessibility issues within our company, and provide our employees with the training they need to design, produce, market, and deliver accessible products and services. Develop accessibility guidelines for products and services, and hold product development groups accountable for implementing these guidelines where competitively, technically, and economically feasible. Involve people with disabilities in the development of accessibility guidelines, and in the design and testing of products and services. Document accessibility features and make information about our products and services publicly available in an accessible form. Establish relationships with leading assistive technology and solution providers. Support internal and external research and development that will improve assistive technology relevant to our products and services. Support and contribute to industry standards and guidelines for accessibility. International Association of Accessibility Professionals (IAAP) IAAP is a not-for-profit association focused on advancing the accessibility profession through networking, education, and certification. The objective is to help accessibility professionals develop and advance their careers and to better enable organizations to integrate accessibility into their products and infrastructure. Accessibility 63 HP is a founding member, and we joined to participate with other organizations to advance the field of accessibility. This commitment supports our companys accessibility goal of designing, producing, and marketing products and services that can be effectively used by people with disabilities. IAAP will make our profession strong by globally connecting individuals, students, and organizations to learn from one another. If you are interested in learning more, go to http://www.accessibilityassociation.org to join the online community, sign up for newsletters, and learn about membership options. Finding the best assistive technology Everyone, including people with disabilities or age-related limitations, should be able to communicate, express themselves, and connect with the world using technology. HP is committed to increasing accessibility awareness within HP and with our customers and partners. Whether its large fonts that are easy on the eyes, voice recognition that lets you give your hands a rest, or any other assistive technology to help with your specific situationa variety of assistive technologies make HP products easier to use. How do you choose?

Assessing your needs Technology can unleash your potential. Assistive technology removes barriers and helps you create independence at home, at work, and in the community. Assistive technology (AT) helps increase, maintain, and improve the functional capabilities of electronic and information technology. You may choose from many AT products. Your AT assessment should allow you to evaluate several products, answer your questions, and facilitate your selection of the best solution for your situation. You will find that professionals qualified to do AT assessments come from many fields, including those licensed or certified in physical therapy, occupational therapy, speech/language pathology, and other areas of expertise. Others, while not certified or licensed, may also provide evaluation information. You will want to ask about the individual's experience, expertise, and fees to determine if they are appropriate for your needs. Accessibility for HP products The following links provide information on accessibility features and assistive technology, if applicable, included in various HP products. These resources will help you select the specific assistive technology features and product(s) most appropriate for your situation. HP Elite x3Accessibility Options (Windows 10 Mobile) HP PCsWindows 7 Accessibility Options HP PCsWindows 8 Accessibility Options HP PCsWindows 10 Accessibility Options HP Slate 7 TabletsEnabling Accessibility Features on Your HP Tablet (Android 4.1/Jelly Bean) HP SlateBook PCsEnabling Accessibility Features (Android 4.3,4.2/Jelly Bean) HP Chromebook PCsEnabling Accessibility Features on Your HP Chromebook or Chromebox (Chrome OS) HP Shoppingperipherals for HP products If you need additional support with the accessibility features on your HP product, see Contacting support on page 69. Additional links to external partners and suppliers that may provide additional assistance:

Microsoft Accessibility information (Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10, Microsoft Office) Google Products accessibility information (Android, Chrome, Google Apps) 64 Chapter 14 Accessibility Assistive Technologies sorted by impairment type Assistive Technologies sorted by product type Assistive Technology vendors with product descriptions Assistive Technology Industry Association (ATIA) Standards and legislation Standards Section 508 of the Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR) standards was created by the US Access Board to address access to information and communication technology (ICT) for people with physical, sensory, or cognitive disabilities. The standards contain technical criteria specific to various types of technologies, as well as performance-based requirements which focus on functional capabilities of covered products. Specific criteria cover software applications and operating systems, web-based information and applications, computers, telecommunications products, video and multi-media, and self-contained closed products. Mandate 376 EN 301 549 The EN 301 549 standard was created by the European Union within Mandate 376 as the basis for an online toolkit for public procurement of ICT products. The standard specifies the functional accessibility requirements applicable to ICT products and services, together with a description of the test procedures and evaluation methodology for each accessibility requirement. Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) from the W3C's Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI) helps web designers and developers create sites that better meet the needs of people with disabilities or age-related limitations. WCAG advances accessibility across the full range of web content (text, images, audio, and video) and web applications. WCAG can be precisely tested, is easy to understand and use, and allows web developers flexibility for innovation. WCAG 2.0 has also been approved as ISO/IEC 40500:2012. WCAG specifically addresses barriers to accessing the web experienced by people with visual, auditory, physical, cognitive, and neurological disabilities, and by older web users with accessibility needs. WCAG 2.0 provides characteristics of accessible content:

Perceivable (for instance, by addressing text alternatives for images, captions for audio, adaptability of presentation, and color contrast) Operable (by addressing keyboard access, color contrast, timing of input, seizure avoidance, and navigability) Understandable (by addressing readability, predictability, and input assistance) Robust (for instance, by addressing compatibility with assistive technologies) Legislation and regulations Accessibility of IT and information has become an area of increasing legislative importance. This section provides links to information on key legislation, regulations, and standards. United States Canada Europe Standards and legislation 65 United Kingdom Australia Worldwide United States www.section508.gov Buy Accessible Section 508 of the Rehabilitation Act specifies that agencies must identify which standards apply to the procurement of ICT, perform market research to determine the availability of accessible products and services, and document the results of their market research. The following resources provide assistance in meeting Section 508 requirements:

The U.S. Access Board is currently updating the Section 508 standards. This effort will address new technologies and other areas where the standards need to be modified. For more information, go to Section 508 Refresh. Section 255 of the Telecommunications Act requires telecommunications products and services to be accessible to people with disabilities. FCC rules cover all hardware and software telephone network equipment and telecommunications equipment used in the home or office. Such equipment includes telephones, wireless handsets, fax machines, answering machines, and pagers. FCC rules also cover basic and special telecommunications services, including regular telephone calls, call waiting, speed dialing, call forwarding, computer-provided directory assistance, call monitoring, caller identification, call tracing, and repeat dialing, as well as voice mail and interactive voice response systems that provide callers with menus of choices. For more information, go to Federal Communication Commission Section 255 information. 21st Century Communications and Video Accessibility Act (CVAA) The CVAA updates federal communications law to increase the access of persons with disabilities to modern communications, updating accessibility laws enacted in the 1980s and 1990s to include new digital, broadband, and mobile innovations. Regulations are enforced by the FCC and documented as 47 CFR Part 14 and Part 79. FCC Guide on the CVAA Other U.S. legislation and initiatives Canada Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Telecommunications Act, the Rehabilitation Act and others The Accessibility for Ontarians with Disabilities Act was established to develop and implement accessibility standards to make goods, services, and facilities accessible to Ontarians with disabilities and to provide for the involvement of persons with disabilities in the development of the accessibility standards. The first standard of the AODA is the customer service standard; however, standards for transportation, employment, and information and communication are also being developed. The AODA applies to the Government of Ontario, the Legislative Assembly, every designated public sector organization, and to every other person or organization that provides goods, services, or facilities to the public or other third parties and that has at least one employee in Ontario; and accessibility measures must be implemented on or before January 1, 2025. For more information, go to Accessibility for Ontarians with Disability Act (AODA) . 66 Chapter 14 Accessibility Europe EU Mandate 376 ETSI Technical Report ETSI DTR 102 612: "Human Factors (HF); European accessibility requirements for public procurement of products and services in the ICT domain (European Commission Mandate M 376, Phase 1)" has been released. Background: The three European Standardization Organizations have set up two parallel project teams to carry out the work specified in the European Commission "Mandate 376 to CEN, CENELEC and ETSI, in Support of Accessibility Requirements for Public Procurement of Products and Services in the ICT Domain."

ETSI TC Human Factors Specialist Task Force 333 has developed ETSI DTR 102 612. Further details about the work performed by STF333 (e.g., Terms of Reference, specification of the detailed work tasks, time plan for the work, previous drafts, listing of comments received and means to contact the task force) can be found at the Special Task Force 333. The parts relating to the assessment of suitable testing and conformity schemes were carried out by a parallel project, detailed in CEN BT/WG185/PT. For further information, go to the CEN project team website. The two projects are closely coordinated. CEN project team European Commission mandate for e-accessibility (PDF 46KB) Commission takes low profile on e-accessibility The Disability Discrimination Act of 1995 (DDA) was enacted to ensure that websites are accessible to blind and disabled users in the United Kingdom. The Australian government has announced their plan to implement Web Content Accessibility Guidelines 2.0. All Australian government websites will require Level A compliance by 2012, and Double A by 2015. The new standard replaces WCAG 1.0, which was introduced as a mandated requirement for agencies in 2000. United Kingdom W3C UK Policies Australia Worldwide JTC1 Special Working Group on Accessibility (SWG-A) G3ict: The Global Initiative for Inclusive ICT Italian accessibility legislation W3C Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI) Standards and legislation 67 Useful accessibility resources and links The following organizations may be good resources for information about disabilities and age-related limitations. NOTE: This is not an exhaustive list. These organizations are provided for informational purposes only. HP assumes no responsibility for information or contacts you may encounter on the Internet. Listing on this page does not imply endorsement by HP. Organizations American Association of People with Disabilities (AAPD) The Association of Assistive Technology Act Programs (ATAP) Hearing Loss Association of America (HLAA) Information Technology Technical Assistance and Training Center (ITTATC) Lighthouse International National Association of the Deaf National Federation of the Blind Rehabilitation Engineering & Assistive Technology Society of North America (RESNA) Telecommunications for the Deaf and Hard of Hearing, Inc. (TDI) W3C Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI) Educational institutions California State University, Northridge, Center on Disabilities (CSUN) University of Wisconsin - Madison, Trace Center University of Minnesota computer accommodations program Other disability resources ADA (Americans with Disabilities Act) Technical Assistance Program Business & Disability network EnableMart European Disability Forum Job Accommodation Network Microsoft Enable U.S. Department of Justice - A Guide to disability rights Laws HP links Our contact webform HP comfort and safety guide HP public sector sales 68 Chapter 14 Accessibility Contacting support NOTE: Support is in English only. Customers who are deaf or hard of hearing that have questions about technical support or accessibility of HP products:

Use TRS/VRS/WebCapTel to call (877) 656-7058 Monday through Friday, 6 a.m. to 9 p.m. Mountain Time. Customers with other disabilities or age-related limitations who have questions about technical support or accessibility of HP products, choose one of the following options:

Call (888) 259-5707 Monday through Friday, 6 a.m. to 9 p.m. Mountain Time. Complete the Contact form for people with disabilities or age-related limitations. Contacting support 69

Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices User Guide Copyright 2018 HP Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by HP Inc. under license. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks. Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: March 2018 Document Part Number: L25269-001 About This Guide This guide provides regulatory, safety and environmental information that is compliant with U.S., Canadian, and international regulations for notebook computers, desktops, thin clients, and personal workstations. To access the latest user guides or manuals for your product, go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Find your product, and then follow the on-screen instructions. WARNING! Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions could result in bodily harm or loss of life. CAUTION: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions could result in damage to equipment or loss of information. NOTE: Text set off in this manner provides important supplemental information. iii iv About This Guide Table of contents 1 Regulatory notices for notebook and tablet computers .................................................................................... 1 Accessing regulatory labels ................................................................................................................................... 1 Federal Communications Commission notice ....................................................................................................... 1 Modifications ....................................................................................................................................... 2 Cables .................................................................................................................................................. 2 Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules ............................................. 2 Brazil notice ........................................................................................................................................................... 3 Canada notices ....................................................................................................................................................... 3 European Union regulatory notices ....................................................................................................................... 4 Declaration of Conformity ................................................................................................................... 4 Products with radio functionality (EMF) ........................................................................... 4 Restrictions for products with radio functionality (select products only) ....................... 4 Radio frequency bands and maximum power levels (select products only) ................... 4 European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) ................................................. 5 Ergonomics notice ............................................................................................................. 5 Germany .......................................................................................................... 5 Germany (Deutscher text) .............................................................................. 5 Australia and New Zealand notice ......................................................................................................................... 5 China WWAN notice ................................................................................................................................................ 6 Japan notice ........................................................................................................................................................... 6 Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings ................................................ 6 Mexico notice ......................................................................................................................................................... 6 Singapore wireless notice ...................................................................................................................................... 7 South Korea notices ............................................................................................................................................... 7 Thailand WWAN wireless notice ............................................................................................................................ 7 Taiwan NCC notices ................................................................................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN 802.11a devices ............................................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN 802.11 devices/Bluetooth devices/Short range devices .............................................. 8 Airline travel notice ................................................................................................................................................ 8 User-replaceable battery notices .......................................................................................................................... 8 Factory-sealed battery notices ............................................................................................................................. 8 Laser compliance ................................................................................................................................................... 8 Modem notices ....................................................................................................................................................... 9 Telecommunications device approvals ............................................................................................... 9 U.S. modem statements ...................................................................................................................... 9 U.S. modem declarations .................................................................................................................. 10 v Canada modem statements .............................................................................................................. 12 Japan modem statements ................................................................................................................ 12 New Zealand modem statements ..................................................................................................... 12 Voice support .................................................................................................................. 13 Power cord notice ................................................................................................................................................ 13 Japan power cord notice ................................................................................................................... 13 DC plug of external HP power supply ................................................................................................ 13 Macrovision Corporation notice ........................................................................................................................... 13 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals ....................................................................................................................................................... 14 Accessing regulatory labels ................................................................................................................................. 14 Modem notices ..................................................................................................................................................... 15 Telecommunications device approvals ............................................................................................. 15 U.S. modem statements .................................................................................................................... 15 Canadian modem statements ........................................................................................................... 16 Japanese modem statements ........................................................................................................... 16 New Zealand modem statements ..................................................................................................... 16 Voice support .................................................................................................................. 17 Electromagnetic compatibility notices ................................................................................................................ 17 Federal Communications Commission notice ................................................................................... 17 Modifications ................................................................................................................... 18 Cables .............................................................................................................................. 18 Products with wireless LAN devices ............................................................................... 18 Australia telecom statement ............................................................................................................ 19 Brazil notice ....................................................................................................................................... 19 Canadian notice ................................................................................................................................. 19 European Union regulatory notices .................................................................................................. 19 Declaration of Conformity .............................................................................................. 19 Products with radio functionality (EMF) ...................................................... 20 Restrictions for products with radio functionality (select products only) .............................................................................................................. 20 Radio frequency bands and maximum power levels (select products only) .............................................................................................................. 20 European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) ............................................... 21 Ergonomics notice .......................................................................................................... 21 Germany ....................................................................................................... 21 Germany (Deutscher text) ............................................................................ 21 Japan notice ....................................................................................................................................... 21 Japan power cord notice ................................................................................................. 21 Wireless LAN and Bluetooth certification markings ....................................................... 22 vi Mexico notice ..................................................................................................................................... 22 South Korea notices .......................................................................................................................... 22 Thailand WWAN wireless notice ........................................................................................................ 22 Taiwan NCC notices ............................................................................................................................ 23 Wireless LAN 802.11a devices ........................................................................................ 23 Wireless LAN 802.11 devices/Bluetooth devices/Short range devices ......................... 23 Airline travel notice .............................................................................................................................................. 23 User-replaceable battery notices ........................................................................................................................ 23 Factory-sealed battery notices ........................................................................................................................... 23 Laser compliance ................................................................................................................................................. 24 3 Safety notices for notebook and tablet computers ......................................................................................... 25 Heat-related safety warning notice .................................................................................................................... 25 Potential safety conditions notice ....................................................................................................................... 25 Battery notices ..................................................................................................................................................... 25 Headset and earphone volume level notice ........................................................................................................ 26 Power cord notices .............................................................................................................................................. 26 Brazil notice ....................................................................................................................................... 26 Cleaning the keyboard ......................................................................................................................................... 26 Travel notice ........................................................................................................................................................ 26 China safety notices ............................................................................................................................................. 27 China: Altitude notice ........................................................................................................................ 27 China: Tropical warning notice .......................................................................................................... 27 Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner ...................................................... 27

......................................................................................................................................... 27 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals ........ 28 Important safety information ............................................................................................................................. 28 Installation conditions ......................................................................................................................................... 29 Battery notices ..................................................................................................................................................... 29 Fan notices ........................................................................................................................................................... 30 Headset and earphone volume level notice ........................................................................................................ 30 Laser safety ......................................................................................................................................................... 30 Power supply and power cord set requirements ................................................................................................ 30 Power supply class I grounding requirements .................................................................................. 30 Brazil notice .................................................................................................................... 31 Denmark .......................................................................................................................... 31 Finland ............................................................................................................................. 31 Norway ............................................................................................................................ 31 Sweden ............................................................................................................................ 31 Power supply requirements .............................................................................................................. 31 vii 5 Environmental notices for notebook and tablet computers ............................................................................. 36 For use in Norway ........................................................................................................... 31 Power cord set requirements ............................................................................................................ 31 Japan power cord requirements ....................................................................................................... 32 Pinch hazard ........................................................................................................................................................ 32 TV antenna connectors protection ...................................................................................................................... 32 External television antenna grounding ............................................................................................ 32 Lightning protection .......................................................................................................................... 32 Note to CATV system installer ........................................................................................................... 33 China safety notices ............................................................................................................................................. 34 China: Altitude notice ........................................................................................................................ 34 China: Tropical warning notice .......................................................................................................... 34 Germany acoustics notice .................................................................................................................................... 35 Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner ...................................................... 35

......................................................................................................................................... 35 Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling ....................................................................................... 36 Disposal of waste equipment by users ............................................................................................................... 36 Brazil alkaline battery disposal ........................................................................................................................... 36 Brazil hardware recycling information ................................................................................................................ 36 ENERGY STAR Certification (select models only) ............................................................................................... 37 Chemical substances ........................................................................................................................................... 38 China environmental notices ............................................................................................................................... 38 China PC energy label .......................................................................................................................................... 38 China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ............................................................................................. 41 The Table of Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content ................................................... 41

........................................................................................... 42

(RoHS) ......................................................................................................... 43

....................................................................................................... 43 India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) .............................................................................................. 44 Information for European Union Commission Regulation 1275/2008 .............................................................. 45 IT ECO declarations .............................................................................................................................................. 45 Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ............................................................................................ 45 Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law ................................................................................................................... 45 Turkey EEE regulation .......................................................................................................................................... 45 Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply ........................................................................................... 45 TCO Certified ........................................................................................................................................................ 46 TCO Certified Edge ................................................................................................................................................ 47 viii 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals ....................................................................................................................................................... 48 Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling ....................................................................................... 48 Disposal of waste equipment by users ............................................................................................................... 48 Brazil alkaline battery disposal ........................................................................................................................... 48 Brazil hardware recycling information ................................................................................................................ 48 ENERGY STAR Certification (select models only) ............................................................................................... 49 Chemical substances ........................................................................................................................................... 50 Mercury statement .............................................................................................................................................. 50 Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply ............................................................................................. 50 China environmental notices ............................................................................................................................... 50 China PC energy label .......................................................................................................................................... 51 China restriction of hazard substances (ROHS) ................................................................................................... 54 The Table of Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content ................................................... 54

........................................................................................... 55

(RoHS) ......................................................................................................... 57

....................................................................................................... 57 India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) .............................................................................................. 58 Information for European Union Commission Regulation 1275/2008 .............................................................. 58 IT ECO declarations .............................................................................................................................................. 58 Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ............................................................................................ 58 Mehiki zakon o uporabi trajnostne energije ...................................................................................................... 58 Turkey EEE regulation .......................................................................................................................................... 59 TCO Certified ........................................................................................................................................................ 59 TCO Certified Edge ................................................................................................................................................ 60 Index ............................................................................................................................................................. 62 ix x 1 Regulatory notices for notebook and tablet computers This chapter provides country- and region-specific non-wireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply aboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. Accessing regulatory labels Regulatory labels, which provide country or regional regulatory information (for example, FCC ID), may be physically located on the bottom of the computer, inside the battery bay (select models only), under the removable service door (select models only), on the back of the display, or on the wireless or modem module. Some products may also provide electronic regulatory labels (e-labels) that can be accessed through the system BIOS. NOTE: Electronic labels are not available on all products. NOTE: Devices not for sale or use in the United States may not contain a FCC ID. To view electronic regulatory labels:

Turn on or restart the computer. Press esc or f10 to enter Computer Setup. 1. 2. 3. 4. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Advanced, select Electronic Labels, and then press enter. To view an electronic label, use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select one of the listed items, and then press OK. NOTE: The list of available electronic label items varies depending on the computer model and installed devices. 5. To exit Computer Setup menus without making any changes:

Select the Exit icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select Main, select Ignore Changes and Exit, and then press enter. Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to Accessing regulatory labels 1 radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference, and This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 1. 2. For questions regarding this product:

Write to:

HP Inc. 1501 Page Mill Road Palo Alto, CA 94304 Call HP at 650-857-1501 or Email techregshelp@hp.com To identify this product, refer to the part, series, or model number found on the product. The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Modifications Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. 2 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook and tablet computers WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers. During normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers with displays equal to or less than 30.5 cm

(12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. During normal operation of notebook computers with displays greater than 30.5 cm (12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. Brazil notice Canada notices Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Este equipamento atende aos limites de Taxa de Absoro Especfica referente exposio a campos eltricos, magnticos e eletromagnticos de radiofreqncias adotados pela ANATEL. Ao operar o dispositivo a uma distncia muito prxima do seu corpo, utilize um acessrio de armazenamento no metlico para posicionar o dispositivo a uma distncia mnima de 1,5 cm do corpo. This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations, CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B). If this device has WLAN or Bluetooth capability, the device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation: The radiated output power of this device is below the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation. During normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers with displays equal to or less than 30.5 cm

(12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. During normal operation of notebook computers with displays greater than 30.5 cm (12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a, n, or ac wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-

channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antennas for this device are not replaceable. Any attempt at user access will damage your computer. Brazil notice 3 European Union regulatory notices Declaration of Conformity Products bearing the CE marking have been constructed so that they can operate in at least one EU Member State and comply with one or more of the following EU Directives as may be applicable:

RED 2014/53/EU; Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU; EMC Directive 2014/30/EU; Ecodesign Directive 2009/125/EC; RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU. Compliance with these directives is assessed using applicable European Harmonised Standards. The full Declaration of Conformity can be found at the following website: http://www.hp.eu/certificates

(Search with the product model name or its Regulatory Model Number (RMN), which may be found on the regulatory label.) The point of contact for regulatory matters is HP Deutschland GmbH, HQ-TRE, 71025, Boeblingen, Germany. Email techregshelp@hp.com Products with radio functionality (EMF) This product incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. For notebook computers in normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with EU requirements. Products designed to be operated at closer proximities, such as tablet computers, comply with applicable EU requirements in typical operating positions. Products can be operated without maintaining a separation distance unless otherwise indicated in instructions specific to the product. Restrictions for products with radio functionality (select products only) CAUTION: IEEE 802.11x wireless LAN with 5.155.35 GHz frequency band is restricted for indoor use only for all countries reflected in the matrix. Using this WLAN application outdoors might lead to interference issues with existing radio services. CAUTION: Fixed outdoor installations for WiGig application (5766 GHz frequency band) are excluded for all countries reflected in the matrix. Radio frequency bands and maximum power levels (select products only) Maximum Transmit Power EIRP (mW) Radio Technology Bluetooth; 2,4 GHz NFC; 13,56 MHz RFID; 125 kHz/13,56 MHz WLAN Wi-Fi 802.11x; 2,4 GHz WLAN Wi-Fi 802.11x; 5 GHz WWAN 4G LTE; 700/800/900/1800/2100/2600 MHz WWAN 3G UTMS; 900/2100 MHz Less than 1 100 10 100 200 200 250 4 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook and tablet computers Radio Technology Maximum Transmit Power EIRP (mW) WWAN 2G GSM GPRS EDGE; 900 MHz WWAN 2G GSM GPRS EDGE; 1800 MHz WiGig 802.11ad; 60 GHz 2000 1000 316 Wireless Charging Qi; 110 kHz - 205 kHz Less than 1 NOTE: Use only HP-supported software drivers and correct country settings to ensure compliance. European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) The product herewith complies with the requirements of the applicable Directive and carries the CE marking accordingly. However, due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in different countries/

regions, the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network termination point. In the event of problems, you should contact your equipment supplier in the first instance. Ergonomics notice Germany When a mobile computer is used at the office workstation for display work tasks where the Visual Display Unit

(VDU) Directive 90/270/EEC is applicable, an adequate external keyboard is required. Depending on the application and task, an adequate external monitor may also be necessary to attain working conditions comparable to a workstation setup. Ref: EK1-ITB 2000 (voluntary GS certification) Mobile computers bearing the "GS" approval mark meet the applicable ergonomic requirements. Without external keyboards, they are suitable only for short-time use of VDU tasks. During mobile use with disadvantageous illumination conditions (e.g. direct sun light) reflections may occur, which result in reduced readability. Germany (Deutscher text) Wird ein mobiler Computer fr Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben verwendet, wo die Richtlinie 90/270/EEG

(Bildschirmarbeitsrichtlinie) anzuwenden ist, wird eine geeignete externe Tastatur notwendig. Abhngig von der Anwendung und der Aufgabe kann ein geeigneter externer Monitor erforderlich sein, um vergleichbare Arbeitsbedingungen zu einem stationren Arbeitsplatz zu erreichen. Ref: EK1-ITB 2000 (freiwillige GS Zertifizierung) Mobile Computer, welche das "GS" Zeichen tragen, entsprechen den ergonomischen Anforderungen und sind nur fr kurzzeitige Benutzung von Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben geeignet. Bei mobiler Nutzung mit ungnstigen Lichtverhltnissen (z.B. direkte Sonneneinstrahlung) kann es zu Reflexionen und damit zu Einschrnkungen der Lesbarkeit der dargestellten Zeichen kommen. Australia and New Zealand notice This equipment incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. In normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with the Australian and New Zealand Standards. Australia and New Zealand notice 5 China WWAN notice Japan notice V-2 VCCI32-1 5GHz Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings This product contains certified radio equipment. Some products may use electronic regulatory labels (e-labels). To view the certification mark and numbers on an e-label, please refer to the previous Accessing regulatory labels section. e e Mexico notice Declaracin para Mxico La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. The regulatory model number for this product is on the regulatory label. 6 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook and tablet computers If your product is provided with wireless accessories such as a keyboard or mouse and you need to identify the model of the accessory, refer to the label included on that accessory. The regulatory model number for this product is on the regulatory label. Singapore wireless notice Turn off any WWAN devices while you are aboard aircraft. The use of these devices aboard aircraft is illegal, may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, and may disrupt the cellular network. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular services to the offender, or legal action, or both. Users are reminded to restrict the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants, and where blasting operations are in progress. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, no part of the human body should be allowed to come too close to the antennas during operation of the equipment. This device has been designed to comply with applicable requirements for exposure to radio waves, based on scientific guidelines that include margins intended to assure the safety of all people, regardless of health and age. These radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the specific absorption rate (SAR). Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods, with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands. The SAR data information is based on CENELEC's standards EN50360 and EN50361, which use the limit of 2 watts per kilogram, averaged over 10 grams of tissue. South Korea notices Thailand WWAN wireless notice

(This telecommunication equipment conforms to the requirements of NBTC.) Taiwan NCC notices Wireless LAN 802.11a devices Singapore wireless notice 7 Wireless LAN 802.11 devices/Bluetooth devices/Short range devices Airline travel notice Use of electronic equipment aboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. User-replaceable battery notices When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery disposal. HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, refer to the HP website at http://www.hp.com/

recycle. For information about removing a user-replaceable battery, refer to the user guide included with the product. Factory-sealed battery notices The battery[ies] in this product cannot be easily replaced by users themselves. Removing or replacing the battery could affect your warranty coverage. If a battery is no longer holding a charge, contact support. When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for battery disposal. Laser compliance WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in the laser product installation guide, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified in the laser product installation guide. Allow only authorized service providers to repair the unit. 8 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook and tablet computers This product may be provided with an optical storage device (for example, a CD or DVD drive) and/or a fiber optic transceiver. Each of these devices that contain a laser is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product in accordance with IEC/EN 60825-1 and meets the requirements for safety of that standard. Each laser product complies with US FDA regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50 dated June 24, 2007. Modem notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries and regions whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country or region in which the product is located. Selecting a country or region other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country or region. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country or region selection is not made. If, when you select a country or region, a message appears that states that the country or region is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country or region and thus should not be used. U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Modem notices 9 Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-

distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. U.S. modem declarations Refer to the following modem vendor declarations for the modem device installed in your computer:

10 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook and tablet computers Modem notices 11 Canada modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japan modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the V.92 56K Data/Fax Modem is below:

New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:

a. b. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. d. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). 12 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook and tablet computers Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. Power cord notice If you were not provided with a power cord for the computer or for an external power accessory intended for use with the computer, you should purchase a power cord that is approved for use in your country or region. The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the product's electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage and current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm/

18AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 1.0 m (3.2 ft) and 2 m (6.56 ft). If you have questions about the type of power cord to use, contact your authorized service provider. A power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. Japan power cord notice DC plug of external HP power supply Macrovision Corporation notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Power cord notice 13 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals Accessing regulatory labels Regulatory labels, which provide country or regional regulatory information (for example, FCC ID), may be physically located on the bottom of the computer, inside the battery bay, under the removable service door, on the back of the display, or on the wireless or modem module. Some products may also provide electronic regulatory labels (e-labels) that can be accessed through the system BIOS. NOTE: Electronic labels are not available on all products. NOTE: Devices not for sale or use in the United States may not contain a FCC ID. To view electronic regulatory labels:

Turn on or restart the computer. Press esc or f10 to enter Computer Setup. 1. 2. 3. 4. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Advanced, select Electronic Labels, and then press enter. To view an electronic label, use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select one of the listed items, and then press OK. NOTE: The list of available electronic label items varies depending on the computer model and installed devices. 5. To exit Computer Setup menus without making any changes:

Select the Exit icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select Main, select Ignore Changes and Exit, and then press enter. 14 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-

sale terminals Modem notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (Ethernet network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Telecommunications device approvals U.S. modem statements The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries and regions whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country or region in which the product is located. Selecting a country or region other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country or region. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country or region selection is not made. If, when you select a country or region, a message appears that states that the country or region is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country or region and thus should not be used. This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the Modem notices 15 telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-

distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. Canadian modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japanese modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the LSI Corporation PCI-SV92EX Soft modem is below:

New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any 16 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-

sale terminals item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:

a. b. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. d. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. Electromagnetic compatibility notices This guide provides country- and region-specific nonwireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply aboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be Electromagnetic compatibility notices 17 determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference, and This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 1. 2. For questions regarding this product:

Write to:

HP Inc. 1501 Page Mill Road Palo Alto, CA 94304 Call HP at 650-857-1501 or Email techregshelp@hp.com To identify this product, refer to the part, series, or model number found on the product. The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP Inc. may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Modifications Cables Connections to this device must be made with shielded cables with metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods in order to maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations. Products with wireless LAN devices This product may be equipped with a wireless LAN device. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation. During normal operation: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches). To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the documentation included with the computer. 18 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-

sale terminals Australia telecom statement The computer must be connected to the Telecommunication Network through a line cord that meets the requirements of AS/CA S008. WARNING! Modems without integral RJ11 connector that are shipped with this computer should not be installed in any other device. This equipment incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. In normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with the Australian and New Zealand Standards. Brazil notice Canadian notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. CAUTION: A alimentao de energia predefinida para 220/230Vv. Se voc possuir tomada eltrica de 110/115Vv, por favor, altere a chave na parte traseira do seu computador para a tenso correta. This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations, CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B). If this device has WLAN or Bluetooth capability, this device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation. During normal operation: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches). To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the documentation included with the computer. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a, n, or ac wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-

channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antenna for this device is not replaceable. Any attempt at user modification may damage your computer. European Union regulatory notices Declaration of Conformity Products bearing the CE marking have been constructed so that they can operate in at least one EU Member State and comply with one or more of the following EU Directives as may be applicable:

RED 2014/53/EU; Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU; EMC Directive 2014/30/EU; Ecodesign Directive 2009/125/EC; RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU. Compliance with these directives is assessed using applicable European Harmonised Standards. Electromagnetic compatibility notices 19 The full Declaration of Conformity can be found at the following website: http://www.hp.eu/certificates

(Search with the product model name or its Regulatory Model Number (RMN), which may be found on the regulatory label.) The point of contact for regulatory matters is HP Deutschland GmbH, HQ-TRE, 71025, Boeblingen, Germany. Email techregshelp@hp.com Products with radio functionality (EMF) This product incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. For computers in normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with EU requirements. Products designed to be operated at closer proximities, such as tablet computers, comply with applicable EU requirements in typical operating positions. Products can be operated without maintaining a separation distance unless otherwise indicated in instructions specific to the product. Restrictions for products with radio functionality (select products only) CAUTION: IEEE 802.11x wireless LAN with 5.155.35 GHz frequency band is restricted for indoor use only for all countries reflected in the matrix. Using this WLAN application outdoors might lead to interference issues with existing radio services. CAUTION: Fixed outdoor installations for WiGig application (5766 GHz frequency band) are excluded for all countries reflected in the matrix. Radio frequency bands and maximum power levels (select products only) Maximum Transmit Power EIRP (mW) Radio Technology Bluetooth; 2,4 GHz NFC; 13,56 MHz RFID; 125 kHz/13,56 MHz Wireless HD; 60 GHz WLAN Wi-Fi 802.11x; 2,4 GHz WLAN Wi-Fi 802.11x; 5 GHz WWAN 4G LTE; 700/800/900/1800/2100/2600 MHz WWAN 3G UTMS; 900/2100 MHz WWAN 2G GSM GPRS EDGE; 900 MHz WWAN 2G GSM GPRS EDGE; 1800 MHz WiGig 802.11ad; 60 GHz Less than 1 Less than 10000 100 10 100 200 200 250 2000 1000 316 Wireless Charging Qi; 110kHz - 205 kHz Less than 1 NOTE: Use only HP-supported software drivers and correct country settings to ensure compliance. 20 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-

sale terminals European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) The product herewith complies with the requirements of the applicable Directive and carries the CE marking accordingly. However, due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in different countries/

regions, the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network termination point. In the event of problems, you should contact your equipment supplier in the first instance. This equipment has been designed to work with analogue DTMF Networks. This equipment may have internetworking difficulties in PSTN networks that only support Pulse Dialing. Please consult with your network operator for further assistance. A computer system comprising HP brand products meets the applicable ergonomic requirements if all affected constituent products bear the "GS" approval mark, for example Business Desktop PC, keyboard, PC-

mouse and monitor. Ein aus HP Produkten bestehendes Computersystem erfllt die anwendbaren ergonomischen Anforderungen, wenn alle verwendeten Komponenten das GS Zeichen tragen, wie z. B. Business Desktop PC, Tastatur, PC-

Maus und Bildschirm. Ergonomics notice Germany Germany (Deutscher text) Japan notice V-2 VCCI32-1 Japan power cord notice 5GHz Electromagnetic compatibility notices 21 Wireless LAN and Bluetooth certification markings If this device contains radio equipment, it is certified radio equipment. Some products may use electronic regulatory labels (e-labels). To view the certification mark and numbers on an e-label, please refer to the previous Accessing regulatory labels section. e e Mexico notice Declaracin para Mxico South Korea notices La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. If your product is provided with wireless accessories such as a keyboard or mouse and you need to identify the model of the accessory, refer to the label included on that accessory. Thailand WWAN wireless notice

(This telecommunication equipment conforms to the requirements of NBTC.) This radio communication equipment has the electromagnetic field strength in compliance with the Safety Standard for the Use of Radio communication Equipment on Human Health announced by the National Telecommunications Commission. 22 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-

sale terminals Taiwan NCC notices Wireless LAN 802.11a devices Wireless LAN 802.11 devices/Bluetooth devices/Short range devices Airline travel notice Use of electronic equipment aboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. User-replaceable battery notices When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery disposal. HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, refer to the HP website at http://www.hp.com/

recycle. For information about removing a user-replaceable battery, refer to the user guide included with the product. Factory-sealed battery notices The battery[ies] in this product cannot be easily replaced by users themselves. Removing or replacing the battery could affect your warranty coverage. If a battery is no longer holding a charge, contact support. When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for battery disposal. Airline travel notice 23 Laser compliance WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in the laser product installation guide, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified in the laser product installation guide. Allow only authorized service providers to repair the unit. This product may be provided with an optical storage device (for example, a CD or DVD drive) and/or a fiber optic transceiver. Each of these devices that contain a laser is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product in accordance with IEC/EN 60825-1 and meets the requirements for safety of that standard. Each laser product complies with US FDA regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50 dated June 24, 2007. 24 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-

sale terminals 3 Safety notices for notebook and tablet computers WARNING! To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety & Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup, posture, and health and work habits for computer users, and provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is located on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo and on the Documentation CD that is included with the product. Heat-related safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC/EN 60950-1). Potential safety conditions notice If you notice any of the following conditions (or if you have other safety concerns), do not use the computer:

crackling, hissing, or popping sound, or a strong odor or smoke coming from the computer. It is normal for these conditions to appear when an internal electronic component fails in a safe and controlled manner. However, these conditions may also indicate a potential safety issue. Do not assume it is a safe failure. Turn off the computer, disconnect it from its power source, and contact technical support for assistance. Battery notices WARNING! Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture; do not short external contacts; do not dispose of in fire or water. WARNING! Keep new and used batteries away from children. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Fast charging may not be available for non-compatible or non-HP batteries. WARNING! Do not ingest battery, a Chemical Burn Hazard. WARNING! This product contains a coin/button cell battery. If the coin/button cell battery is swallowed, it can cause severe internal burns in just 2 hours and can lead to death. WARNING!

from children. If the battery compartment does not close securely, stop using the product and keep it away Heat-related safety warning notice 25 WARNING!

immediate medical attention. If you think batteries might have been swallowed or placed inside any part of the body, seek WARNING!

explosion or the leakage of flammable liquid or gas. Leaving a battery in an extremely high temperature surrounding environment can result in an WARNING! A battery subjected to extremely low air pressure may result in an explosion or the leakage of flammable liquid or gas. Headset and earphone volume level notice WARNING!

To prevent possible hearing damage, do not listen at high volume levels for long periods. Adjustment of the volume control as well as the equalizer to other settings than the center position may increase the ear-/headphones output voltage and therefore the sound pressure level. The use of factors influencing the ear-/headphones output other than those specified by the manufacturer (e.g. operating system, equalizer software, firmware, driver) may increase the ear-/headphones output voltage and therefore the sound pressure level. Power cord notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-

pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Brazil notice Cleaning the keyboard Este equipamento deve ser conectado obrigatoriamente em tomada de rede de energia eltrica que possua aterramento (trs pinos), conforme a norma nbr abnt 5410,visando a segurana dos usurios contra choques eltricos. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. Clean the keyboard regularly to prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles that can become trapped beneath the keys. A can of compressed air with a straw extension can be used to blow air around and under the keys to loosen and remove debris. Travel notice WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. 26 Chapter 3 Safety notices for notebook and tablet computers China safety notices China: Altitude notice Altitude warning for products not certified for use in >5000 m Icon Description China: Tropical warning notice Tropical warning for products not certified for use in tropical regions. Icon Description Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner CAUTION: To reduce potential safety issues, use a galvanic isolator when connecting to a cable distribution system.

(1) 30 10

(2) 2 2 1 China safety notices 27 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals Important safety information WARNING! To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety & Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup, posture, and health and work habits for computer users, and provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is located on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo and on the Documentation CD that is included with the product. To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-

pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. The computer may be heavy; be sure to use ergonomically correct lifting procedures when moving it. Install the computer near an AC outlet. The AC power cord is your computers main AC disconnecting device and must be easily accessible at all times. For your safety, the power cord provided with your computer has a grounded plug. Always use the power cord with a properly grounded wall outlet, to avoid the risk of electrical shock. To reduce the possibility of an electric shock from the telephone network, plug your computer into the AC outlet before connecting it to the telephone line. Also, disconnect the telephone line before unplugging your computer from the AC power outlet. Always disconnect the modem cord from the telephone system before installing or removing your computer cover. Do not operate the computer with the cover removed. For your safety, always unplug the computer from its power source and from any telecommunications systems (such as telephone lines), networks, or modems before performing any service procedures. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or equipment damage. Hazardous voltage levels are inside the power supply and modem of this product. As a safety precaution, if the system power load exceeds the specific configurations capacities, the system may temporarily disable some USB ports. If your computer is provided with a voltage select switch for use in a 115 or 230 V power system, CAUTION:

the voltage select switch has been pre-set to the correct voltage setting for use in the particular country/

region where it was initially sold. Changing the voltage select switch to the incorrect position can damage your computer and void any implied warranty. This product has not been evaluated for connection to an IT power system (an AC distribution system with no direct connection to earth, according to IEC/EN 60950-1). 28 Chapter 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals Installation conditions See installation instructions before connecting this equipment to the input supply. WARNING! The equipment must be provided with a proper AC protective earth (PE) ground connection. Energized and moving parts may be inside the computer. Disconnect power to the equipment before removing the enclosure. Replace and secure the enclosure before re-energizing the equipment. Battery notices WARNING! The product may contain an internal lithium manganese dioxide, vanadium pentoxide, or alkaline battery or battery pack. There is risk of fire and burns if the battery pack is not handled properly. WARNING! Do not attempt to recharge the battery. WARNING! Do not expose to temperatures higher than 60 C (140 F). WARNING! Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts, or dispose of in fire or water. WARNING! Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. WARNING! Replace only with the HP spare designated for this product. WARNING! Do not ingest battery, a Chemical Burn Hazard. WARNING! This product contains a coin/button cell battery. If the coin/button cell battery is swallowed, it can cause severe internal burns in just 2 hours and can lead to death. WARNING! Keep new and used batteries away from children. If the battery compartment does not close securely, stop using the product and keep it away WARNING!

from children. WARNING!

immediate medical attention. If you think batteries might have been swallowed or placed inside any part of the body, seek WARNING!

explosion or the leakage of flammable liquid or gas. Leaving a battery in an extremely high temperature surrounding environment can result in an WARNING! A battery subjected to extremely low air pressure may result in an explosion or the leakage of flammable liquid or gas. Icon Description Batteries, battery packs, and accumulators should not be disposed of together with the general household waste. In order to forward them to recycling or proper disposal, please use the public collection system or return them to HP, an authorized HP partner, or their agents. Icon Description The Taiwan EPA requires dry battery manufacturing or importing firms, in accordance with Article 15 of the Waste Disposal Act, to indicate the recovery marks on the batteries used in sales, giveaways, or promotions. Contact a qualified Taiwanese recycler for proper battery disposal. Installation conditions 29 Fan notices WARNING!

WARNING! Keep body parts away from moving parts. WARNING! Keep body parts away from fan blades. WARNING! Keep body parts out of the motion path. Headset and earphone volume level notice WARNING!

To prevent possible hearing damage, do not listen at high volume levels for long periods. Adjustment of the volume control as well as the equalizer to other settings than the center position may increase the ear-/headphones output voltage and therefore the sound pressure level. The use of factors influencing the ear-/headphones output other than those specified by the manufacturer (e.g. operating system, equalizer software, firmware, driver) may increase the ear-/headphones output voltage and therefore the sound pressure level. Laser safety For products equipped with optical drives or fiber optic transceivers. This product may be provided with an optical storage device (i.e., CD or DVD drive) and/or fiber optic transceiver. These contain lasers and are classified as Class 1 Laser Products in accordance with the standard IEC/EN 60825-1 and comply with its requirements. Each laser product complies with US FDA Regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007. WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein or in the laser products installation guide may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified herein. Allow only HP Authorized Service technicians to repair the unit. Power supply and power cord set requirements Power supply class I grounding requirements For protection from fault currents, the equipment shall be connected to a grounding terminal. Plug the system power cord into an AC outlet that provides a ground connection. Substitute cords may not provide adequate fault protection. Only use the power cord supplied with this product or an HP Inc. authorized replacement. 30 Chapter 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals Este equipamento deve ser conectado obrigatoriamente em tomada de rede de energia eltrica que possua aterramento (trs pinos), conforme a norma nbr abnt 5410,visando a segurana dos usurios contra choques eltricos. Apparatets stikprop skal tilsluttes en stikkontakt med jord, som giver forbindelse til stikproppens jord. Laite on liitettv suojakoskettimilla varustettuun pistorasiaan. Brazil notice Denmark Finland Norway Sweden Apparatet m tilkoples jordet stikkontakt. Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag. Power supply requirements The power supplies on some products have external power switches. The voltage select switch feature on the product permits it to operate from any line voltage between 100-127 or 200-240 volts AC. Power supplies on those products that do not have external power switches are equipped with internal circuits that sense the incoming voltage and automatically switch to the proper voltage. For safety reasons, use only the AC adapter provided with the unit or an authorized replacement adapter from HP Inc. Replacement part numbers may be found at http://www.hp.com/cgi-bin/hpsupport/index.pl. For use in Norway Power cord set requirements This product is also designed for an IT power system with phase-to-phase voltage 230V. The power cord set received with the product meets the requirements for use in the country where the equipment was originally purchased. Use only the power cord provided with the unit or an authorized replacement power cord from HP Inc. or an approved HP Inc. source. Replacement part numbers may be found at http://www.hp.com/cgi-bin/hpsupport/index.pl. Power cord sets for use in other countries must meet the requirements of the country where you use the product. For more information on power cord set requirements, contact your authorized HP dealer, reseller, or service provider. WARNING! Do not use power cords from other products. Mismatched power cords may result in a shock and fire hazard. The requirements listed below are applicable to all countries:

1. 2. The power cord must be approved by an acceptable accredited agency responsible for evaluation in the country where the power cord set will be installed. The length of the power cord must be between 1.8 m (6 feet) and 3.6 m (12 feet). For a power cord 2.0 m

(6.56 feet) or less, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm2 or 18AWG. If the power cord is longer than 2.0 m (6.56 feet), the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 1.0 mm2 or 16AWG. Power supply and power cord set requirements 31 The power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. WARNING! Do not operate this product with a damaged power cord set. If the power cord set is damaged in any manner, replace it immediately. Damaged cords may result in user exposure to hazards. Japan power cord requirements For use in Japan, use only the power cord received with this product. CAUTION: Do not use the power cord received with this product on any other products. Pinch hazard WARNING! Observe pinch hazard areas. Keep fingers away from closing parts. TV antenna connectors protection External television antenna grounding If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is electrically grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper electrical grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna-

discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna-discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. Lightning protection For added protection of any product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug the product from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product from lightning and power line surges. 32 Chapter 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals Table 4-1 Antenna Grounding Reference Grounding Component 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Electric Service Equipment Power Service Grounding Electrode System (NEC Art 250, Part III) Ground Clamps Grounding Conductors (NEC Section 810.21) Antenna Discharge Unit (NEC Section 810.20) Ground Clamp Antenna Lead-in Wire Note to CATV system installer This reminder is provided to call the CATV systems installers attention to section 820.93 of the National Electric Code, which provides guidelines for proper grounding and in particular, specify that the Coaxial cable shield shall be connected to grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. TV antenna connectors protection 33 China safety notices China: Altitude notice Altitude warning for products not certified for use in >5000 m Icon Description China: Tropical warning notice Tropical warning for products not certified for use in tropical regions. Icon Description 34 Chapter 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals Germany acoustics notice Sound pressure level (LpA) is far below 70dB(A) (operator position, normal operation, according to ISO 7779) Product noise emission data can be found in the product related IT ECO Declarations at Internet address:

http://www.hp.com/go/ted Schalldruckpegel (LpA) ist weit unterhalb 70 dB(A) (Benutzerposition, normaler Betrieb, nach ISO 7779) Die Schallemissionswerte der Produkte knnen in den produktbezogenen IT ECO Declarations auf folgender Internet Adresse gefunden werden: http://www.hp.com/go/ted Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner CAUTION: To reduce potential safety issues, use a galvanic isolator when connecting to a cable distribution system.

(1) 30 10

(2) 2 2 1 Germany acoustics notice 35 5 Environmental notices for notebook and tablet computers This chapter provides country- and region-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges packaging, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. For information about recycling the product in Japan, refer to http://www.hp.com/jp/hardwarerecycle/. Disposal of waste equipment by users This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste. Instead, you should protect human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. For more information, please contact your household waste disposal service or go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. Brazil alkaline battery disposal Icon Description Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no daven ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum Brazil hardware recycling information Icon Description Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no daven ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. 36 Chapter 5 Environmental notices for notebook and tablet computers Icon Description No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar ENERGY STAR Certification (select models only) ENERGY STAR is a U.S. Environmental Protection Agency voluntary program that helps businesses and individuals save money and protect our climate through superior energy efficiency. Products that earn the ENERGY STAR prevent greenhouse gas emissions by meeting strict energy efficiency criteria or requirements set by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. As an ENERGY STAR Partner, HP Inc. has followed the U.S. EPAs enhanced product certification process to ensure that products marked with the ENERGY STAR logo are ENERGY STAR certified per the applicable ENERGY STAR guidelines. The following logo appears on all ENERGY STAR-certified computers:

A key ENERGY STAR requirement for computer products is power management features that significantly reduce energy consumption when the product is not in use. Power management allows a computer to automatically enter a low power sleep mode, or other low power mode, after a defined period of inactivity. The power management features have been preset as follows when the computer is operating on AC power:

Computer type Time to activate display sleep mode Time to activate computer sleep mode (minutes) Resuming from sleep mode Notebooks, Mobile Workstations Less than or equal to 15 minutes (varies by model) Less than or equal to 30 minutes (varies by model) Product will exit sleep mode when the power/sleep button is pressed. If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is enabled, the system can resume from sleep in response to a network signal. Tablets/Slates Less than or equal to 1 minute Not applicable Not applicable For computers that support an always-on, always-connected use profile where internet access is available

(such as tablets and slates), alternative low power modes - such as Short or Long Idle modes (as defined in the ENERGY STAR Computer Program Requirements) are provided that consume very little power (</= 10 Watts) and when applicable, maximize product battery life. These alternative low power modes are dynamic, with the display sleep mode activated within 1 minute of user inactivity. The computer exits Sleep when the power/Sleep button is pressed. When the Wake On LAN (WOL) feature is enabled, the computer can also exit Sleep in response to a network signal. Additional information on the potential energy and financial savings of the power management feature can be found on the EPA ENERGY STAR Power Management website at http://www.energystar.gov/

powermanagement. Additional information on the ENERGY STAR program and its environmental benefits are available on the EPA ENERGY STAR website at http://www.energystar.gov. ENERGY STAR Certification (select models only) 37 ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered trademarks owned by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Chemical substances HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No 1907/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at http://www.hp.com/go/reach. China environmental notices China PC energy label In accordance with The Regulation of the Implementation on China Energy Label for Microcomputers, this microcomputer has an Energy Efficiency Label. The energy efficiency grade, TEC (Typical Energy Consumption), and product category presented on the label are determined and calculated according to the standard GB28380-2012. 1. Energy Efficiency Grades The grade is determined by the standard with the calculation of base consumption level with the sum of all the allowances for additional components such as main memory and graphics card. For products of any grade, the TEC should not exceed the value specified in the following table:

Product Type TEC (kilowatt hour) Desktop microcomputer, AIO Category A 98.0+Efa 148.0+Efa 198.0+Efa Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 3 Category B 125.0+Efa 175.0+Efa 225.0+Efa Category C 159.0+Efa 209.0+Efa 259.0+Efa Category D 184.0+Efa 234.0+Efa 284.0+Efa 38 Chapter 5 Environmental notices for notebook and tablet computers Product Type TEC (kilowatt hour) Portable Computer Category A 20.0+Efa 35.0+Efa 45.0+Efa Category B 26.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 65.0+Efa Category C 54.5+Efa 75.0+Efa 123.5+Efa NOTE: Efa is the sum of power factor of product additional functions. 2. Typical Energy Consumption The energy consumption figure presented on the label is the data measured with the representative configuration that covers all the configurations in the registration unit which is selected according to

"The Regulation of the Implementation on China Energy Label for Microcomputers". Thus, actual energy consumption of this specific microcomputer may not be the same as the TEC data presented in the label. 3. Product Category The product category is determined by the standard according to the microcomputers configuration. The categorization of products complies with the regulations in the following table:

Product Type Category A Category B Category C Configuration Description Desktop microcomputer, AIO Portable Computer The desktop microcomputer and AIO whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B, C, and D The portable computer whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B and C CPU physical core number of 2, and system memory of not less than 2GB A Discrete GPU CPU physical core number of over 2, with at least one of the following features:

System memory of not less than 2 GB The product that has a CPU physical core number of not less than 2, system memory of not less than 2GB, A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit. A Discrete GPU 1. 2. 1. 2. Category D CPU physical core number of not less than 4, with at least one of the following features:

System memory of not less than 4 GB A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit For more details on the specification, please refer to the standard GB28380-2012. China PC energy label 39 40 Chapter 5 Environmental notices for notebook and tablet computers China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) The Table of Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content As required by Chinas Management Methods for Restricted Use of Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Products Part Name Lead (Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd) Mercury Cadmium Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) Hazardous Substances Battery Cables Camera Chassis/Other Flash memory card reader Floppy disk drive Hard disk drive Headphones I/O PCAs Keyboard Liquid crystal display

(LCD) panel Media (CD/DVD/floppy) Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Mouse Optical disk drive Optional docking device Power adapter Power pack Power supply Remote control Smart card/Java card reader Speakers, external TV tuner X X X X X X X X X X X O X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) 41 Part Name Lead (Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd) Mercury Cadmium Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) Hazardous Substances This form has been prepared in compliance with the provisions of SJ/T 11364. O: Indicates that the content of said hazardous substance in all of the homogenous materials in the component is within the limits required by GB/T 26572. X: Indicates that the content of said hazardous substance exceeds the limits required by GB/T 26572 in at least one homogenous material in the component. All parts named in this table with an X are in compliance with the European Unions RoHS Legislation. NOTE: The referenced Environmental Protection Use Period Marking was determined according to normal operating use conditions of the product such as temperature and humidity.

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(PBB)

(PBDE)

(Cr(VI)) USB flash memory drive USB hub Web camera Wireless receiver Wireless cards

I/O PCA

(LCD) CD/DVD/

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 42 Chapter 5 Environmental notices for notebook and tablet computers

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(PBB)

(PBDE) O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

/Java USB USB X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

(Cr(VI)) O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O SJ/T 11364 O GB/T 26572 X GB/T 26572 X RoHS

(RoHS) Declaration of the Presence Condition of the Restricted Substances Marking Restricted substances and its chemical symbols Unit Lead (Pb) Mercury (Hg) Cadmium (Cd) Cables Hexavalent chromium (CR+6) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE)

(RoHS) 43 Restricted substances and its chemical symbols

Chassis/Other

I/O PCAs

(LCD) Liquid crystal display (LCD) panel Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Power pack Power supply Storage Devices Wireless Devices 1 0.1 % 0.01 %

Note 1: "Exceeding 0.1 wt %" and "exceeding 0.01 wt %" indicate that the percentage content of the restricted substance exceeds the reference percentage value of presence condition. 2 Note 2: "" indicates that the percentage content of the restricted substance does not exceed the percentage of reference value of presence. 3 Note 3: The "" indicates that the restricted substance corresponds to the exemption. http://www.hp.com/support To access the latest user guides or manuals for your product, go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Find your product, and then follow the on-screen instructions. India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) This product, as well as its related consumables and spares, complies with the reduction in hazardous substances provisions of the "India E-waste Rule 2016." It does not contain lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations exceeding 0.1 44 Chapter 5 Environmental notices for notebook and tablet computers weight % and 0.01 weight % for cadmium, except where allowed pursuant to the exemptions set in Schedule 2 of the Rule. Information for European Union Commission Regulation 1275/2008 To locate product power consumption data, including when the product is in networked standby with all wired network ports connected and wireless devices connected, refer to section P14 Additional information of the product IT ECO Declaration at http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/

itecodesktop-pc.html. Where applicable, activate and deactivate a wireless network using the instructions included in the product user guide or the operating system. Information is also available at http://www.hp.com/support. IT ECO declarations For notebook PCs, go to http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/

iteconotebook-o.html. Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers provide Material Content Declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, visit http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law This product has been labeled in compliance with the Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law requiring disclosure of power consumption in the normal use (idle mode) and standby modes. Your product is one of many configurations in this model family; the idle mode power consumption of your specific configuration may vary from the information on the label. Actual power consumption of your product may be higher or lower than the value reported on the Mexico product energy label due to factors such as configuration (components and modules chosen) and usage (tasks being performed, software installed and running, etc.). Turkey EEE regulation Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. Information for European Union Commission Regulation 1275/2008 45 This products real-time clock battery or coin cell battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. TCO Certified This section applies only to products bearing the TCO Certified logo. 46 Chapter 5 Environmental notices for notebook and tablet computers TCO Certified Edge This section applies only to products bearing the TCO Certified Edge logo. TCO Certified Edge 47 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals This chapter provides country- and region-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges packaging, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. For information about recycling the product in Japan, refer to http://www.hp.com/jp/hardwarerecycle/. Disposal of waste equipment by users Icon Description This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste. Instead, you should protect human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. For more information, please contact your household waste disposal service or go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. Brazil alkaline battery disposal Icon Description Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no daven ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum Brazil hardware recycling information Icon Description Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no daven ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas 48 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals Icon Description No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar ENERGY STAR Certification (select models only) ENERGY STAR is a U.S. Environmental Protection Agency voluntary program that helps businesses and individuals save money and protect our climate through superior energy efficiency. Products that earn the ENERGY STAR prevent greenhouse gas emissions by meeting strict energy efficiency criteria or requirements set by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. As an ENERGY STAR Partner, HP Inc. has followed the U.S. EPAs enhanced product certification process to ensure that products marked with the ENERGY STAR logo are ENERGY STAR certified per the applicable ENERGY STAR guidelines. The following logo appears on all ENERGY STAR-certified computers:

A key ENERGY STAR requirement for computer products is power management features that significantly reduce energy consumption when the product is not in use. Power management allows a computer to automatically enter a low power sleep mode, or other low power mode, after a defined period of inactivity. The power management features have been preset as follows when the computer is operating on AC power:

Computer type Time to activate display sleep mode Time to activate computer sleep mode (minutes) Resuming from sleep mode Desktops, Integrated Desktops, Workstations Less than or equal to 15 minutes (varies by model) Less than or equal to 30 minutes (varies by model) Thin clients Less than or equal to 15 minutes (varies by model) Less than or equal to 30 minutes when sleep mode is supported by the operating system (varies by model) Product will exit sleep mode when user interacts with any input device, including the mouse or keyboard. If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is enabled, the system can resume from sleep in response to a network signal. When sleep mode is supported by operating system product will exit sleep mode when user interacts with any input device, including the mouse or keyboard. If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is enabled, the system can resume from sleep in response to a network signal. The computer exits Sleep when the power/Sleep button is pressed. When the Wake On LAN (WOL) feature is enabled, the computer can also exit Sleep in response to a network signal. Additional information on the potential energy and financial savings of the power management feature can be found on the EPA ENERGY STAR Power Management website at http://www.energystar.gov/

powermanagement. ENERGY STAR Certification (select models only) 49 Additional information on the ENERGY STAR program and its environmental benefits are available on the EPA ENERGY STAR website at http://www.energystar.gov. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered trademarks owned by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Chemical substances Mercury statement HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No. 1907/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at http://www.hp.com/go/reach. This statement applies to all-in-one computers with built-in display panels that do not use LED backlighting. This HP product may contain the following material that might require special handling at end-of-life:

Mercury in the fluorescent lamp in the display LCD Disposal of mercury can be regulated because of environmental considerations. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA)

(http://www.eiae.org). Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply The computers real-time clock battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/. China environmental notices 50 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals China PC energy label In accordance with The Regulation of the Implementation on China Energy Label for Microcomputers, this microcomputer has an Energy Efficiency Label. The energy efficiency grade, TEC (Typical Energy Consumption), and product category presented on the label are determined and calculated according to the standard GB28380-2012. 1. Energy Efficiency Grades The grade is determined by the standard with the calculation of base consumption level with the sum of all the allowances for additional components such as main memory and graphics card. For products of any grade, the TEC should not exceed the value specified in the following table:

Product Type TEC (kilowatt hour) Desktop microcomputer, AIO Category A 98.0+Efa 148.0+Efa 198.0+Efa Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 3 Category B 125.0+Efa 175.0+Efa 225.0+Efa Category C 159.0+Efa 209.0+Efa 259.0+Efa Category D 184.0+Efa 234.0+Efa 284.0+Efa Portable Computer Category A 20.0+Efa 35.0+Efa 45.0+Efa Category B 26.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 65.0+Efa Category C 54.5+Efa 75.0+Efa 123.5+Efa NOTE: Efa is the sum of power factor of product additional functions. 2. Typical Energy Consumption The energy consumption figure presented on the label is the data measured with the representative configuration that covers all the configurations in the registration unit which is selected according to The Regulation of the Implementation on China Energy Label for Microcomputers". Thus, actual energy consumption of this specific microcomputer may not be the same as the TEC data presented in the label. 3. Product Category The product category is determined by the standard according to the microcomputers configuration. The categorization of products complies with the regulations in the following table:

Product Type Configuration Description Category A Category B Category C Desktop microcomputer, AIO Portable Computer The desktop microcomputer and AIO whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B, C, and D The portable computer whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B and C CPU physical core number of 2, and system memory of not less than 2 GB A Discrete GPU CPU physical core number of over 2, with at least one of the following features:

1. System memory of not less than 2 GB The product that has a CPU physical core number of not less than 2, system memory of not less than 2GB, A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit. China PC energy label 51 Product Type Configuration Description 2. A Discrete GPU Category D CPU physical core number of not less than 4, with at least one of the following features:

1. 2. System memory of not less than 4 GB A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit For more details on the specification, please refer to the standard GB28380-2012. 52 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals China PC energy label 53 China restriction of hazard substances (ROHS) The Table of Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content As required by Chinas Management Methods for Restricted Use of Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Products Hazardous Substances Part Name Lead (Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd) Mercury Cadmium Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) Flash memory card reader Battery Cables Camera Chassis/Other Fan Floppy disk drive Hard disk drive Headphones Heat sink I/O PCAs Keyboard Liquid crystal display

(LCD) panel Media (CD/DVD/floppy) Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Mouse Optical disk drive Optional docking device Power adapter Power supply Projector Remote control Smart card/Java card reader X X X X X X X X X X X X X O X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 54 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals Part Name Lead (Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd) Mercury Cadmium Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) Hazardous Substances USB flash memory drive Solid-state drives Speakers, external Stylus Touch mat TV tuner USB hub Web camera Wireless receiver Wireless cards 3D Capture Stage/

Turntable

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O This form has been prepared in compliance with the provisions of SJ/T 11364. O: Indicates that the content of said hazardous substance in all of the homogenous materials in the component is within the limits required by GB/T 26572. X: Indicates that the content of said hazardous substance exceeds the limits required by GB/T 26572 in at least one homogenous material in the component. All parts named in this table with an X are in compliance with the European Unions RoHS Legislation. NOTE: The referenced Environmental Protection Use Period Marking was determined according to normal operating use conditions of the product such as temperature and humidity.

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(PBB)

(PBDE)

(Cr(VI)) O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O China restriction of hazard substances (ROHS) 55

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(PBB)

(PBDE)

(Cr(VI)) I/O PCA

(LCD) CD/DVD/

/Java USB USB 3D /

X X X X X X X O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O SJ/T 11364 O GB/T 26572 X GB/T 26572 X RoHS 56 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals

(Cr(VI))

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(PBB)

(PBDE)

(RoHS) Declaration of the Presence Condition of the Restricted Substances Marking Restricted substances and its chemical symbols Lead Mercury Cadmium

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd) Hexavalent chromium (CR

+6) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) Unit Cables

/ Chassis/Other

I/O PCAs

(LCD) Liquid crystal display

(LCD) panel (for AIO only) Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Power supply Storage Devices 1 0.1 % 0.01 %

Note 1: "Exceeding 0.1 wt %" and "exceeding 0.01 wt %" indicate that the percentage content of the restricted substance exceeds the reference percentage value of presence condition. 2 Note 2: "" indicates that the percentage content of the restricted substance does not exceed the percentage of reference value of presence. 3 Note 3: The "" indicates that the restricted substance corresponds to the exemption. http://www.hp.com/support To access the latest user guides or manuals for your product, go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Find your product, and then follow the on-screen instructions.

(RoHS) 57 India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) This product, as well as its related consumables and spares, complies with the reduction in hazardous substances provisions of the "India E-waste Rule 2016." It does not contain lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations exceeding 0.1 weight % and 0.01 weight % for cadmium, except where allowed pursuant to the exemptions set in Schedule 2 of the Rule. Information for European Union Commission Regulation 1275/2008 To locate product power consumption data, including when the product is in networked standby with all wired network ports connected and wireless devices connected, refer to section P14 Additional information of the product IT ECO Declaration at http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/

itecodesktop-pc.html. Where applicable, activate and deactivate a wireless network using the instructions included in the product user guide or the operating system. Information is also available at http://www.hp.com/support. IT ECO declarations Desktop PCs and Thin Clients http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecodesktop-pc.html?

jumpid=reg_R1002_USEN Workstations http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecoworkstatio.html Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers provide Material Content Declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, visit http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. Mehiki zakon o uporabi trajnostne energije Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico Se ha etiquetado este producto en conformidad con la Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico, que requiere la divulgacin del consumo de energa del modo de uso normal (modo inactivo) y del modo de espera. Su producto es una de las muchas configuraciones de esta familia de modelos; el consumo de energa del modo inactivo de su configuracin especfica puede diferir de la informacin de la etiqueta. El consumo real de energa de su producto puede ser mayor o menor que el valor informado en la etiqueta de 58 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals energa de producto para Mxico a causa de factores como la configuracin (componentes y mdulos seleccionados) y el uso (tareas que se estn efectuando, software instalado y en ejecucin, etc.). NOTE: Esta ley no es aplicable a los workstations. This product has been labeled in compliance with the Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law requiring disclosure of power consumption in the normal use (idle mode) and standby modes. Your product is one of many configurations in this model family; the idle mode power consumption of your specific configuration may vary from the information on the label. Actual power consumption of your product may be higher or lower than the value reported on the Mexico product energy label due to factors such as configuration (components and modules chosen) and usage (tasks being performed, software installed and running, etc.). NOTE: Workstations are not labeled because the law is not applicable to the workstation product category. Turkey EEE regulation TCO Certified This section applies only to products bearing the TCO Certified logo. Turkey EEE regulation 59 TCO Certified Edge This section applies only to products bearing the TCO Certified Edge logo. 60 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals TCO Certified Edge 61 Index Symbols/Numerics 43, 57 43, 57 A airline travel notice 8, 23 altitude notice 27, 34 B battery 25, 29 battery notice 8, 23, 46, 48 battery recycling 36, 48 Brazil notice 3, 19, 26, 31 C cable grounding notice 27, 35 Canada modem statement 12, 16 Canada notices 3, 19 China environmental notices 38, 50 China PC energy label 38, 51 China restriction of hazardous substances notice 41, 54 D disposal notices battery 46, 48 battery, user replacement 8, 23 equipment 36, 48 factory sealed battery 8, 23 E electronic hardware and battery recycling 36, 48 ENERGY STAR certification 37, 49 environmental notices 36, 48 equipment disposal notice 36, 48 ergonomics notice 5, 21 European Union Commission Regulation 1275/2008 45, 58 F fan notice 30 62 Index Federal Communications Commission desktops, thin clients, and workstations notice 17 desktops, thin clients, workstations cables 18 desktops, thin clients, modem statements Canada 12, 16 Japan 12 New Zealand 12, 16 U.S. 9, 10, 15 modifications, desktops, thin clients, workstations modifications 18 workstations notebook computers cables 2 notebook computers Federal Communications Commission 18 modifications 2 modifications, notebook computers notebook computers notice 2 Federal Communications G GS Notice 5, 21 H headset and earphone volume level 16 notices notice 26, 30 Commission 2 N New Zealand modem statement 12, I India restriction of hazardous substances notice 44, 58 J Japan modem statement 12 Japan notice 6, 21 Japan power cord notice 13, 21, 32 Japan restriction of hazardous substances notice 45, 58 K keyboard notice 26 L labels, regulatory 1, 14 laser safety notice 9, 24, 30 M Macrovision Corporation notice 13 maximum power levels 4, 20 Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law 45 Mexico wireless notice 6, 22 modem notices 9, 15 airline travel 8, 23 battery 8, 23, 25, 29, 46, 48 Brazil 3, 19, 26, 31 Canada 3, 19 China restriction of hazardous substances 41, 54 environmental 36, 48 equipment disposal 36, 48 ergonomics 5, 21 fan 30 headset and earphone volume level 26, 30 India restriction of hazardous substances 44, 58 Japan 6, 21 Japan power cord 13, 21, 32 Japan restriction of hazardous substances 45, 58 keyboard 26 laser safety 9, 24, 30 Macrovision Corporation 13 Mexico 6, 22 modem 9, 15 perchlorate material 45, 50 power cords 13, 26 Singapore 7 South Korea 7, 22 Taiwan 7, 23 Thailand WWAN wireless notice 7, 22 travel 26 notices, desktops, thin clients, and workstations Federal Communications Commission 17 notices, notebook computers Federal Communications Commission 2 P power cord notice 13, 26 R radio frequency bands 4, 20 recycling, electronic hardware and battery 36, 48 S Singapore wireless notice 7 South Korea notice 7, 22 T Taiwan notice 7, 23 TCO Certified Certification 46, 59 TCO Certified Edge Certification 47, Thailand WWAN wireless notice 7, travel notice 26 tropical warning notice 27, 34 TV tuner, cable grounding notice 27, 60 22 35 U U.S. modem statement 9, 10, 15 V voice support 13, 17 volume level notice, headset and earphone 26, 30 W wireless LAN devices 3, 18, 19 Index 63

Informations sur les rglementations, la scurit et les conditions d'utilisation Manuel de l'utilisateur Copyright 2018 HP Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth est une marque dtenue par son propritaire et utilise sous licence par HP Inc. ENERGY STAR et la marque de ENERGY STAR sont des marques dposes aux tats-Unis. Java est une marque dpose d'Oracle et/ou de ses filiales. Les informations contenues dans ce document peuvent tre modifies sans pravis. Les garanties relatives aux produits et aux services HP sont dcrites dans les dclarations de garantie limite expresse qui les accompagnent. Aucun lment du prsent document ne peut tre interprt comme constituant une garantie supplmentaire. HP ne saurait tre tenu pour responsable des erreurs ou omissions de nature technique ou rdactionnelle qui pourraient subsister dans le prsent document. Premire dition : mars 2018 Rfrence du document : L25269-051 propos de ce manuel Ce manuel fournit des informations sur les rglementations, la scurit et les conditions d'utilisation en conformit avec les rglementations amricaines, canadiennes et internationales en matire d'ordinateurs portables, d'ordinateurs de bureau, de clients lgers et de stations de travail personnelles. Pour accder aux derniers manuels de l'utilisateur ou guides concernant votre produit, rendez-vous sur http://www.hp.com/support. Slectionnez Recherche de votre produit, puis suivez les instructions l'cran. Le non-respect des instructions expose l'utilisateur des risques potentiellement trs AVERTISSEMENT !

graves. ATTENTION :

informations qu'il contient. Le non-respect des instructions prsente des risques, tant pour le matriel que pour les REMARQUE :

Le texte ainsi dfini fournit des informations importantes supplmentaires. iii iv propos de ce manuel Sommaire 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables et tablettes ..................................................................... 1 Accs aux tiquettes de conformit ...................................................................................................................... 1 Avis de la FCC .......................................................................................................................................................... 2 Modifications ....................................................................................................................................... 2 Cbles .................................................................................................................................................. 2 Produits avec appareils sans fil LAN ou modules mobiles large bande HP ..................................... 3 Avis pour le Brsil ................................................................................................................................................... 3 Avis pour le Canada ................................................................................................................................................ 3 Avis pour l'Union europenne ................................................................................................................................ 4 Dclaration de conformit .................................................................................................................. 4 Produits quips de fonctionnalit radio ......................................................................... 5 Restrictions pour les produits quips de fonctionnalit radio (certains produits uniquement) ...................................................................................................................... 5 Bandes de frquences radio et niveaux de puissance maximale (certains produits uniquement) ...................................................................................................................... 5 Dclaration relative au rseau tlphonique europen (modem/fax) ............................ 5 Avis sur l'ergonomie .......................................................................................................... 6 Allemagne (texte en franais) ........................................................................ 6 Allemagne (texte en allemand) ...................................................................... 6 Avis pour l'Australie et la Nouvelle-Zlande .......................................................................................................... 6 Avis WWAN pour la Chine ....................................................................................................................................... 6 Avis pour le Japon .................................................................................................................................................. 7 Marques de certification des priphriques WLAN, WWAN et Bluetooth ......................................... 7 Avis pour le Mexique .............................................................................................................................................. 7 Avis sur les appareils sans fil pour Singapour ....................................................................................................... 8 Avis pour la Core du Sud ...................................................................................................................................... 8 Avis sur les appareils sans fil WWAN pour la Thalande ........................................................................................ 8 Avis de la NCC pour Tawan .................................................................................................................................... 8 Priphriques WLAN 802.11a ............................................................................................................. 8 Priphriques sans fil LAN 802.11/Priphriques Bluetooth/Priphriques courte porte .......... 9 Avis sur les utilisations en vol ............................................................................................................................... 9 Avis sur les batteries remplaables par l'utilisateur ............................................................................................. 9 Avis sur les batteries scelles en usine ................................................................................................................. 9 Conformit du laser ............................................................................................................................................. 10 Avis sur les modems ............................................................................................................................................ 10 Homologations du priphrique de tlcommunication .................................................................. 11 Avis sur les modems pour les tats-Unis .......................................................................................... 12 v Dclarations sur les modems pour les tats-Unis ............................................................................ 13 Avis sur les modems pour le Canada ................................................................................................ 14 Avis sur les modems pour le Japon ................................................................................................... 14 Dclarations sur les modems pour la Nouvelle-Zlande ................................................................. 15 Prise en charge vocale .................................................................................................... 15 Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation ..................................................................................................................... 16 Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation pour le Japon ........................................................................... 16 Prise CC de la source d'alimentation externe HP .............................................................................. 16 Avis de Macrovision Corporation ......................................................................................................................... 16 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail personnelles, tout-

en-un et les terminaux de point de vente .......................................................................................................... 17 Accs aux tiquettes de conformit .................................................................................................................... 17 Avis sur les modems ............................................................................................................................................ 18 Homologations des priphriques de tlcommunications ............................................................ 18 Avis sur les modems pour les tats-Unis .......................................................................................... 19 Avis sur les modems pour le Canada ................................................................................................ 20 Avis sur les modems pour le Japon ................................................................................................... 20 Dclarations sur les modems pour la Nouvelle-Zlande ................................................................. 20 Prise en charge vocale .................................................................................................... 21 Avis de compatibilit lectromagntique ........................................................................................................... 21 Avis de la FCC ..................................................................................................................................... 21 Modifications ................................................................................................................... 22 Cbles .............................................................................................................................. 22 Produits quips de priphriques LAN sans fil ............................................................. 22 Dclaration sur les tlcommunications pour l'Australie ................................................................. 22 Avis pour le Brsil .............................................................................................................................. 22 Avis pour le Canada ........................................................................................................................... 23 Avis pour l'Union europenne ........................................................................................................... 23 Dclaration de conformit .............................................................................................. 23 Produits quips de fonctionnalit radio (EMF) ........................................... 24 Restrictions pour les produits quips de fonctionnalit radio (certains produits uniquement) ................................................................................... 24 Bandes de frquences radio et niveaux de puissance maximale

(certains produits uniquement) ................................................................... 24 Dclaration relative au rseau tlphonique europen (modem/fax) .......................... 24 Avis sur l'ergonomie ........................................................................................................ 25 Allemagne ..................................................................................................... 25 Allemagne (texte en allemand) .................................................................... 25 Avis pour le Japon .............................................................................................................................. 25 Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation pour le Japon ......................................................... 25 vi Marques de certification des priphriques WLAN et Bluetooth ................................... 26 Avis pour le Mexique ......................................................................................................................... 27 Avis pour la Core du Sud .................................................................................................................. 27 Avis sur les priphriques sans fil WWAN pour la Thalande ............................................................ 27 Avis de la NCC pour Tawan ................................................................................................................ 27 Priphriques WLAN 802.11a ......................................................................................... 27 Priphriques sans fil LAN 802.11/Priphriques Bluetooth/Priphriques courte porte .................................................................................................................. 28 Informations sur les dplacements ariens ........................................................................................................ 28 Avis sur les batteries remplaables par l'utilisateur ........................................................................................... 28 Avis sur les batteries scelles en usine ............................................................................................................... 28 Conformit du laser ............................................................................................................................................. 29 3 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs portables et tablettes ............................................................................ 30 Avis d'avertissement relatif la chaleur ............................................................................................................. 30 Avis sur les risques lis la scurit ................................................................................................................... 30 Avis relatif aux batteries ...................................................................................................................................... 30 Avis sur le niveau du volume du casque et des couteurs .................................................................................. 31 Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation ..................................................................................................................... 31 Avis pour le Brsil .............................................................................................................................. 31 Nettoyage du clavier ............................................................................................................................................ 32 Avis sur les dplacements ................................................................................................................................... 32 Avis de scurit pour la Chine .............................................................................................................................. 32 Chine : avis sur l'altitude .................................................................................................................... 32 Chine : avis sur une utilisation dans des conditions tropicales ........................................................ 32 Norvge et Sude : avis de mise la terre des cbles pour les produits quips d'un tuner TV ....................... 32

......................................................................................................................................... 32 4 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail personnelles, tout-en-un et les terminaux de point de vente ................................................................................................................... 33 Informations importantes relatives la scurit ............................................................................................... 33 Conditions d'installation ...................................................................................................................................... 34 Avis relatif aux batteries ...................................................................................................................................... 34 Avis sur le ventilateur .......................................................................................................................................... 35 Avis sur le niveau du volume du casque et des couteurs .................................................................................. 35 Scurit des lasers ............................................................................................................................................... 35 Exigences relatives au bloc d'alimentation et au cordon d'alimentation ........................................................... 36 Exigences relatives la mise la terre des alimentations de classe 1 ............................................ 36 Avis pour le Brsil ............................................................................................................ 36 Danemark ........................................................................................................................ 36 Finlande ........................................................................................................................... 36 vii 5 Avis environnementaux pour les ordinateurs portables et tablettes ................................................................ 41 Norvge ........................................................................................................................... 36 Sude .............................................................................................................................. 36 Exigences relatives au bloc d'alimentation ...................................................................................... 36 Pour une utilisation en Norvge ..................................................................................... 37 Exigences relatives au cordon d'alimentation .................................................................................. 37 Spcifications du cordon d'alimentation pour le Japon .................................................................... 37 Risque de pincement ........................................................................................................................................... 37 Protection des connecteurs de l'antenne TV ....................................................................................................... 37 Mise la terre d'une antenne de tlvision externe ......................................................................... 37 Protection contre la foudre ............................................................................................................... 38 Remarque destine aux installateurs de systmes de tlvision par cble .................................... 38 Avis de scurit pour la Chine .............................................................................................................................. 39 Chine : avis sur l'altitude .................................................................................................................... 39 Chine : avis sur une utilisation dans des conditions tropicales ........................................................ 39 Avis d'acoustique pour l'Allemagne ..................................................................................................................... 40 Norvge et Sude : Avis de mise la terre des cbles pour les produits quips dune carte TV ..................... 40

......................................................................................................................................... 40 Recyclage du matriel lectronique, de l'emballage et de la batterie ................................................................ 41 Mise au rebut des quipements par les utilisateurs ........................................................................................... 41 Mise au rebut des batteries alcalines au Brsil ................................................................................................... 41 Informations sur le recyclage du matriel au Brsil ........................................................................................... 42 Certification ENERGY STAR (certains modles) ................................................................................................. 42 Substances chimiques ......................................................................................................................................... 43 Avis sur l'environnement pour la Chine ............................................................................................................... 43 tiquette de consommation nergtique des ordinateurs pour la Chine .......................................................... 44 Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour la Chine (RoHS) ......................................................... 47 Tableau des substances/composants dangereux et leur contenu ................................................... 47

........................................................................................... 48

(RoHS) ......................................................................................................... 49

....................................................................................................... 49 Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour l'Inde (RoHS) ............................................................. 51 Informations sur le rglement 1275/2008 de la Commission europenne ....................................................... 51 Dclarations IT ECO .............................................................................................................................................. 51 Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour le Japon (RoHS) ........................................................ 51

.............................................................................................................................................................................. 51 Rglementation EEE de la Turquie ...................................................................................................................... 52 Matriau compos de perchlorate : une manipulation particulire peut tre ncessaire ................................. 52 Certifi TCO ........................................................................................................................................................... 53 TCO Certified Edge ................................................................................................................................................ 54 viii 6 Avis relatifs lenvironnement pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail personnelles, tout-en-un et les terminaux de point de vente .............................................................................. 55 Recyclage du matriel lectronique, de l'emballage et de la batterie ................................................................ 55 Mise au rebut des quipements par les utilisateurs ........................................................................................... 55 Mise au rebut des batteries alcalines au Brsil ................................................................................................... 55 Informations sur le recyclage du matriel au Brsil ........................................................................................... 56 Certification ENERGY STAR (certains modles) ................................................................................................. 56 Substances chimiques ......................................................................................................................................... 57 Avis sur le mercure .............................................................................................................................................. 57 Matriau compos de perchlorate : une manipulation particulire peut tre ncessaire ................................. 57 Avis sur l'environnement pour la Chine ............................................................................................................... 58 tiquette de consommation nergtique des ordinateurs pour la Chine .......................................................... 58 Restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour la Chine (ROHS) ....................................................... 61 Tableau des substances/composants dangereux et leur contenu ................................................... 61

........................................................................................... 62

(RoHS) ......................................................................................................... 64

....................................................................................................... 64 Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour l'Inde (RoHS) ............................................................. 65 Informations sur le rglement 1275/2008 de la Commission europenne ....................................................... 65 Dclarations IT ECO .............................................................................................................................................. 65 Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour le Japon (RoHS) ........................................................ 65 Mehiki zakon o uporabi trajnostne energije ...................................................................................................... 66 Rglementation EEE de la Turquie ...................................................................................................................... 66 Certifi TCO ........................................................................................................................................................... 67 TCO Certified Edge ................................................................................................................................................ 68 Index ............................................................................................................................................................. 69 ix x 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables et tablettes Ce chapitre fournit des avis de rglementation spcifiques des pays et des rgions concernant les produits filaires et sans fil, ainsi que des informations de conformit concernant l'ordinateur. Certains de ces avis peuvent ne pas s'appliquer votre produit. Un ou plusieurs appareils sans fil intgrs peuvent tre installs. Dans certains environnements, l'utilisation d'appareils sans fil peut tre limite. Ces restrictions peuvent s'appliquer bord des avions, dans les hpitaux, dans les lieux proximit d'explosifs, dans les environnements dangereux, etc. Si vous ne connaissez pas la politique relative l'utilisation de ce produit, demandez l'autorisation de l'utiliser avant de le mettre sous tension. Accs aux tiquettes de conformit Les tiquettes de conformit, qui fournissent des informations sur les rglementations de votre pays ou rgion (par exemple, l'ID FCC), peuvent tre situes physiquement sous l'ordinateur, l'intrieur du compartiment de la batterie (certains modles), sous le cache de service amovible (certains modles), l'arrire de l'cran ou sur le module du modem ou de l'appareil sans fil. Certains produits peuvent galement fournir des tiquettes de rglementation lectroniques (e-tiquettes) accessibles via le systme BIOS. REMARQUE :

Les tiquettes lectroniques ne sont pas disponibles sur tous les produits. REMARQUE :

possdent peut-tre pas d'ID FCC. Les appareils qui ne sont pas destins la vente ou une utilisation aux tats-Unis ne Pour afficher les tiquettes de conformit lectroniques :

1. Mettez l'ordinateur sous tension ou redmarrez-le. Appuyez sur chap ou F10 pour accder Computer Setup. l'aide d'un priphrique de pointage ou des touches de direction, slectionnez Advanced (Avanc), Electronic Labels (tiquettes de conformit), puis appuyez sur la touche entre. Pour afficher une tiquette lectronique, utilisez un priphrique de pointage ou les touches de direction pour slectionner un des lments de la liste, puis appuyez sur OK. REMARQUE :

d'ordinateur et des priphriques installs. La liste des lments d'tiquette lectronique disponibles varie en fonction du modle 5. Pour quitter les menus de Computer Setup sans effectuer de modification :

Slectionnez l'icne Exit (Quitter) dans le coin infrieur droit de l'cran, puis suivez les instructions l'cran. 2. 3. 4. ou Utilisez les touches de direction pour slectionner Main (Principal), Ignore Changes and Exit (Ignorer les modifications et quitter), puis appuyez sur la touche entre. Accs aux tiquettes de conformit 1 Avis de la FCC Le prsent quipement a t test et dclar conforme aux limites d'un appareil numrique de Classe B, telles que dfinies dans l'article 15 des rglementations FCC. Ces limites sont conues pour fournir une protection raisonnable contre les interfrences prjudiciables dans un environnement rsidentiel. Le prsent quipement gnre, utilise et peut mettre une nergie de radiofrquence et, s'il n'est pas install et utilis conformment aux instructions, peut entraner des interfrences prjudiciables pour les radiocommunications. Cependant, tout risque d'interfrences ne peut tre totalement exclu dans certains environnements spcifiques. Si cet quipement entrane des interfrences en matire de rception radio ou tlvision, ce qui peut tre vrifi en teignant et en rallumant l'quipement, il est recommand l'utilisateur d'essayer de corriger les interfrences en suivant une ou plusieurs des mesures suivantes :

Rorienter ou dplacer l'antenne de rception. Augmenter la distance entre l'quipement et le rcepteur. Brancher le matriel informatique sur la prise d'un circuit autre que celui sur lequel est branch le rcepteur. Demander conseil votre revendeur ou un technicien radio ou tlvision expriment. Cet appareil est conforme l'article 15 des rglementations FCC. Son fonctionnement est soumis deux conditions :

Cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer des interfrences nuisibles, et Cet appareil doit accepter toute interfrence reue, notamment des interfrences pouvant provoquer un fonctionnement non voulu. 1. 2. Pour toute question concernant ce produit :

crivez :

HP Inc. 1501 Page Mill Road Palo Alto, CA 94304 Appelez HP au 650-857-1501 ou Envoyez un courrier lectronique techregshelp@hp.com Pour identifier ce produit, reportez-vous la rfrence de pice, de gamme ou de modle indique sur le produit. Modifications Cbles La FCC stipule que l'utilisateur doit tre inform que toute modification opre sur l'appareil, n'ayant pas t expressment approuve par HP, peut entraner l'annulation des droits d'exploitation du produit dont bnficie l'utilisateur. Pour tre conformes la rglementation de la FCC, les connexions d'entre de l'appareil doivent tre tablies avec des cbles blinds munis d'embouts de connecteurs RFI/EMI mtalliques. 2 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables et tablettes Produits avec appareils sans fil LAN ou modules mobiles large bande HP Cet appareil ne doit pas tre plac ct ou fonctionner avec une autre antenne ou un autre metteur. AVERTISSEMENT ! Exposition aux radiations de frquence radio La puissance de rayonnement de cet appareil est infrieure aux limites d'exposition aux radiations mises par les frquences radio FCC. Toutefois, l'appareil doit tre utilis de sorte que les possibilits de contact humain soient rduites au maximum pendant le fonctionnement normal de tablettes et d'ordinateurs portables. Pendant le fonctionnement normal de tablettes et d'ordinateurs portables dont les crans sont infrieurs ou gaux 30,5 cm (12 pouces) : pour viter de dpasser les limites d'expositions aux frquences radio dictes dans la rglementation FCC, il est prfrable de ne pas s'approcher plus de 2,5 cm (1 pouce) de l'antenne. Pour identifier l'emplacement des antennes sans fil, reportez-vous aux manuels de l'utilisateur qui accompagnent votre ordinateur. Pendant le fonctionnement normal d'ordinateurs portables dont les crans sont suprieurs 30,5 cm

(12 pouces) : pour viter tout risque de dpassement des limites d'exposition aux frquences radio dictes par la FCC, les antennes ne doivent pas se trouver moins de 20 cm (8 pouces) de l'utilisateur, y compris lorsque l'cran de l'ordinateur est ferm. Pour identifier l'emplacement des antennes sans fil, reportez-vous aux manuels de l'utilisateur qui accompagnent votre ordinateur. Avis pour le Brsil Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Este equipamento atende aos limites de Taxa de Absoro Especfica referente exposio a campos eltricos, magnticos e eletromagnticos de radiofreqncias adotados pela ANATEL. Ao operar o dispositivo a uma distncia muito prxima do seu corpo, utilize um acessrio de armazenamento no metlico para posicionar o dispositivo a uma distncia mnima de 1,5 cm do corpo. Avis pour le Canada Cet appareil numrique de Classe B respecte toutes les exigences des rglementations canadiennes sur les quipements pouvant causer des interfrences, CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B). Si cet appareil est quip de fonctions WLAN ou Bluetooth, il est conforme aux normes RSS exemptes de licence dictes par Industrie Canada. Son fonctionnement est soumis deux conditions : (1) cet appareil ne doit pas gnrer d'interfrence et (2) cet appareil doit supporter toutes les interfrences reues, y compris les interfrences qui pourraient entraner un dysfonctionnement de l'appareil. Avis pour le Brsil 3 AVERTISSEMENT ! Exposition aux radiations de frquence radio : la puissance de rayonnement de cet appareil est infrieure aux limites d'exposition aux radiations mises par les frquences radio dictes par Industrie Canada. Toutefois, l'appareil doit tre utilis de sorte que les possibilits de contact humain soient rduites au maximum pendant son fonctionnement normal. Pendant le fonctionnement normal de tablettes et d'ordinateurs portables dont les crans sont infrieurs ou gaux 30,5 cm (12 pouces) : pour viter de dpasser les limites d'exposition aux frquences radio dictes par Industrie Canada, il est prfrable de ne pas s'approcher plus de 2,5 cm (1 pouce) de l'antenne. Pour identifier l'emplacement des antennes sans fil, reportez-vous aux manuels de l'utilisateur qui accompagnent votre ordinateur. Pendant le fonctionnement normal d'ordinateurs portables dont les crans sont suprieurs 30,5 cm

(12 pouces) : pour viter tout risque de dpassement des limites d'exposition aux frquences radio dictes par Industrie Canada, les antennes ne doivent pas se trouver moins de 20 cm (8 pouces) de l'utilisateur, y compris lorsque l'cran de l'ordinateur est ferm. Pour identifier l'emplacement des antennes sans fil, reportez-vous aux manuels de l'utilisateur qui accompagnent votre ordinateur. Lorsque vous utilisez un rseau local sans fil IEEE 802.11a, n ou ac, abstenez-vous d'utiliser ce ATTENTION :

matriel l'extrieur. En effet, il fonctionne dans la plage de frquences allant de 5,15 5,25 GHz. Industrie Canada exige que ce produit soit utilis l'intrieur d'un btiment pour la plage de frquence allant de 5,15 5,25 GHz afin de rduire le risque d'interfrences prjudiciables pour les systmes de satellites mobiles utilisant le mme canal. Les plages de 5,25 5,35 GHz et de 5,65 5,85 GHz sont alloues prioritairement aux radars haute puissance. Ces stations radar peuvent provoquer des interfrences avec cet appareil ou l'endommager. Les antennes de ce priphrique ne sont pas remplaables. Toute tentative d'accs par l'utilisateur endommagera l'ordinateur. Avis pour l'Union europenne Dclaration de conformit Les produits portant le marquage CE ont t conus de faon pouvoir fonctionner au moins dans un pays membre de lUE et sont conformes une ou plusieurs des directives de lUE suivantes, le cas chant :

RED 2014/53/EU ; Directive relative la basse tension 2014/35/EU ; Directive EMC 2014/30/EU ; Directive Ecodesign 2009/125/CE ; Directive RoHS 2011/65/CE. La conformit ces directives est value l'aide des normes harmonises europennes applicables. L'intgralit de la dclaration de conformit est disponible sur le site Web suivant : http://www.hp.eu/

certificates (recherchez le nom de modle du produit ou son numro de modle rglementaire (RMN), qui est indiqu sur l'tiquette de conformit). Pour toute question portant sur les rglementations, envoyez un courrier : HP Deutschland GmbH, HQ-TRE, 71025, Boeblingen, Allemagne. Envoyez un courrier lectronique techregshelp@hp.com 4 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables et tablettes Produits quips de fonctionnalit radio Ce produit intgre un appareil de transmission et de rception radiolectrique. Lors d'une utilisation standard d'un ordinateur portable, l'observation d'une distance de sparation de 20 cm permet aux niveaux d'exposition des frquences radio de respecter la conformit des normes de l'UE. Les produits conus pour une utilisation en de de cette distance, tels que les tablettes, respectent la conformit aux normes de l'UE applicables dans les positions de fonctionnement standard. Les produits peuvent tre utiliss sans garder une distance de sparation, sauf indication contraire dans les instructions spcifiques au produit. Restrictions pour les produits quips de fonctionnalit radio (certains produits uniquement) ATTENTION : le LAN sans fil IEEE 802,11x avec une bande de frquence de 5,15 5,35 GHz est limit une utilisation intrieure uniquement dans l'ensemble des pays lists dans la matrice. Lutilisation de cette application WLAN en extrieur peut engendrer des problmes dinterfrences avec les services radio existants. ATTENTION : les installations fixes en extrieur pour l'application WiGig (bande de frquences de 57 66 GHz) sont exclues pour l'ensemble des pays lists dans la matrice. Bandes de frquences radio et niveaux de puissance maximale (certains produits uniquement) Puissance maximale de transmission PIRE (mW) Technologie Radio Bluetooth ; 2,4 GHz NFC ; 13,56 MHz RFID ; 125 kHz/13,56 MHz WLAN Wi-Fi 802.11 x ; 2,4 GHz WLAN Wi-Fi 802.11 x ; 5 GHz WWAN 4G LTE ; 700/800/900/1800/2100/2600 MHz WWAN 3G UTMS ; 900/2100 MHz WWAN 2G GSM GPRS EDGE ; 900 MHz WWAN 2G GSM GPRS EDGE ; 1800 MHz WiGig 802.11ad ; 60 GHz Moins de 1 100 10 100 200 200 250 2000 1000 316 Qi de chargement sans fil ; De 110 kHz 205 kHz Moins de 1 REMARQUE : Utiliser uniquement les pilotes logiciels compatibles HP et corriger les paramtres rgionaux pour assurer la conformit. Dclaration relative au rseau tlphonique europen (modem/fax) Le produit ci-joint est conforme aux spcifications de la directive applicable et porte en consquence la marque CE. Cependant, des diffrences existant entre les rseaux tlphoniques publics commuts (RTPC) nationaux prsents dans les diffrents pays/rgions, cette homologation en elle-mme ne garantit pas la Avis pour l'Union europenne 5 russite de toutes les oprations sur tous les points de terminaison du RTPC. En cas de problme, prenez contact avec le fournisseur auprs duquel vous vous tes procur votre quipement. Avis sur l'ergonomie Allemagne (texte en franais) Lorsqu'un ordinateur portable est utilis sur une station de travail professionnelle dans le cadre d'un travail sur cran de visualisation o la directive 90/270/CEE relative aux crans de visualisation est applicable, un clavier externe adapt est recommand. Selon l'application et le travail ralis, un moniteur externe adapt peut galement tre ncessaire pour obtenir des conditions de travail comparables celles d'une station de travail. Rf : EK1-ITB 2000 (certification GS volontaire) Les ordinateurs portables portant la marque d'homologation GS sont conformes aux exigences en matire d'ergonomie. Sans clavier externe, ils sont uniquement adapts aux tches ponctuelles sur cran de visualisation. Une utilisation mobile dans de mauvaises conditions de luminosit (par exemple, lumire directe du soleil) peut occasionner des reflets et donc rduire la lisibilit. Allemagne (texte en allemand) Wird ein mobiler Computer fr Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben verwendet, wo die Richtlinie 90/270/EEG

(Bildschirmarbeitsrichtlinie) anzuwenden ist, wird eine geeignete externe Tastatur notwendig. Abhngig von der Anwendung und der Aufgabe kann ein geeigneter externer Monitor erforderlich sein, um vergleichbare Arbeitsbedingungen zu einem stationren Arbeitsplatz zu erreichen. Rf : EK1-ITB 2000 (freiwillige GS Zertifizierung) Mobile Computer, welche das "GS" Zeichen tragen, entsprechen den ergonomischen Anforderungen und sind nur fr kurzzeitige Benutzung von Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben geeignet. Bei mobiler Nutzung mit ungnstigen Lichtverhltnissen (z.B. direkte Sonneneinstrahlung) kann es zu Reflexionen und damit zu Einschrnkungen der Lesbarkeit der dargestellten Zeichen kommen. Avis pour l'Australie et la Nouvelle-Zlande Cet quipement intgre un appareil de transmission et rception radiolectrique. Lors d'une utilisation standard, l'observation d'une distance de sparation de 20 cm permet aux niveaux d'exposition des frquences radio de respecter la conformit des normes australiennes et no-zlandaises. Avis WWAN pour la Chine 6 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables et tablettes Avis pour le Japon V 2 VCCI32 1 5GHz Marques de certification des priphriques WLAN, WWAN et Bluetooth This product contains certified radio equipment. Some products may use electronic regulatory labels (e-labels). To view the certification mark and numbers on an e-label, please refer to the previous Accessing regulatory labels section.

(e ) e Avis pour le Mexique Declaracin para Mxico La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. El nmero de modelo reglamentario de este producto est en la etiqueta normativa. Si votre produit est fourni avec des accessoires sans fil, tels qu'un clavier ou une souris, et si vous devez identifier le modle de l'accessoire, reportez-vous l'tiquette appose sur cet accessoire. Le numro de modle rglementaire de ce produit se trouve sur l'tiquette rglementaire. Avis pour le Japon 7 Avis sur les appareils sans fil pour Singapour Mettez hors tension tout appareil rseau large bande sans fil (WWAN) lorsque vous tes bord d'un avion. L'utilisation de tels appareils bord d'un avion est illgale, peut tre dangereuse pour le fonctionnement de l'avion et peut perturber le rseau cellulaire. Le non-respect de cette instruction peut entraner la suspension ou le refus de services cellulaires au contrevenant, ou des actions juridiques, ou les deux. Les utilisateurs doivent limiter l'emploi d'quipement radio dans des dpts de carburant, usines chimiques et l o des explosions sont en cours. Comme pour les autres quipements mobiles de transmission par frquences radiolectriques, il est recommand aux utilisateurs, pour le bon fonctionnement de leur quipement et pour la scurit du personnel, de ne pas trop approcher les antennes du corps humain au cours du fonctionnement de l'quipement. Ce priphrique a t conu pour tre conforme aux exigences applicables pour l'exposition aux ondes radio, en fonction de normes scientifiques qui comprennent des plages destines assurer la scurit de tout le monde, quel que soit l'ge et l'tat de sant. Ces rgles d'exposition aux ondes radio utilisent une unit de mesure appele taux d'absorption spcifique (SAR - Specific Absorption Rate). Les tests relatifs aux taux d'absorption sont mens l'aide de mthodes standardises, le tlphone transmettant son niveau certifi le plus lev dans toutes les bandes de frquences utilises. Les informations de donnes SAR se basent sur les normes EN50360 et EN50361 de CENELEC, qui utilisent la limite de 2 watts par kilogramme, sur une moyenne de 10 grammes de tissu. Avis pour la Core du Sud Avis sur les appareils sans fil WWAN pour la Thalande

(Cet quipement de tlcommunication se conforme aux exigences NBTC.) Avis de la NCC pour Tawan Priphriques WLAN 802.11a 8 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables et tablettes Priphriques sans fil LAN 802.11/Priphriques Bluetooth/Priphriques courte porte Avis sur les utilisations en vol L'utilisation d'appareils lectroniques bord des avions de ligne est laisse l'apprciation de la compagnie arienne. Avis sur les batteries remplaables par l'utilisateur Ne jetez pas les batteries ayant atteint leur dure de vie utile avec les ordures mnagres. Appliquez les lois et rglementations locales en matire de mise au rebut des batteries d'ordinateur. HP encourage ses clients recycler le matriel lectronique usag, les cartouches dimpression dorigine HP et les piles rechargeables. Pour plus d'informations sur les programmes de recyclage, consultez le site Web HP l'adresse http://www.hp.com/recycle. Pour des informations sur le retrait d'une batterie remplaable par l'utilisateur, reportez-vous au manuel de l'utilisateur livr avec le produit. Avis sur les batteries scelles en usine La ou les batteries de ce produit ne peuvent pas tre facilement remplaces par les utilisateurs. Le retrait ou le remplacement de la batterie pourrait affecter votre droit la garantie. Si une batterie ne tient plus la charge, contactez le support. Ne jetez pas les batteries ayant atteint leur dure de vie utile avec les ordures mnagres. Appliquez les lois et rglementations locales en matire de mise au rebut des batteries. Avis sur les utilisations en vol 9 Conformit du laser AVERTISSEMENT !

indiques dans ce document ou dans le manuel d'installation d'appareils rayon laser, peut exposer l'utilisateur des radiations dangereuses. Pour rduire le risque d'exposition un rayonnement dangereux :

L'utilisation de mthodes de contrle ou de rglage ou de procdures, autres que celles N'essayez pas d'ouvrir le botier du module. Il ne contient pas de composant rparable par l'utilisateur. N'effectuez pas de commandes, de rglages ou d'oprations sur l'appareil laser, en dehors de ce qui est indiqu dans le manuel d'installation du produit laser. Seuls les mainteneurs agrs HP sont autoriss rparer l'unit. Ce produit peut tre fourni avec un priphrique de stockage optique (par exemple, un lecteur de CD ou DVD) et/ou un metteur-rcepteur fibre optique. Chacun de ces appareils qui contient un laser est class comme produit laser de classe 1 conformment la norme CEI/EN 60825-1 et rpond aux critres de scurit de cette norme. Chaque produit laser est conforme aux paragraphes 21 CFR 1040.10 et 1040.11 des rglementations FDA des tats-Unis ou est conforme ces rglementations l'exception des dviations relatives l'avis sur le laser No. 50, en date du 24 juin 2007. Avis sur les modems AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour rduire le risque d'incendie, de choc lectrique et de blessure lors de l'utilisation de ce priphrique, suivez systmatiquement les consignes de scurit de base, notamment :

N'utilisez pas l'appareil proximit d'eau, par exemple prs d'une baignoire, d'un lavabo, d'un vier ou d'une piscine, ou encore dans une cave humide. vitez d'utiliser l'appareil pendant un orage. Il existe un risque d'lectrocution d la foudre. N'utilisez jamais cet appareil pour signaler une fuite de gaz si vous vous trouvez proximit de la fuite. Dbranchez systmatiquement le cble du modem avant d'ouvrir l'enceinte de l'appareil ou de toucher un cble modem non isol, une prise jack ou un composant interne. Si le produit n'est pas fourni avec un cble tlphonique, utilisez exclusivement un cble de tlcommunication 26 AWG ou suprieur. Ne branchez pas un cble de modem ou de tlphone sur la prise rseau (RJ-45). CONSERVEZ CES INSTRUCTIONS. 10 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables et tablettes Homologations du priphrique de tlcommunication Le priphrique de tlcommunication de cet ordinateur est homologu pour une connexion au rseau tlphonique des pays et rgions dont les marques d'homologation apparaissent sur l'tiquette de produit situe sur la partie infrieure de l'ordinateur ou sur le modem. Reportez-vous au manuel de l'utilisateur livr avec le produit pour vous assurer que celui-ci est configur pour le pays ou rgion dans lequel ou laquelle il se trouve. La slection d'un pays ou d'une rgion autre que celui ou celle o se trouve le produit peut entraner une configuration du modem en violation des lois sur les tlcommunications de ce pays ou de cette rgion. De plus, il est possible que le modem ne fonctionne pas correctement si vous n'avez pas slectionn correctement le pays/la rgion. Si, lorsque vous slectionnez un pays ou une rgion, un message indique que votre pays ou rgion n'est pas pris en charge, cela signifie que le modem n'a pas t homologu dans ce pays ou cette rgion et qu'il ne doit donc pas tre utilis. Avis sur les modems 11 Avis sur les modems pour les tats-Unis Ce matriel est conforme l'article 68 des rglementations de la FCC et aux conditions adoptes par l'ACTA. Une tiquette est appose sur la partie infrieure de l'ordinateur ou sur le modem. Elle inclut, entre autres informations, un identificateur de produit au format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Fournissez ces informations la compagnie tlphonique si elle vous y invite. Certification applicable de la prise USOC = RJ11C. La fiche et la prise utilises pour connecter ce matriel au cblage des locaux et au rseau tlphonique doivent tre conformes l'article 68 des rglementations de la FCC et aux conditions adoptes par l'ACTA. Un cordon tlphonique et une fiche modulaire conformes sont fournis avec ce produit. Ils sont conus pour tre connects une prise modulable galement conforme. Reportez-vous aux instructions d'installation pour plus d'informations. Le REN est utilis pour dterminer le nombre de priphriques qui peuvent tre connects une ligne tlphonique. Si la ligne tlphonique regroupe un nombre trop important de REN, les priphriques peuvent ne pas sonner lors d'un appel entrant. Dans la plupart des emplacements, la somme des REN ne doit pas dpasser cinq (5). Pour connatre avec certitude le nombre de priphriques qui peuvent tre connects une ligne, et donc le nombre total de REN, contactez votre compagnie tlphonique. Pour les produits homologus aprs le 23 juillet 2001, le REN fait partie de l'identificateur de produit dont le format est US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Les chiffres reprsents par le signe ## constituent le REN sans virgule (par exemple, 03 reprsente un REN de 0,3). Pour les produits antrieurs, le REN est indiqu sparment sur l'tiquette. Si ce matriel HP dgrade le rseau tlphonique, la compagnie tlphonique vous avertira l'avance qu'une interruption du service peut tre requise. S'il n'est pas possible de vous informer de cette interruption l'avance, la compagnie vous avertira au plus vite. En outre, vous serez inform de votre droit dposer une rclamation auprs de la FCC si vous pensez que cela n'est ncessaire. La compagnie tlphonique peut apporter des modifications ses installations, quipements, oprations ou procdures pouvant affecter le bon fonctionnement du matriel. Dans ce cas, il vous en informera l'avance afin que vous puissiez prendre les mesures ncessaires pour assurer un service tlphonique ininterrompu. Si vous rencontrez des problmes avec cet quipement, contactez le support technique. S'il dtriore le rseau tlphonique, la compagnie tlphonique peut vous demander de le dconnecter jusqu' ce que le problme soit rsolu. Les seules rparations que vous pouvez effectuer sont celles qui sont prsentes dans la section Rsolution des problmes du manuel de l'utilisateur, si ce dernier est fourni. La connexion des lignes partages est soumise des taxes dpendant de chaque tat. Pour plus d'informations, contactez la commission des services publics ou la commission des entreprises. Si votre domicile est quip d'un dispositif d'alarme spcial connect la ligne tlphonique, vrifiez que l'installation de ce matriel HP ne le dsactive pas. Pour toute question concernant les quipements susceptibles de dsactiver votre alarme, consultez votre compagnie tlphonique ou un installateur qualifi. Le Telephone Consumer Protection Act de 1991 rend illgal le fait d'utiliser un ordinateur ou tout autre dispositif lectronique, y compris un tlcopieur, pour envoyer des messages ne contenant pas clairement, dans une marge situe dans la partie suprieure ou infrieure de chaque page transmise ou sur la premire page de chaque transmission, la date et l'heure de l'envoi, ainsi que des lments identifiant l'entreprise, l'entit ou la personne l'origine du message, ainsi que le numro de tlphone de la machine expditrice, de l'entreprise, de l'entit ou de la personne. (Le numro de tlphone fourni ne peut pas tre un numro en 900 ou tout autre numro dont le cot dpasse celui d'un appel local ou longue distance.) Pour programmer ces informations dans votre tlcopieur, vous devez suivre la procdure dcrite dans les instructions du logiciel de tlcopie. 12 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables et tablettes Dclarations sur les modems pour les tats-Unis Reportez-vous la dclaration suivante du fournisseur du modem concernant le priphrique de modem install dans votre ordinateur :

Avis sur les modems 13 Avis sur les modems pour le Canada Cet quipement est conforme aux spcifications techniques d'Industrie Canada applicables. Le REN indique le nombre maximal d'appareils pouvant tre connects une interface tlphonique. La terminaison d'une interface peut consister en une combinaison d'appareils quelconque condition que la somme des REN de ces dispositifs ne dpasse pas 5. Le REN de ce terminal de communication est 1. Avis sur les modems pour le Japon Si l'ordinateur ne possde pas la marque de certification des priphriques japonais sur sa partie infrieure, reportez-vous la marque de certification approprie ci-dessous. La marque de certification des priphriques japonais pour le modem tlcopie/donnes V.92 56K est illustre ci-dessous :

14 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables et tablettes Dclarations sur les modems pour la Nouvelle-Zlande L'octroi d'un Telepermit pour n'importe quel terminal de tlcommunication indique uniquement que Telecom certifie que l'quipement est bien conforme aux exigences minimales de connexion son rseau. Il ne constitue aucunement une prise de responsabilit quant au produit par Telecom, et n'apporte aucune sorte de garantie. Plus particulirement, il n'apporte aucune garantie que l'quipement fonctionnera correctement et en tous points avec un autre quipement Telepermit d'une marque ou d'un modle diffrent, et ne signifie pas non plus qu'un produit est compatible avec l'ensemble des services du rseau Telecom. Quelles que soient les conditions d'utilisation, ce matriel ne peut fonctionner correctement aux vitesses suprieures celles pour lesquelles il a t conu. Telecom dcline toute responsabilit si des difficults devaient apparatre dans de telles circonstances. Si cet quipement est dot de la composition impulsions, Telecom ne garantit pas la prise en charge de celle-ci par la ligne. L'utilisation de la composition impulsions, sur une ligne partage par plusieurs dispositifs, peut provoquer un dclenchement de la sonnerie ou des parasites et galement une rponse errone. Si ce type de problme se produit, l'utilisateur ne doit pas contacter les services techniques de Telecom Nouvelle-Zlande. Certains paramtres ncessaires pour une conformit avec les exigences Telepermit de Telecom dpendent du matriel (PC) associ cet appareil. Le matriel associ doit tre configur de manire fonctionner dans les limites prescrites pour tre conforme aux spcifications Telecom :

a. b. c. d. Chaque appel manuel ne dpassera pas 10 tentatives d'appel au mme numro dans un intervalle de 30 minutes. Le matriel doit rester l'tat raccroch pendant une priode d'au moins 30 secondes entre la fin d'une tentative d'appel et le dbut de la tentative suivante. Lorsque des appels automatiques sont passs divers numros, le matriel doit tre configur pour passer l'tat raccroch pendant une priode d'au moins 5 secondes entre la fin d'une tentative d'appel et le dbut de la tentative suivante. Le matriel doit tre configur de telle manire que les appels soient traits dans un dlai de 3 30 secondes partir de la rception de la sonnerie (il doit donc tre configur entre 2 et 10 secondes). Prise en charge vocale Toutes les personnes qui utilisent cet appareil pour enregistrer des conversations tlphoniques doivent se soumettre la lgislation de la Nouvelle-Zlande. Celle-ci exige qu'au moins une des deux parties participant la conversation soit au courant de l'enregistrement. En outre, les principes relatifs la nature des informations personnelles recueillies, aux objectifs de leur collecte, leur utilisation et la divulgation de ces informations des tiers, principes rpertoris dans la loi sur la protection de la vie prive de 1993, doivent tre respects. Ce matriel ne doit pas tre configur de manire passer des appels automatiques au numro d'urgence

(111) mis en place par Telecom. Avis sur les modems 15 Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation Si votre ordinateur ne vous a pas t livr avec un cordon d'alimentation ou un accessoire d'alimentation secteur compatible avec votre ordinateur, vous devrez acheter un cordon d'alimentation homologu pour votre pays ou votre rgion. Le cordon d'alimentation doit tre test et garanti pour le produit, pour la tension et le type d'intensit figurant sur l'tiquette des valeurs nominales lectriques du produit. Les valeurs nominales de tension et d'intensit du cordon doivent tre suprieures celles indiques sur l'ordinateur. En outre, le diamtre du cordon doit tre au minimum de 0,75 mm/18 AWG et sa longueur doit tre comprise entre 1,0 m (3,2 pieds) et 2 m (6,56 pieds). Si vous avez des questions sur le type de cordon d'alimentation utiliser, contactez votre fournisseur de service agr. Branchez le cordon d'alimentation de sorte qu'il ne puisse pas tre pitin ou coinc par des objets. Accordez une attention particulire la fiche, la prise secteur et l'endroit o le cordon sort du botier du portable. Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation pour le Japon Prise CC de la source d'alimentation externe HP Avis de Macrovision Corporation Ce produit intgre une technologie de protection des droits d'auteur qui est protge par des revendications de procd de certains brevets amricains et d'autres droits sur la proprit intellectuelle de Macrovision Corporation et d'autres bnficiaires de droits. L'utilisation de cette technologie de protection des droits d'auteur doit tre autorise par Macrovision Corporation et a pour but de permettre un visionnage domestique et d'autres utilisations limites uniquement, sauf autorisation de Macrovision Corporation. L'ingnierie inverse et le dsassemblage sont interdits. 16 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables et tablettes 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail personnelles, tout-en-

un et les terminaux de point de vente Accs aux tiquettes de conformit Les tiquettes de conformit, qui fournissent des informations sur les rglementations de votre pays ou rgion (par exemple, l'ID FCC), peuvent tre situes physiquement sous l'ordinateur, l'intrieur du compartiment de la batterie, sous le cache de service amovible, l'arrire de l'cran ou sur le module du modem ou de l'appareil sans fil. Certains produits peuvent galement fournir des tiquettes de rglementation lectroniques (e-tiquettes) accessibles via le systme BIOS. REMARQUE :

Les tiquettes lectroniques ne sont pas disponibles sur tous les produits. REMARQUE :

possdent peut-tre pas d'ID FCC. Les appareils qui ne sont pas destins la vente ou une utilisation aux tats-Unis ne Pour afficher les tiquettes de conformit lectroniques :

1. Mettez l'ordinateur sous tension ou redmarrez-le. Appuyez sur chap ou F10 pour accder Computer Setup. l'aide d'un priphrique de pointage ou des touches de direction, slectionnez Advanced (Avanc), Electronic Labels (tiquettes de conformit), puis appuyez sur la touche entre. Pour afficher une tiquette lectronique, utilisez un priphrique de pointage ou les touches de direction pour slectionner un des lments de la liste, puis appuyez sur OK. REMARQUE :

d'ordinateur et des priphriques installs. La liste des lments d'tiquette lectronique disponibles varie en fonction du modle 5. Pour quitter les menus de Computer Setup sans effectuer de modification :

Slectionnez l'icne Exit (Quitter) dans le coin infrieur droit de l'cran, puis suivez les instructions l'cran. 2. 3. 4. ou Utilisez les touches de direction pour slectionner Main (Principal), Ignore Changes and Exit (Ignorer les modifications et quitter), puis appuyez sur la touche entre. Accs aux tiquettes de conformit 17 Avis sur les modems AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour rduire le risque d'incendie, d'lectrocution et de blessures pendant l'utilisation de cet appareil, suivez systmatiquement les rgles de scurit de base suivantes :

N'utilisez pas l'appareil proximit d'eau, par exemple prs d'une baignoire, d'un lavabo, d'un vier ou d'une piscine, ou encore dans une cave humide. vitez d'utiliser l'appareil pendant un orage. Il existe un risque d'lectrocution d la foudre. N'utilisez jamais cet appareil pour signaler une fuite de gaz si vous vous trouvez proximit de la fuite. Dbranchez systmatiquement le cble du modem avant d'ouvrir l'enceinte de l'appareil ou de toucher un cble modem non isol, une prise jack ou un composant interne. Si le produit n'est pas fourni avec un cble tlphonique, utilisez exclusivement un cble de tlcommunication 26 AWG ou suprieur. Ne branchez pas un cble de modem ou de tlphone sur la prise rseau RJ-45 (rseau Ethernet). CONSERVEZ CES INSTRUCTIONS. Homologations des priphriques de tlcommunications Le priphrique de tlcommunications de votre ordinateur est homologu pour une connexion au rseau tlphonique des pays et rgions dont le certificat d'homologation apparat sur l'tiquette du produit appose sur la base de l'ordinateur ou sur le modem. Pour vrifier que ce matriel est configur pour le pays ou la rgion o il se trouve, reportez-vous au manuel de l'utilisateur qui l'accompagne. Si vous slectionnez un pays ou une rgion autre que celui ou celle dans lequel se trouve le modem, il risque de violer les lois de tlcommunications du pays ou de la rgion. De plus, votre modem risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement si vous ne slectionnez pas le bon pays ou la bonne rgion. Si, lorsque vous slectionnez un pays ou une rgion, un message indique que ce pays ou cette rgion n'est pas support, c'est que le modem n'a pas t agr dans ce pays ou cette rgion et ne doit donc pas tre utilis. 18 Chapitre 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail personnelles, tout-en-un et les terminaux de point de vente Avis sur les modems pour les tats-Unis Cet quipement est conforme l'article 68 des rglementations FCC et aux conditions adoptes par l'ACTA. Une tiquette appose sur la face infrieure de l'ordinateur ou sur le modem comporte, entre autres informations, un identificateur de produit au format US: AAAEQ##TXXXX. Fournissez ces informations la compagnie tlphonique si elle vous le demande. Homologation applicable prise USOC = RJ11C. Les prises utilises pour connecter cet quipement aux cbles lectriques des lieux et au rseau tlphonique doivent tre conformes l'article 68 des rglementations FCC et aux conditions approuves par l'ACTA. Un cordon tlphonique et une prise modulaire conformes FCC sont livrs avec cet quipement. Il est conu pour tre branch sur une prise modulable galement conforme. Pour des dtails, reportez-vous aux instructions d'installation. Le REN permet de dterminer le nombre de priphriques pouvant tre raccords sur une ligne tlphonique. Si un nombre excessif d'appareils est prsent sur la ligne tlphonique, ceux-ci risquent de ne pas rpondre un appel entrant. Dans la plupart des cas (mais pas toujours), la somme des REN des priphriques raccords sur une ligne ne doit pas dpasser cinq (5). Pour tre sr du nombre d'appareils pouvant tre connects une mme ligne (dtermin par le numro REN), contactez la compagnie de tlphone locale. Pour les produits agrs aprs le 23 juillet 2001, le REN fait partie de l'identificateur du produit qui est au format amricain :

AAAEQ##TXXXX. Les chiffres reprsents par le signe ## constituent le REN sans virgule (par exemple, 03 reprsente un REN de 0,3). Pour les produits antrieurs cette date, le REN est affich sparment sur l'tiquette. Si cet quipement HP dtriore le rseau tlphonique, la compagnie de tlphone vous avisera par avance qu'une interruption de service peut tre requise. Si la compagnie de tlphone ne peut pas vous aviser par avance, vous serez inform ds que possible. Vous serez galement inform de vos droits de rclamation auprs de la FCC si vous le jugez ncessaire. La compagnie de tlphone peut apporter des modifications ses quipements, oprations ou procdures pouvant affecter le bon fonctionnement de votre matriel. Si cela se produit, la compagnie de tlphone vous informera par avance pour vous permettre d'apporter les modifications requises afin d'assurer un service tlphonique sans interruption. Si vous rencontrez des problmes avec cet quipement, contactez le support technique. S'il dtriore le rseau tlphonique, la compagnie tlphonique peut vous demander de le dconnecter jusqu' ce que le problme soit rsolu. Les seules rparations que vous pouvez effectuer sont celles qui sont prsentes dans la section Rsolution des problmes du manuel de l'utilisateur, si ce dernier est fourni. Le raccord des lignes partages est soumis aux tarifs en vigueur dans votre pays. Pour plus d'informations, contactez les commissions d'utilit publique, la commission de service public ou les commissions d'entreprise. Si votre domicile est quip d'un dispositif d'alarme spcial connect la ligne tlphonique, vrifiez que l'installation de cet quipement HP ne dsactive pas ce dispositif. Si vous avez des questions sur ce qui peut dsactiver le dispositif d'alarme, consultez votre compagnie de tlphone ou un installateur qualifi. La loi de 1991 sur la protection des usagers du tlphone interdit l'utilisation d'un ordinateur ou de tout autre dispositif lectronique, y compris les tlcopieurs, pour l'envoi d'un message, moins que ne soit inscrit clairement sur ce message (dans la marge, le haut ou le bas de chaque page ou sur la premire page) la date et l'heure de l'envoi ainsi que l'identit de la socit expditrice, de l'entit ou du particulier, ainsi que le numro de tlphone de la machine expditrice, de l'entit ou du particulier. Le numro de tlphone ne doit pas tre un numro commenant par 900 ni un numro dont le cot dpasse celui d'un appel local ou longue distance. Pour programmer ces informations dans votre tlcopieur, reportez-vous aux instructions relatives au logiciel d'envoi de tlcopies. Avis sur les modems 19 Avis sur les modems pour le Canada Cet quipement est conforme aux normes techniques Industrie Canada applicables. Le REN donne une indication sur le nombre maximum de priphriques qu'il est possible de relier une interface tlphonique. La terminaison d'une interface peut consister en une combinaison de priphriques quelconque condition que la somme des REN de ces dispositifs ne dpasse pas 5. Le REN de ce terminal de communication est 1. Avis sur les modems pour le Japon Si la marque de certification japonaise ne figure pas sur la base de l'ordinateur, reportez-vous la certification ci-dessous. Au Japon, la marque de certification pour le modem LSI Corporation PCI-SV92EX Soft est la suivante :

Dclarations sur les modems pour la Nouvelle-Zlande L'octroi d'un Telepermit pour n'importe quel terminal de tlcommunication indique uniquement que Telecom certifie que l'quipement est bien conforme aux exigences minimales de connexion son rseau. Il ne constitue aucunement une prise de responsabilit quant au produit par Telecom et n'apporte aucune sorte de garantie. Plus particulirement, il n'apporte aucune garantie que l'quipement fonctionnera correctement et en tous points avec un autre quipement Telepermit d'une marque ou d'un modle diffrent, et n'implique pas qu'un produit est compatible avec l'ensemble des services du rseau Telecom. Quelles que soient les conditions d'utilisation, ce matriel ne peut fonctionner correctement aux vitesses suprieures celles pour lesquelles il a t conu. Telecom dcline toute responsabilit si des difficults devaient apparatre dans de telles circonstances. Si cet quipement est dot de la composition impulsions, Telecom ne garantit pas la prise en charge permanente de la composition impulsions. L'utilisation de la numrotation par impulsions, sur une ligne partage par plusieurs dispositifs, peut provoquer un dclenchement de la sonnerie ou des parasites et galement une rponse errone. Si de tels problmes apparaissent, l'utilisateur ne doit pas contacter le service de rparation de Telecom. Certains paramtres ncessaires pour une conformit avec les exigences Telepermit de Telecom dpendent du matriel (PC) associ cet appareil. L'quipement associ doit tre configur de manire fonctionner dans les limites prescrites pour tre conforme aux spcifications Telecom :

a. b. c. d. Seules 10 tentatives d'appel maximum peuvent tre effectues au mme numro dans un intervalle de 30 minutes, pour n'importe quelle initialisation manuelle d'appel. Un intervalle minimum de 30 secondes doit s'couler entre la fin d'une tentative d'appel et le dbut de la suivante. Lorsque des appels automatiques sont effectus divers numros, un intervalle minimum de 5 secondes doit s'couler entre la fin d'une tentative d'appel et le dbut de la suivante. L'quipement doit tre configur de telle manire que les appels soient traits dans un dlai de 3 30 secondes partir de la rception de la sonnerie (il doit donc tre configur entre 2 et 10 secondes). 20 Chapitre 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail personnelles, tout-en-un et les terminaux de point de vente Prise en charge vocale Toutes les personnes qui utilisent cet appareil pour enregistrer des conversations tlphoniques doivent se soumettre la lgislation de la Nouvelle-Zlande. Celle-ci exige qu'au moins une des deux parties participant la conversation doit tre au courant de l'enregistrement. En outre, les principes relatifs la nature des informations personnelles recueillies, aux objectifs de leur collecte, leur utilisation et la divulgation de ces informations des tiers, principes rpertoris dans la loi Privacy Act 1993, doivent tre respects. Ce matriel ne doit pas tre configur de manire passer des appels automatiques au numro d'urgence

(111) mis en place par Telecom. Avis de compatibilit lectromagntique Ce manuel prsente les avis de rglementation relatifs aux fonctions avec et sans fil des diffrents pays et rgions, ainsi que des informations de conformit de l'ordinateur. Certains de ces avis ne s'appliquent peut-

tre pas votre produit. Un ou plusieurs appareils sans fil intgrs peuvent tre installs. Dans certains environnements, l'utilisation d'appareils sans fil peut tre limite. Ces restrictions peuvent s'appliquer bord des avions, dans les hpitaux, dans les lieux proximit d'explosifs, dans les environnements dangereux, etc. Si vous ne connaissez pas la politique relative l'utilisation de ce produit, demandez l'autorisation de l'utiliser avant de le mettre sous tension. Avis de la FCC Cet quipement a t test et trouv conforme aux limitations relatives aux appareils numriques de classe B, en accord avec l'article 15 des rgles de la FCC. Ces limitations sont conues pour offrir une protection raisonnable contre les interfrences dans une installation rsidentielle. Cet quipement produit, utilise et peut mettre de l'nergie sous forme de radiofrquences. S'il n'est pas utilis conformment aux instructions, il peut produire des interfrences nuisibles aux communications radio. Cependant, il n'existe aucune garantie assurant qu'il n'y aura pas d'interfrence dans une installation particulire. Si l'utilisateur constate des interfrences lors de la rception d'missions de radio ou de tlvision (il suffit pour le vrifier d'allumer et d'teindre successivement l'appareil), il devra prendre l'une ou plusieurs des mesures suivantes pour les liminer savoir :

Rorienter ou repositionner l'antenne de rception. Accrotre la distance entre le matriel et le rcepteur. Brancher le matriel informatique sur une prise d'un circuit autre que celui sur lequel est branch le rcepteur. Demander conseil un revendeur ou un technicien de radio ou de tlvision expriment. Cet appareil est conforme l'article 15 des rglementations FCC. Son fonctionnement est soumis deux conditions :

Cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer des interfrences nuisibles, et Cet appareil doit accepter toute interfrence reue, notamment des interfrences pouvant provoquer un fonctionnement non voulu. 1. 2. Pour toute question concernant ce produit :

crivez :

HP Inc. 1501 Page Mill Road Avis de compatibilit lectromagntique 21 Palo Alto, CA 94304 Appelez HP au 650-857-1501 ou Envoyez un courrier lectronique techregshelp@hp.com Pour identifier ce produit, reportez-vous la rfrence de pice, de gamme ou de modle indique sur le produit. La FCC stipule que l'utilisateur doit tre inform que toute modification opre sur l'appareil, n'ayant pas t expressment approuve par HP Inc., peut entraner l'annulation des droits d'exploitation du produit dont bnficie l'utilisateur. Modifications Cbles Les cbles branchs cet quipement doivent tre blinds et comporter des protections de connecteur mtalliques de type RFI/EMI pour tre conformes aux directives et rglementations de la FCC. Produits quips de priphriques LAN sans fil Ce produit peut tre quip d'un priphrique de rseau local sans fil. Ce priphrique ne doit pas tre situ au mme endroit ou fonctionner en mme temps qu'une autre antenne ou un autre metteur. AVERTISSEMENT ! Exposition des missions de radiofrquence La puissance de sortie mise par ce priphrique est infrieure aux limites de la FCC sur l'exposition des missions de radiofrquence. Nanmoins, le priphrique doit tre utilis de faon ce que les risques de contact physique soient rduits pendant le fonctionnement normal de l'appareil. Pendant le fonctionnement normal : Pour viter tout risque de dpassement des limites d'exposition aux frquences radio dictes par la FCC, les antennes ne doivent pas se trouver moins de 20 cm (8 pouces) de l'utilisateur. Pour identifier l'emplacement des antennes sans fil, reportez-vous la documentation qui accompagne l'ordinateur. Dclaration sur les tlcommunications pour l'Australie L'ordinateur doit tre connect au rseau de tlcommunications par un cble rpondant aux critres de la norme AS/CA S008. AVERTISSEMENT !

pas tre installs dans un autre priphrique. Les modems sans connecteur RJ11 intgral qui sont livrs avec cet ordinateur ne doivent Cet quipement intgre un appareil de transmission et rception radiolectrique. Lors d'une utilisation standard, l'observation d'une distance de sparation de 20 cm permet aux niveaux d'exposition des frquences radio de respecter la conformit des normes australiennes et no-zlandaises. Avis pour le Brsil Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. ATTENTION : A alimentao de energia predefinida para 220/230Vv. Se voc possuir tomada eltrica de 110/115Vv, por favor, altere a chave na parte traseira do seu computador para a tenso correta. 22 Chapitre 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail personnelles, tout-en-un et les terminaux de point de vente Avis pour le Canada Cet appareil numrique de Classe B respecte toutes les exigences des rglementations canadiennes sur les quipements pouvant causer des interfrences, CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B). Si ce priphrique est quip de fonctions WLAN ou Bluetooth, il est conforme aux normes RSS exemptes de licence dictes par Industrie Canada. Son fonctionnement est soumis deux conditions : (1) cet appareil ne doit pas gnrer d'interfrence et (2) cet appareil doit supporter toutes les interfrences reues, y compris les interfrences qui pourraient entraner un dysfonctionnement de l'appareil. AVERTISSEMENT ! Exposition aux radiations de frquence radio La puissance de rayonnement de cet appareil est infrieure aux limites d'exposition aux radiations mises par les frquences radio dictes par Industrie Canada. Toutefois, l'appareil doit tre utilis de sorte que les possibilits de contact humain soient rduites au maximum pendant son fonctionnement normal. Pendant le fonctionnement normal : Pour viter de dpasser les limites d'exposition aux frquences radio dictes par Industrie Canada, il est prfrable de ne pas s'approcher plus de 20 cm (8 pouces) des antennes. Pour identifier l'emplacement des antennes sans fil, reportez-vous la documentation qui accompagne l'ordinateur. Lorsque vous utilisez un rseau local sans fil IEEE 802.11a, n ou ac, abstenez-vous d'utiliser ce ATTENTION :

matriel l'extrieur. En effet, il fonctionne dans la plage de frquences allant de 5,15 5,25 GHz. Industrie Canada exige que ce produit soit utilis l'intrieur d'un btiment pour la plage de frquence allant de 5,15 5,25 GHz afin de rduire le risque d'interfrences prjudiciables pour les systmes de satellites mobiles utilisant le mme canal. Les plages de 5,25 5,35 GHz et de 5,65 5,85 GHz sont alloues prioritairement aux radars haute puissance. Ces stations radar peuvent provoquer des interfrences avec cet appareil ou l'endommager. L'antenne de cet appareil ne se remplace pas. Toute tentative de modification par l'utilisateur peut endommager l'ordinateur. Avis pour l'Union europenne Dclaration de conformit Les produits portant le marquage CE ont t conus de faon pouvoir fonctionner au moins dans un pays membre de lUE et sont conformes une ou plusieurs des directives de lUE suivantes, le cas chant :

RED 2014/53/EU ; Directive relative la basse tension 2014/35/EU ; Directive EMC 2014/30/EU ; Directive Ecodesign 2009/125/CE ; Directive RoHS 2011/65/CE. La conformit ces directives est value l'aide des normes harmonises europennes applicables. L'intgralit de la dclaration de conformit est disponible sur le site Web suivant : http://www.hp.eu/

certificates (recherchez le nom de modle du produit ou son numro de modle rglementaire (RMN), qui est indiqu sur l'tiquette de conformit). Pour toute question portant sur les rglementations, envoyez un courrier : HP Deutschland GmbH, HQ-TRE, 71025, Boeblingen, Allemagne. Envoyez un courrier lectronique techregshelp@hp.com Avis de compatibilit lectromagntique 23 Produits quips de fonctionnalit radio (EMF) Ce produit intgre un appareil de transmission et de rception radiolectrique. Pour l'utilisation normale d'ordinateurs, une distance de 20 cm garantit des niveaux d'exposition aux frquences radio conformes aux exigences de l'UE. Les produits conus pour une utilisation en de de cette distance, tels que les tablettes, respectent la conformit aux normes de l'UE applicables dans les positions de fonctionnement standard. Les produits peuvent tre utiliss sans garder une distance de sparation, sauf indication contraire dans les instructions spcifiques au produit. Restrictions pour les produits quips de fonctionnalit radio (certains produits uniquement) ATTENTION : le LAN sans fil IEEE 802,11x avec une bande de frquence de 5,15 5,35 GHz est limit une utilisation intrieure uniquement dans l'ensemble des pays lists dans la matrice. Lutilisation de cette application WLAN en extrieur peut engendrer des problmes dinterfrences avec les services radio existants. ATTENTION : les installations fixes en extrieur pour l'application WiGig (bande de frquences de 57 66 GHz) sont exclues pour l'ensemble des pays lists dans la matrice. Bandes de frquences radio et niveaux de puissance maximale (certains produits uniquement) Puissance maximale de transmission PIRE (mW) Technologie Radio Bluetooth ; 2,4 GHz NFC ; 13,56 MHz RFID ; 125 kHz/13,56 MHz Wireless HD (USB sans fil) 60 GHz WLAN Wi-Fi 802.11 x ; 2,4 GHz WLAN Wi-Fi 802.11x ; 5 GHz WWAN 4G LTE ; 700/800/900/1800/2100/2600 MHz WWAN 3G UTMS ; 900/2100 MHz WWAN 2G GSM GPRS EDGE ; 900 MHz WWAN 2G GSM GPRS EDGE ; 1800 MHz WiGig 802.11ad ; 60 GHz Moins de 1 Moins de 10000 100 10 100 200 200 250 2000 1000 316 Qi de chargement sans fil ; De 110kHz 205 kHz Moins de 1 REMARQUE : utilisez uniquement les pilotes logiciels compatibles HP et corrigez les paramtres rgionaux pour assurer la conformit. Dclaration relative au rseau tlphonique europen (modem/fax) Le produit ci-joint est conforme aux spcifications de la directive applicable et porte en consquence la marque CE. Cependant, des diffrences existant entre les rseaux tlphoniques publics commuts (RTPC) nationaux prsents dans les diffrents pays/rgions, cette homologation en elle-mme ne garantit pas la 24 Chapitre 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail personnelles, tout-en-un et les terminaux de point de vente russite de toutes les oprations sur tous les points de terminaison du RTPC. En cas de problme, prenez contact avec le fournisseur auprs duquel vous vous tes procur votre quipement. L'quipement a t conu pour fonctionner avec les rseaux DTMF analogiques. Cet quipement peut connatre des difficults d'interconnexion sur les rseaux RTPC prenant uniquement en charge la composition impulsions. Contactez votre oprateur rseau pour bnficier d'une aide supplmentaire. Un systme informatique compos de produits de la marque HP respecte les exigences applicables relatives l'ergonomie si tous les produits inclus concerns portent la marque de conformit GS , par exemple un ordinateur de bureau professionnel, un clavier, une souris et un moniteur. Ein aus HP Produkten bestehendes Computersystem erfllt die anwendbaren ergonomischen Anforderungen, wenn alle verwendeten Komponenten das GS Zeichen tragen, wie z. B. Business Desktop PC, Tastatur, PC-

Maus und Bildschirm. Avis sur l'ergonomie Allemagne Allemagne (texte en allemand) Avis pour le Japon V 2 VCCI32 1 5GHz Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation pour le Japon Avis de compatibilit lectromagntique 25 Marques de certification des priphriques WLAN et Bluetooth If this device contains radio equipment, it is certified radio equipment. Some products may use electronic regulatory labels (e-labels). To view the certification mark and numbers on an e-label, please refer to the previous Accessing regulatory labels section.

(e ) e 26 Chapitre 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail personnelles, tout-en-un et les terminaux de point de vente Avis pour le Mexique Declaracin para Mxico Avis pour la Core du Sud La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. Si su producto se brinda con accesorios inalmbricos como un teclado o un mouse y necesita identificar el modelo del accesorio, consulte la etiqueta incluida en ese accesorio. Avis sur les priphriques sans fil WWAN pour la Thalande

(Cet quipement de tlcommunication se conforme aux exigences NBTC.) Cet quipement de communication radio possde une force de champ lectromagntique conforme la norme de scurit pour lutilisation dquipement de communication radio vis--vis de la sant des personnes annonce par la Commission nationale des tlcommunications. Avis de la NCC pour Tawan Priphriques WLAN 802.11a Avis de compatibilit lectromagntique 27 Priphriques sans fil LAN 802.11/Priphriques Bluetooth/Priphriques courte porte Informations sur les dplacements ariens L'utilisation d'appareils lectroniques bord des avions de ligne est laisse l'apprciation de la compagnie arienne. Avis sur les batteries remplaables par l'utilisateur Ne jetez pas les batteries puises avec les ordures mnagres. Appliquez les lois et rglementations locales en matire de mise au rebut des batteries d'ordinateur. HP encourage ses clients recycler le matriel lectronique usag, les cartouches dimpression dorigine HP et les piles rechargeables. Pour plus d'informations sur les programmes de recyclage, consultez le site Web HP l'adresse http://www.hp.com/recycle. Pour des informations sur le retrait d'une batterie remplaable par l'utilisateur, reportez-vous au manuel de l'utilisateur livr avec le produit. Avis sur les batteries scelles en usine La ou les batteries de ce produit ne peuvent pas tre facilement remplaces par les utilisateurs. Le retrait ou le remplacement de la batterie pourrait affecter votre droit la garantie. Si une batterie ne tient plus la charge, contactez l'assistance. Ne jetez pas les batteries ayant atteint leur dure de vie utile avec les ordures mnagres. Appliquez les lois et rglementations locales en matire de mise au rebut des batteries. 28 Chapitre 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail personnelles, tout-en-un et les terminaux de point de vente Conformit du laser AVERTISSEMENT !

L'utilisation de mthodes de contrle ou de rglage ou de procdures, autres que celles indiques dans le manuel d'installation des appareils rayon laser, peut exposer l'utilisateur des radiations dangereuses. Pour rduire le risque d'exposition un rayonnement dangereux :

N'essayez pas d'ouvrir le botier du module. Il ne contient pas de composant rparable par l'utilisateur. N'effectuez pas de commandes, de rglages ou d'oprations sur l'appareil laser, en dehors de ce qui est indiqu dans le manuel d'installation du produit laser. Seuls les mainteneurs agrs HP sont autoriss rparer l'unit. Ce produit peut tre fourni avec un priphrique de stockage optique (par exemple, un lecteur de CD ou DVD) et/ou un metteur-rcepteur fibre optique. Chacun de ces appareils qui contient un laser est class comme produit laser de classe 1 conformment la norme CEI/EN 60825-1 et rpond aux critres de scurit de cette norme. Chaque produit laser est conforme aux paragraphes 21 CFR 1040.10 et 1040.11 des rglementations FDA des tats-Unis ou est conforme ces rglementations l'exception des dviations relatives l'avis sur le laser No. 50, en date du 24 juin 2007. Conformit du laser 29 3 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs portables et tablettes AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour rduire les risques de blessures graves, lisez le manuel Scurit et ergonomie du poste de travail. Il dcrit l'installation du poste de travail, la posture ainsi que les conditions de scurit et de travail appropries pour les utilisateurs, et fournit des informations importantes sur la scurit lectrique et mcanique. Vous trouverez ce manuel sur le Web l'adresse http://www.hp.com/ergo, ainsi que sur le CD de documentation qui accompagne le produit. Avis d'avertissement relatif la chaleur AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour viter tout risque de blessure associe la chaleur ou de surchauffe de l'ordinateur, ne placez pas ce dernier sur vos genoux et n'obstruez pas ses ouvertures d'aration. Utilisez toujours l'ordinateur sur une surface plane et rigide. La ventilation ne doit pas tre entrave par des lments rigides, tels qu'une imprimante, ni par des lments souples, tels que des coussins, du tissu ou un tapis pais. De mme, l'adaptateur secteur ne doit rester en contact ni avec la peau ni avec un lment souple, tel que des coussins, un vtement ou un tapis lorsque l'ordinateur est en cours de fonctionnement. L ordinateur et ladaptateur secteur sont conformes aux limites de temprature de surface accessible lutilisateur, dfinies par la norme internationale sur la scurit du matriel informatique (CEI/EN 60950-1). Avis sur les risques lis la scurit Si vous observez l'une des situations suivantes (ou avez d'autres inquitudes en matire de scurit), n'utilisez pas l'ordinateur : bruit de crpitement, de sifflement ou de claquement ou forte odeur/fume en provenance de l'ordinateur. La survenue de l'une de ces situations est normale en cas de dfaillance d'un composant lectronique interne de manire neutralise et contrle. Cependant, ces situations peuvent galement signifier un risque de scurit. Ne partez pas du principe qu'il s'agit d'une dfaillance neutralise. Mettez l'ordinateur hors tension, dconnectez-le de sa source d'alimentation, puis contactez le support technique. Avis relatif aux batteries AVERTISSEMENT !

d'un type incorrect. liminez les batteries usages en respectant les instructions. Il existe un risque d'explosion en cas de remplacement de la batterie par une batterie AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour rduire le risque d'incendie ou de brlures, abstenez-vous de dmonter, d'craser, de perforer, de jeter dans l'eau ou dans le feu une batterie, ou encore de court-circuiter ses connecteurs externes. AVERTISSEMENT ! Conservez les batteries neuves et usages hors de porte des enfants. AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour limiter les risques lis la scurit, seule la batterie fournie avec lordinateur, une batterie de rechange fournie par HP ou une batterie compatible achete comme accessoire auprs de HP doit tre utilise avec lordinateur. Le chargement rapide peut ne pas tre disponible pour les batteries autres que HP ou non compatibles. AVERTISSEMENT ! Ne pas ingrer la batterie, sous risque de brlure chimique. 30 Chapitre 3 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs portables et tablettes AVERTISSEMENT ! Ce produit contient une pile bouton. Si la pile bouton est ingre, elle peut causer des brlures internes graves dans les 2 heures qui suivent et risque dentraner la mort. AVERTISSEMENT ! Si le compartiment de la batterie nest pas ferm convenablement, arrtez dutiliser le produit et gardez hors de porte des enfants. AVERTISSEMENT ! Si vous pensez que des batteries ont pu avoir t ingres ou places lintrieur de toute partie du corps, consulter immdiatement un mdecin. AVERTISSEMENT ! Si vous laissez une batterie dans un environnement comportant une temprature extrmement leve, cela peut entraner une explosion ou la fuite du gaz ou liquide inflammable. AVERTISSEMENT ! Une batterie soumise une pression dair trs faible peut entraner une explosion ou la fuite du gaz ou liquide inflammable. Avis sur le niveau du volume du casque et des couteurs AVERTISSEMENT !

Pour viter les dommages causs votre systme auditif, n'coutez pas des volumes levs pendant des priodes prolonges. Le rglage de la commande de volume, ainsi que du balancier compensateur dautres paramtres hors de la position centrale peut augmenter la tension de sortie du casque/des couteurs et par consquent le niveau de pression acoustique. Lutilisation de facteurs influenant la sortie casque/couteurs autres que ceux spcifis par le fabricant (par exemple systme dexploitation, logiciel dgalisation, microprogramme, pilote) peut augmenter la tension de sortie du casque/des couteurs et par consquent le niveau de pression acoustique. Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour rduire les risques de choc lectrique ou de dtrioration du matriel :

Branchez le cordon d'alimentation sur une prise secteur facilement accessible tout moment. Coupez l'alimentation de l'ordinateur en dbranchant le cordon d'alimentation de la prise secteur. Si l'ordinateur portable est fourni avec une fiche tripolaire, branchez le cordon sur une prise lectrique tripolaire relie la terre. Ne dsactivez pas la broche de mise la terre du cordon d'alimentation en utilisant, par exemple, un adaptateur bipolaire. La broche de mise la terre constitue un lment de scurit essentiel. AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour limiter les problmes de scurit potentiels, utilisez avec cet ordinateur uniquement l'adaptateur secteur fourni avec l'ordinateur, un adaptateur secteur de remplacement fourni par HP ou un adaptateur secteur achet comme accessoire auprs de HP. Avis pour le Brsil Este equipamento deve ser conectado obrigatoriamente em tomada de rede de energia eltrica que possua aterramento (trs pinos), conforme a norma nbr abnt 5410,visando a segurana dos usurios contra choques eltricos. Avis sur le niveau du volume du casque et des couteurs 31 Nettoyage du clavier AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour rduire les risques de chocs lectriques ou de dommages aux composants internes, n'utilisez pas l'embout de l'aspirateur pour nettoyer le clavier. L'utilisation d'un aspirateur peut entraner le dpt de poussires mnagres sur le clavier. Nettoyez rgulirement le clavier pour viter que les touches ne deviennent collantes et pour supprimer la poussire, les peluches et les particules susceptibles de se loger sous les touches. Utilisez une bombe dpoussirante air comprim avec embout directionnel permettant d'insuffler de l'air sous le clavier et autour des touches et ainsi d'liminer les particules. Avis sur les dplacements AVERTISSEMENT ! Afin de rduire le risque d'lectrocution, d'incendie ou de dtrioration du matriel, n'essayez pas d'alimenter l'ordinateur avec un kit de conversion de tension pour lectromnager. Avis de scurit pour la Chine Chine : avis sur l'altitude Avis sur l'altitude pour les produits dont l'utilisation n'est pas certifie au-del de 5 000 m d'altitude Icne Description Chine : avis sur une utilisation dans des conditions tropicales Avis pour les produits dont l'utilisation n'est pas certifie dans des conditions tropicales Icne Description Norvge et Sude : avis de mise la terre des cbles pour les produits quips d'un tuner TV ATTENTION : Pour limiter les risques lis la scurit, utilisez un isolant voltaque lors de la connexion un systme de distribution par cble.

(1) 30 10

(2) 2 2 1 32 Chapitre 3 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs portables et tablettes 4 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail personnelles, tout-en-un et les terminaux de point de vente Informations importantes relatives la scurit AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour rduire les risques de blessures graves, lisez le manuel Scurit et ergonomie du poste de travail. Il dcrit l'installation du poste de travail, la posture ainsi que les conditions de scurit et de travail appropries pour les utilisateurs, et fournit des informations importantes sur la scurit lectrique et mcanique. Vous trouverez ce manuel sur le Web l'adresse http://www.hp.com/ergo, ainsi que sur le CD de documentation qui accompagne le produit. Pour rduire les risques de choc lectrique ou de dtrioration du matriel :

Branchez le cordon d'alimentation sur une prise secteur facilement accessible tout moment. Coupez l'alimentation de l'ordinateur en dbranchant le cordon d'alimentation de la prise secteur. Si l'ordinateur portable est fourni avec une fiche tripolaire, branchez le cordon sur une prise lectrique tripolaire relie la terre. Ne dsactivez pas la broche de mise la terre du cordon d'alimentation en utilisant, par exemple, un adaptateur bipolaire. La broche de mise la terre constitue un lment de scurit essentiel. L'ordinateur peut tre trs lourd ; assurez-vous d'adopter une position ergonomique adquate lors de sa manipulation. Installez l'ordinateur proximit d'une prise secteur. Le cordon d'alimentation secteur constitue le principal dispositif de dconnexion secteur de votre ordinateur et doit donc tre facilement accessible. Pour votre scurit, le cordon d'alimentation fourni avec votre ordinateur est quip d'une broche de mise la terre. Utilisez toujours le cordon d'alimentation avec une prise murale correctement relie la terre, afin de rduire les risques d'lectrocution. Pour rduire les risques de choc lectrique en provenance du rseau tlphonique, branchez votre ordinateur sur une prise secteur avant de le connecter une ligne tlphonique. Par ailleurs, dconnectez votre ligne tlphonique avant de dbrancher votre ordinateur de la prise secteur. Dbranchez le cordon du modem du rseau tlphonique avant d'installer ou d'enlever le capot de votre ordinateur. N'utilisez pas l'ordinateur lorsque le capot est enlev. Pour plus de scurit, dbranchez toujours l'ordinateur de sa source d'alimentation, de tout systme de tlcommunications (comme les lignes tlphoniques), des rseaux et des modems avant d'excuter toute opration de maintenance. Si vous ne respectez pas ces consignes, vous risquez de vous blesser ou de causer des dommages matriels. Le modem et l'alimentation de ce produit renferment des niveaux de tension dangereux. Par mesure de scurit, si la charge dalimentation lectrique du systme dpasse les capacits de la configuration spcifique, le systme peut dsactiver temporairement certains ports USB. Informations importantes relatives la scurit 33 ATTENTION : Si votre ordinateur est quip d'un commutateur de slection de tension destin aux systmes fonctionnant sous 115 ou 230 V, ce commutateur a t prdfini sur la tension en vigueur dans le pays/rgion o il a t vendu initialement. Mettre le commutateur sur la mauvaise position peut endommager l'ordinateur et annuler toute garantie implicite. Ce produit n'a pas t valu pour une connexion un systme d'alimentation informatique (un systme de distribution de courant alternatif sans connexion directe la terre, selon la norme CEI/EN 60950-1). Conditions d'installation Consultez les instructions d'installation avant de brancher cet quipement sur l'alimentation. AVERTISSEMENT !

L'quipement doit tre pourvu d'un raccordement la terre protecteur secteur appropri. Cet ordinateur peut contenir des pices sous tension et amovibles. Dbranchez le cordon d'alimentation avant de retirer le botier. Remettez le botier bien en place avant de remettre l'ordinateur sous tension. Avis relatif aux batteries AVERTISSEMENT !

lithium, au pentoxyde de vanadium ou alcaline. Un risque d'explosion ou de brlure existe en cas de manipulation incorrecte du module de batteries. Le produit peut contenir un module de batteries interne au dioxyde de manganse/

AVERTISSEMENT ! Ne pas essayer de recharger la pile. AVERTISSEMENT ! vitez de la soumettre des tempratures suprieures 60 C (140 F). AVERTISSEMENT ! Ne pas la dsassembler, l'craser, la trouer, mettre nu ses contacts ou la jeter dans le feu ou l'eau. AVERTISSEMENT !

d'un type incorrect. liminez les batteries usages en respectant les instructions. Il existe un risque d'explosion en cas de remplacement de la batterie par une batterie AVERTISSEMENT ! Remplacez uniquement par une batterie HP prvue pour ce produit. AVERTISSEMENT ! Ne pas ingrer la batterie, risque de brlure chimique. AVERTISSEMENT ! Ce produit contient une pile bouton. Si la pile bouton est ingre, elle peut causer des brlures internes graves en moins de 2 heures et peut entraner la mort. AVERTISSEMENT ! Conservez les batteries neuves et usages hors de porte des enfants. AVERTISSEMENT ! Si le compartiment de la batterie nest pas ferm convenablement, arrtez dutiliser le produit et gardez hors de porte des enfants. AVERTISSEMENT ! Si vous pensez que des batteries ont pu avoir t ingres ou places lintrieur de toute partie du corps, consulter immdiatement un mdecin. AVERTISSEMENT ! Si vous laissez une batterie dans un environnement comportant une temprature extrmement leve, cela peut entraner une explosion ou la fuite du gaz ou liquide inflammable. AVERTISSEMENT ! Une batterie soumise une pression dair trs faible peut entraner une explosion ou la fuite du gaz ou liquide inflammable. 34 Chapitre 4 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail personnelles, tout-en-un et les terminaux de point de vente Icne Description Les piles, modules de batterie et accumulateurs ne doivent pas tre jets avec les ordures mnagres. Pour permettre leur recyclage ou leur mise au rebut, veuillez utiliser les systmes de collecte publique ou renvoyez-

les HP, un partenaire HP agr ou leurs agents. Icne Description Taiwan EPA demande aux fabricants ou aux importateurs de piles, conformment l'Article 15 de la loi relative la mise au rebut (Waste Disposal Act), d'indiquer les mentions de rcupration des piles usages dans des points de vente, brochures ou publicits. Contactez une entreprise de recyclage qualifie pour la mise au rebut approprie de la pile. Avis sur le ventilateur AVERTISSEMENT !

AVERTISSEMENT ! Conservez les pices fixes loignes des parties mobiles. AVERTISSEMENT ! Conservez les pices fixes loignes des hlices du ventilateur. AVERTISSEMENT ! Conservez les pices fixes hors de la trajectoire de mouvement. Avis sur le niveau du volume du casque et des couteurs AVERTISSEMENT !

Pour viter les dommages causs votre systme auditif, n'coutez pas des volumes levs pendant des priodes prolonges. Le rglage de la commande de volume, ainsi que du balancier compensateur dautres paramtres hors de la position centrale peut augmenter la tension de sortie du casque/des couteurs et par consquent le niveau de pression acoustique. Lutilisation de facteurs influenant la sortie casque/couteurs autres que ceux spcifis par le fabricant (par exemple systme dexploitation, logiciel dgalisation, microprogramme, pilote) peut augmenter la tension de sortie du casque/des couteurs et par consquent le niveau de pression acoustique. Scurit des lasers Pour les produits quips d'units optiques ou d'metteurs fibre optique. Ce produit peut tre quip d'un priphrique de stockage optique (c'est--dire un lecteur CD ou DVD) et/ou d'un metteur-rcepteur fibre optique. Ces lments comportent des lasers classs dans la catgorie des produits laser de classe 1, conformment la norme IEC/EN 60825-1, et sont conformes ses exigences. Chacun de ces produits laser est conforme aux rgulations 21 CFR 1040.10 et 1040.11 de la US FDA ou est conforme ces normes l'exception des diffrences conformment la notice des lasers No. 50, du 24 Juin 2007. Avis sur le ventilateur 35 AVERTISSEMENT !

indiques dans ce document ou dans le manuel d'installation des appareils rayon laser, peut exposer l'utilisateur des radiations dangereuses. Pour rduire le risque d'exposition un rayonnement dangereux :

L'utilisation de mthodes de contrle ou de rglage ou de procdures, autres que celles N'essayez pas d'ouvrir le botier du module. Il ne contient pas de composant rparable par l'utilisateur. N'effectuez pas de commandes, de rglages ou d'oprations sur l'appareil laser, en dehors de ce qui est indiqu dans le prsent manuel. Seuls les techniciens agrs HP sont autoriss rparer l'unit. Exigences relatives au bloc d'alimentation et au cordon d'alimentation Exigences relatives la mise la terre des alimentations de classe 1 Pour une protection contre les dfauts de courant, l'quipement doit tre connect une borne de terre. Branchez le cordon d'alimentation du systme sur une prise secteur fournissant une connexion de masse. Tout cordon alternatif risquerait de ne pas fournir une protection adquate contre les dfauts. Utilisez uniquement le cordon d'alimentation fourni avec ce produit ou un produit de remplacement agr par HP Inc. Este equipamento deve ser conectado obrigatoriamente em tomada de rede de energia eltrica que possua aterramento (trs pinos), conforme a norma nbr abnt 5410,visando a segurana dos usurios contra choques eltricos. Apparatets stikprop skal tilsluttes en stikkontakt med jord, som giver forbindelse til stikproppens jord. Avis pour le Brsil Danemark Finlande Norvge Sude Laite on liitettv suojakoskettimilla varustettuun pistorasiaan. Apparatet m tilkoples jordet stikkontakt. Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag. Exigences relatives au bloc d'alimentation Les alimentations sur certains produits sont quipes de commutateurs de tension externes. La fonction de slection de tension sur le produit autorise son fonctionnement sous toute tension comprise entre 100-127 ou 200-240 volts secteur. Les alimentations sur les produits dpourvus de commutateurs de tension externes sont quipes de circuits internes qui dtectent la tension d'entre et basculent automatiquement sur la tension approprie. Pour des raisons de scurit, utilisez uniquement l'adaptateur secteur fourni avec l'appareil ou un adaptateur de remplacement agr par HP Inc. Les rfrences de pices de rechange sont disponibles l'adresse http://www.hp.com/cgi-bin/hpsupport/index.pl. 36 Chapitre 4 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail personnelles, tout-en-un et les terminaux de point de vente Pour une utilisation en Norvge Ce produit est galement conu pour un systme lectrique informatique avec tension phase-phase de 230 V. Exigences relatives au cordon d'alimentation Le jeu de cordon d'alimentation livr avec le produit est conforme aux exigences du pays dans lequel l'quipement a t achet. Utilisez uniquement le cordon d'alimentation fourni avec l'appareil ou un cordon d'alimentation de remplacement fourni par HP Inc. ou par un revendeur agr par HP Inc. Les rfrences de pices de rechange sont disponibles l'adresse http://www.hp.com/cgi-bin/hpsupport/index.pl. Les cordons d'alimentation destins tre utiliss dans d'autres pays doivent respecter les normes du pays o vous utilisez le produit. Pour plus d'informations sur les exigences de cordon d'alimentation, contactez votre revendeur, votre mainteneur ou votre fournisseur de services agr HP. AVERTISSEMENT ! N'utilisez pas de cordons d'alimentation d'autres produits. Un mauvais cordon d'alimentation peut entraner un risque de dcharge lectrique ou d'incendie. Les exigences prsentes ci-aprs s'appliquent tous les pays. 1. 2. Le cordon d'alimentation doit tre homologu par une agence accrdite, responsable de l'valuation dans le pays o le cordon sera install. La longueur du cordon doit tre comprise entre 1,8 m (6 pieds) et 3,6 m (12 pieds). Pour un cordon d'alimentation de 2 m (6,56 pieds) ou moins, le diamtre du cordon doit tre d'au minimum 0,75 mm2 ou 18 AWG. Si le cordon d'alimentation dpasse 2 m (6,56 pieds), le diamtre du cordon doit tre d'au minimum 1 mm2 ou 16 AWG. Le cordon d'alimentation doit tre branch un endroit dgag o il ne risque pas d'tre pitin ou coinc par des objets. Accordez une attention particulire la fiche, la prise murale et l'endroit o le cordon sort du botier de l'appareil. AVERTISSEMENT ! N'utilisez pas ce produit avec un cordon d'alimentation endommag. Si le cordon d'alimentation est endommag de quelque manire que ce soit, remplacez-le immdiatement. Un cordon endommag peut entraner des risques de blessure. Spcifications du cordon d'alimentation pour le Japon Pour une utilisation au Japon, utilisez uniquement le cordon d'alimentation fourni avec l'appareil. ATTENTION : N'utilisez pas le cordon d'alimentation fourni avec ce produit pour alimenter d'autres appareils. Risque de pincement AVERTISSEMENT ! Observez les zones risque de pincement. N'approchez pas vos doigts des pices se refermant. Protection des connecteurs de l'antenne TV Mise la terre d'une antenne de tlvision externe Si une antenne externe ou un systme par cble est connect(e) ce produit, assurez-vous que l'antenne ou le systme par cble est mis(e) la terre lectriquement de faon vous protger contre les surtensions et les accumulations d'lectricit statique. L'article 810 du code lectrique national (ANSI/NFPA 70) fournit des Risque de pincement 37 informations sur la mise la terre de la monture et de la structure portante, la mise la terre du fil d'entre vers un dispositif de dcharge de l'antenne, la taille des conducteurs de mise la terre, l'emplacement du dispositif de dcharge de l'antenne, la connexion aux lectrodes de terre et les exigences relatives aux lectrodes de terre. Protection contre la foudre Pour mieux protger votre produit durant un orage ou lorsqu'il reste inutilis et sans surveillance pendant une priode prolonge, dbranchez le cble de raccordement lectrique, puis l'antenne ou le systme par cble. Vous viterez ainsi que la foudre ou des surtensions n'endommagent le produit. Tableau 4-1 Mise la terre de l'antenne Rfrence Composant de mise la terre Compteur lectrique extrieur 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Systme d'lectrode de mise terre du compteur lectrique (code lectrique national, article 250, partie III) Conducteurs de mise la terre (code lectrique national, section 810.21) Dispositif de dcharge de l'antenne (code lectrique national, section 810.20) Colliers de mise la terre Collier de mise la terre Fil d'entre de l'antenne Remarque destine aux installateurs de systmes de tlvision par cble Ce rappel a pour but d'attirer l'attention des installateurs de systmes de tlvision par cble sur la section 820.93 du code lectrique national, qui fournit des directives pour la mise la terre et spcifie notamment que le blindage du cble coaxial doit tre connect au systme de mise la terre du btiment, aussi prs que possible du point d'entre du cble. 38 Chapitre 4 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail personnelles, tout-en-un et les terminaux de point de vente Avis de scurit pour la Chine Chine : avis sur l'altitude Avis sur l'altitude pour les produits dont l'utilisation n'est pas certifie au-del de 5 000 m d'altitude Icne Description Chine : avis sur une utilisation dans des conditions tropicales Avis pour les produits dont l'utilisation n'est pas certifie dans des conditions tropicales Icne Description Avis de scurit pour la Chine 39 Avis d'acoustique pour l'Allemagne Le niveau de pression acoustique (LpA) est nettement en dessous de 70 dB(A) (position oprateur, fonctionnement normal, selon ISO 7779). Les donnes d'mission de bruit acoustique sont disponibles dans les dclarations IT ECO relatives au produit, l'adresse : http://www.hp.com/go/ted Schalldruckpegel (LpA) ist weit unterhalb 70 dB(A) (Benutzerposition, normaler Betrieb, nach ISO 7779) Die Schallemissionswerte der Produkte knnen in den produktbezogenen IT ECO Declarations auf folgender Internet Adresse gefunden werden: http://www.hp.com/go/ted Norvge et Sude : Avis de mise la terre des cbles pour les produits quips dune carte TV ATTENTION : Pour rduire les problmes de scurit potentiels, utilisez un sectionneur galvanique pour le branchement un rseau de distribution par cble.

(1) 30 10

(2) 2 2 1 40 Chapitre 4 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail personnelles, tout-en-un et les terminaux de point de vente 5 Avis environnementaux pour les ordinateurs portables et tablettes Ce chapitre prsente des avis relatifs l'environnement des diffrents pays ou rgions et des informations de conformit. Certains de ces avis ne s'appliquent peut-tre pas votre produit. Recyclage du matriel lectronique, de l'emballage et de la batterie HP encourage ses clients recycler le matriel lectronique usag, l'emballage des cartouches dimpression dorigine HP et les piles rechargeables. Pour plus d'informations sur les programmes de recyclage, rendez-

vous sur http://www.hp.com/recycle. Pour plus d'informations sur le recyclage du produit au Japon, reportez-vous au site http://www.hp.com/jp/

hardwarerecycle/. Mise au rebut des quipements par les utilisateurs Ce symbole indique que vous ne devez pas jeter votre produit avec les dchets mnagers. Il est de votre responsabilit de protger la sant et l'environnement et d'liminer votre quipement en le remettant une dchetterie effectuant le recyclage des quipements lectriques et lectroniques. Pour plus d'informations, prenez contact avec votre service d'limination des ordures mnagres ou ouvrez la page http://www.hp.com/recycle. Mise au rebut des batteries alcalines au Brsil Icne Description Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no daven ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes, inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum Recyclage du matriel lectronique, de l'emballage et de la batterie 41 Informations sur le recyclage du matriel au Brsil Icne Description Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no daven ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes, inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum Certification ENERGY STAR (certains modles) ENERGY STAR est un programme de l'agence de protection environnementale des tats-Unis qui aide les entreprises et les personnes conomiser de l'argent et protger le climat par le biais de l'utilisation de produits prsentant une efficacit nergtique suprieure. Les produits certifis ENERGY STAR limitent les missions de gaz effet de serre en rpondant aux critres d'efficacit nergtique stricts dicts par l'Agence de protection environnementale des tats-Unis. En tant que partenaire ENERGY STAR, HP Inc. a suivi le processus avanc de certification des produits de l'EPA pour s'assurer que les produits portant le logo ENERGY STAR respectaient les rglementations ENERGY STAR. Le logo suivant apparat sur tous les ordinateurs respectant les spcifications ENERGY STAR :

Une exigence cl du programme ENERGY STAR pour les produits informatiques rside dans l'inclusion de fonctions de gestion de l'alimentation permettant de rduire sensiblement la consommation d'nergie lorsque le produit n'est pas utilis. La gestion de l'alimentation permet un ordinateur de passer automatiquement dans un mode basse consommation veille ou tout autre mode basse consommation, aprs une priode dfinie d'inactivit. Les fonctions de gestion de l'alimentation ont t prdfinies comme suit lorsque l'ordinateur fonctionne sur secteur :

Type d'ordinateur Dlai d'activation du mode veille de l'cran Dlai d'activation du mode veille de l'ordinateur (en minutes) Sortie du mode veille Notebooks, stations de travail mobiles

<= 15 minutes (selon le modle)

<= 30 minutes (selon le modle) Le produit quitte le mode veille lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation/veille. Si le Wake on Lan (WOL) est activ, le systme peut sortir du mode veille en rponse un signal rseau. Tablettes

<= 1 minute Non applicable Non applicable Pour les ordinateurs prenant en charge un profil d'utilisation toujours sous tension, toujours connect o l'accs Internet reste actif (par exemple sur les tablettes), des modes d'alimentation basse consommation alternatifs, comme les modes d'inactivit courte ou d'inactivit prolonge (tels que dfinis dans les exigences du programme ENERGY STAR pour les ordinateurs) sont fournis. Ils consomment trs peu d'nergie (<=

10 Watts) et le cas chant, optimisent l'autonomie du produit. Ces modes alternatifs sont dynamiques. Le mode veille de l'cran est activ aprs 1 minute d'inactivit de l'utilisateur. 42 Chapitre 5 Avis environnementaux pour les ordinateurs portables et tablettes L'ordinateur quitte le mode veille lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation/veille. Lorsque la fonction Wake On LAN (WOL) est active, l'ordinateur peut galement quitter le mode veille en rponse un signal rseau. Plus d'informations sur les conomies nergtiques et financires potentielles lies aux fonctions de gestion de l'alimentation sont prsentes sur le site Web de gestion de l'alimentation ENERGY STAR de l'EPA l'adresse http://www.energystar.gov/powermanagement. Plus d'informations sur le programme ENERGY STAR et ses avantages pour l'environnement sont disponibles sur le site Web ENERGY STAR de l'EPA l'adresse http://www.energystar.gov. ENERGY STAR et le label ENERGY STAR sont des marques dposes dtenues par l'Agence de protection environnementale des tats-Unis. Substances chimiques HP s'engage fournir ses clients des informations sur les substances chimiques contenues dans ses produits conformment aux dispositions lgales telles que REACH (rglement CE numro 1907/2006 du Parlement europen et du Conseil). Un rapport d'informations sur la conformit des substances chimiques de ce produit est disponible l'adresse : http://www.hp.com/go/reach. Avis sur l'environnement pour la Chine Substances chimiques 43 tiquette de consommation nergtique des ordinateurs pour la Chine Conformment la rglementation sur la mise en place d'une tiquette de consommation nergtique des micro-ordinateurs pour la Chine, ce micro-ordinateur est quip d'une tiquette d'efficacit nergtique. La classe d'efficacit nergtique (consommation nergtique typique) et la catgorie de produit, prsentes sur l'tiquette, sont dtermines et calcules selon la norme GB28380-2012. 1. Classes d'efficacit nergtique La classe est dtermine par la norme en calculant le niveau de consommation de base et en ajoutant la consommation des lments supplmentaires, tels que la mmoire principale et les cartes graphiques. Quelle que soit la classe, la consommation nergtique typique ne doit pas dpasser la valeur indique dans le tableau suivant :

Type de produit Consommation nergtique typique (kilowatt-heure) Micro-ordinateur de bureau, tout-en-un Catgorie A Classe 1 98+Efa Classe 2 Classe 3 148+Efa 198+Efa Ordinateur portable Catgorie A Catgorie B 125+Efa Catgorie C 159+Efa Catgorie D 184+Efa Catgorie B 20+Efa 26+Efa 175+Efa 209+Efa 234+Efa 35+Efa 45+Efa 225+Efa 259+Efa 284+Efa 45+Efa 65+Efa Catgorie C 54,5+Efa 75,0+Efa 123,5+Efa REMARQUE : EFA est la somme du facteur de puissance de fonctions supplmentaires du produit. 2. Consommation nergtique typique Le chiffre de la consommation nergtique indiqu sur l'tiquette correspond aux donnes mesures avec la configuration reprsentative qui couvre toutes les configurations de l'unit d'enregistrement slectionne conformment la Rglementation sur la mise en place d'une tiquette de consommation nergtique des micro-ordinateurs pour la Chine . Par consquent, la consommation nergtique relle de ce micro-ordinateur spcifique peut ne pas tre la mme que celle des donnes de consommation nergtique typique prsentes sur ltiquette. 3. Catgorie de produit La catgorie de produit est dtermine par la norme selon la configuration du micro-ordinateur. La classification des produits est conforme aux rglementations dans le tableau suivant :

Type de produit Description de la configuration Catgorie A Catgorie B Micro-ordinateur de bureau, tout-en-un Ordinateur portable Micro-ordinateur de bureau et tout-en-un dont la configuration est en dehors du champ d'application de la catgorie B, C et D Ordinateur portable dont la configuration est en dehors du champ d'application de la catgorie B et C 2 curs physiques de processeurs et au moins 2 Go de mmoire systme Processeur graphique distinct 44 Chapitre 5 Avis environnementaux pour les ordinateurs portables et tablettes Type de produit Catgorie C Description de la configuration Plus de 2 curs physiques de processeurs avec au moins l'une des fonctions suivantes :

Au moins 2 Go de mmoire systme Processeur graphique distinct Le produit possde au moins 2 curs physiques de processeurs et 2 Go de mmoire systme. Processeur graphique distinct avec une largeur de tampon de trame d'au moins 128 bits. Catgorie D Au moins 4 curs physiques de processeurs avec au moins l'une des fonctions suivantes :

1. 2. 1. 2. Au moins 4 Go de mmoire systme Processeur graphique distinct avec une largeur de tampon de trame d'au moins 128 bits Pour plus de dtails sur la spcification, veuillez vous reporter la norme GB28380-2012. tiquette de consommation nergtique des ordinateurs pour la Chine 45 46 Chapitre 5 Avis environnementaux pour les ordinateurs portables et tablettes Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour la Chine

(RoHS) Tableau des substances/composants dangereux et leur contenu Comme requis par les Mthodes pour la gestion des substances dangereuses utilisation restreinte dans les produits lectriques et lectroniques de Chine Nom de la pice Plomb

(Pb) Mercure Cadmium hexavalent Diphnyles

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI)) polybroms (PBB) thers diphnyles polybroms (PBDE) Matires dangereuses Chrome Batterie Cbles Camra Disque dur Casque I/O PCAs Clavier cran LCD Chssis/Autre Lecteur de carte mmoire flash Lecteur de disquette Support (CD/DVD/

disquette) Mmoire Carte mre, processeur, dissipateurs thermiques Souris Unit de disque optique Priphrique d'amarrage en option Adaptateur d'alimentation Bloc d'alimentation Source d'alimentation Tlcommande Lecteur de carte Smart Card/Java X X X X X X X X X X X O X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour la Chine (RoHS) 47 Matires dangereuses Chrome Plomb

(Pb) Mercure Cadmium hexavalent Diphnyles

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI)) polybroms (PBB) thers diphnyles polybroms (PBDE) Ce formulaire a t a prpar conformment aux dispositions de SJ/T 11364. O : Indique que la quantit de la substance dangereuse mentionne respecte les limites requises par GB/T 26572 dans tous les matriaux homognes du composant. X : Indique que la quantit de la substance dangereuse mentionne dpasse les limites requises par GB/T 26572 dans au moins un matriau homogne du composant. Tous les lments du tableau accompagns d'un X sont conformes la norme RoHS de l'Union europenne. REMARQUE :

d'utilisation du produit, telles que la temprature et l'humidit. La dure d'utilisation cologique en anne, en rfrence, a t dtermine sur la base de conditions normales

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(PBB)

(PBDE)

(Cr(VI)) Nom de la pice Haut-parleurs externes Tuner TV Unit mmoire flash USB Concentrateur USB Webcam Rcepteur sans fil Cartes sans fil

I/O PCA

(LCD) X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 48 Chapitre 5 Avis environnementaux pour les ordinateurs portables et tablettes

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(PBB)

(PBDE)

(Cr(VI)) CD/DVD/

/Java

() port de chargement USB 3.0, identification USB O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O SJ/T 11364 O GB/T 26572 X GB/T 26572 X RoHS

(RoHS) Declaration of the Presence Condition of the Restricted Substances Marking O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

(RoHS) 49 Restricted substances and its chemical symbols Unit Lead (Pb) Mercury (Hg) Cadmium (Cd) Hexavalent chromium (CR+6) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) Cables

Chassis/Other

I/O PCAs

(LCD) Liquid crystal display (LCD) panel Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Power pack Power supply Storage Devices Wireless Devices 1 0.1 % 0.01 %

Note 1: "Exceeding 0.1 wt %" and "exceeding 0.01 wt %" indicate that the percentage content of the restricted substance exceeds the reference percentage value of presence condition. 2 Note 2: "" indicates that the percentage content of the restricted substance does not exceed the percentage of reference value of presence. 3 Note 3: The "" indicates that the restricted substance corresponds to the exemption. http://www.hp.com/support To access the latest user guides or manuals for your product, go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Find your product, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 50 Chapitre 5 Avis environnementaux pour les ordinateurs portables et tablettes Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour l'Inde

(RoHS) Ce produit, ainsi que ses consommables et pices, est conforme aux dispositions de la loi India E-waste Rule 2016 relatives la rduction des substances dangereuses. Il ne contient pas de concentrations de plomb, de mercure, de chrome hexavalent, de diphnyles polybroms ou de polybromodiphnylthers dpassant 0,1 %

du poids et 0,01 % du poids pour le cadmium, except dans les cas o les exemptions tablies l'annexe 2 de cette loi le permettent. Informations sur le rglement 1275/2008 de la Commission europenne Pour localiser les donnes sur la consommation lectrique des produits, y compris lorsque le produit est en mode veille en rseau et que tous les ports rseau cbls et les appareils sans fil sont connects, reportez-

vous la section P14 Informations supplmentaires des dclarations IT ECO l'adresse http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecodesktop-pc.html. Le cas chant, activez et dsactivez le rseau sans fil en suivant les instructions incluses dans le manuel de l'utilisateur du produit ou du systme d'exploitation. Des informations sont galement disponibles l'adresse http://www.hp.com/support. Dclarations IT ECO Pour les ordinateurs portables, rendez-vous sur http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/

productdata/iteconotebook-o.html. Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour le Japon

(RoHS) A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers provide Material Content Declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, visit http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. Ce produit a t tiquet conformment la loi du Mexique sur l'utilisation durable de l'nergie exigeant la divulgation de la consommation nergtique en utilisation normale (mode inactif) et en mode veille. Votre produit correspond l'une des nombreuses configurations de cette famille de modle ; la consommation nergtique du mode inactif de votre configuration spcifique peut tre diffrente des informations figurant sur l'tiquette. La consommation nergtique relle de votre produit peut tre suprieure ou infrieure la valeur signale sur l'tiquette de l'nergie du produit au Mexique en raison de facteurs tels que la configuration (composants et modules choisis) et de l'utilisation (tches ralises, logiciels installs et excuts, etc.). Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour l'Inde (RoHS) 51 Rglementation EEE de la Turquie Matriau compos de perchlorate : une manipulation particulire peut tre ncessaire Voir http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. La batterie de l'horloge en temps rel ou la pile bouton de ce produit est susceptible de contenir du perchlorate et peut ncessiter une manipulation particulire lors de son recyclage ou de sa mise au rebut en Californie. 52 Chapitre 5 Avis environnementaux pour les ordinateurs portables et tablettes Certifi TCO Cette section s'applique uniquement aux produits portant le logo TCO Certified. Certifi TCO 53 TCO Certified Edge Cette section s'applique uniquement aux produits portant le logo TCO Certified Edge. 54 Chapitre 5 Avis environnementaux pour les ordinateurs portables et tablettes 6 Avis relatifs lenvironnement pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail personnelles, tout-en-

un et les terminaux de point de vente Ce chapitre prsente des avis relatifs l'environnement des diffrents pays ou rgions et des informations de conformit. Certains de ces avis peuvent ne pas s'appliquer votre produit. Recyclage du matriel lectronique, de l'emballage et de la batterie HP encourage ses clients recycler le matriel lectronique usag, l'emballage des cartouches dimpression dorigine HP et les piles rechargeables. Pour plus d'informations sur les programmes de recyclage, rendez-

vous sur http://www.hp.com/recycle. Pour obtenir des informations concernant le recyclage du produit au Japon, reportez-vous http://www.hp.com/jp/hardwarerecycle/. Mise au rebut des quipements par les utilisateurs Icne Description Ce symbole indique que vous ne devez pas jeter votre produit avec les dchets mnagers. Il est de votre responsabilit de protger la sant et l'environnement et d'liminer votre quipement en le remettant une dchetterie effectuant le recyclage des quipements lectriques et lectroniques. Pour plus d'informations, prenez contact avec votre service d'limination des ordures mnagres ou ouvrez la page http://www.hp.com/

recycle. Mise au rebut des batteries alcalines au Brsil Icne Description Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no daven ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes, inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum Recyclage du matriel lectronique, de l'emballage et de la batterie 55 Informations sur le recyclage du matriel au Brsil Icne Description Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no daven ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes, inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum Certification ENERGY STAR (certains modles) ENERGY STAR est un programme de l'agence de protection environnementale des tats-Unis qui aide les entreprises et les personnes conomiser de l'argent et protger le climat par le biais de l'utilisation de produits prsentant une efficacit nergtique suprieure. Les produits certifis ENERGY STAR limitent les missions de gaz effet de serre en rpondant aux critres d'efficacit nergtique stricts dicts par l'Agence de protection environnementale des tats-Unis. En tant que partenaire ENERGY STAR, HP Inc. a suivi le processus avanc de certification des produits de l'EPA pour s'assurer que les produits portant le logo ENERGY STAR respectaient les rglementations ENERGY STAR. Le logo suivant apparat sur tous les ordinateurs respectant les spcifications ENERGY STAR :

Une exigence cl du programme ENERGY STAR pour les produits informatiques rside dans l'inclusion de fonctions de gestion de l'alimentation permettant de rduire sensiblement la consommation d'nergie lorsque le produit n'est pas utilis. La gestion de l'alimentation permet un ordinateur de passer automatiquement dans un mode basse consommation veille ou tout autre mode basse consommation, aprs une priode dfinie d'inactivit. Les fonctions de gestion de l'alimentation ont t prdfinies comme suit lorsque l'ordinateur fonctionne sur secteur :

Type d'ordinateur Dlai d'activation du mode veille de l'cran Dlai d'activation du mode veille de l'ordinateur (en minutes) Sortie du mode veille Ordinateurs de bureau, ordinateurs de bureau intgrs, stations de travail

<= 15 minutes (selon le modle)

<= 30 minutes (selon le modle) Le produit quitte le mode veille lorsque l'utilisateur interagit avec un priphrique d'entre, y compris la souris ou le clavier. Si le Wake on Lan (WOL) est activ, le systme peut sortir du mode veille en rponse un signal rseau. Si le mode veille est pris en charge par le systme d'exploitation, le produit quitte le mode veille lorsque l'utilisateur interagit avec un priphrique d'entre, y compris la souris ou le clavier. Si le Wake on Lan (WOL) est activ, le systme peut sortir Clients lgers

<= 15 minutes (selon le modle)

<= 30 minutes lorsque le mode veille est pris en charge par le systme d'exploitation (selon le modle) 56 Chapitre 6 Avis relatifs lenvironnement pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail personnelles, tout-en-un et les terminaux de point de vente Type d'ordinateur Dlai d'activation du mode veille de l'cran Dlai d'activation du mode veille de l'ordinateur (en minutes) Sortie du mode veille du mode veille en rponse un signal rseau. L'ordinateur quitte le mode veille lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation/veille. Lorsque la fonction Wake On LAN (WOL) est active, l'ordinateur peut galement quitter le mode veille en rponse un signal rseau. Plus d'informations sur les conomies nergtiques et financires potentielles lies aux fonctions de gestion de l'alimentation sont prsentes sur le site Web de gestion de l'alimentation ENERGY STAR de l'EPA l'adresse http://www.energystar.gov/powermanagement. Plus d'informations sur le programme ENERGY STAR et ses avantages pour l'environnement sont disponibles sur le site Web ENERGY STAR de l'EPA l'adresse http://www.energystar.gov. ENERGY STAR et le label ENERGY STAR sont des marques dposes dtenues par l'Agence de protection environnementale des tats-Unis. Substances chimiques HP s'engage fournir ses clients des informations sur les substances chimiques contenues dans ses produits, conformment aux normes juridiques en vigueur telles que le rglement concernant l'enregistrement, l'valuation et l'autorisation des substances chimiques, ainsi que les restrictions applicables ces substances (REACH, rglement CE N 1907/2006 du Parlement europen et du Conseil). Des informations sur les substances chimiques contenues dans ce produit sont disponibles l'adresse http://www.hp.com/go/reach. Avis sur le mercure Cette dclaration s'applique tous les ordinateurs tout-en-un quips d'crans intgrs qui n'utilisent pas le rtroclairage LED. Ce produit HP peut contenir les matriaux suivants qui requirent un traitement spcial la fin de leur cycle de vie :

Le mercure contenu dans la lampe fluorescente de l'cran cristaux liquides (LCD) Il se peut que l'limination du mercure soit rglemente en raison de considrations environnementales. Pour obtenir des informations sur l'limination et le traitement de cette substance, veuillez contacter les autorits locales concernes ou l'Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) (http://www.eiae.org). Matriau compos de perchlorate : une manipulation particulire peut tre ncessaire La batterie de l'horloge en temps rel est susceptible de contenir du perchlorate et peut ncessiter une manipulation particulire lors de son recyclage ou de sa mise au rebut en Californie. Reportez-vous au site http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/. Substances chimiques 57 Avis sur l'environnement pour la Chine tiquette de consommation nergtique des ordinateurs pour la Chine Conformment la rglementation sur la mise en place d'une tiquette de consommation nergtique des micro-ordinateurs pour la Chine, ce micro-ordinateur est quip d'une tiquette d'efficacit nergtique. La classe d'efficacit nergtique (consommation nergtique typique) et la catgorie de produit, prsentes sur l'tiquette, sont dtermines et calcules selon la norme GB28380-2012. 1. Classes d'efficacit nergtique La classe est dtermine par la norme en calculant le niveau de consommation de base et en ajoutant la consommation des lments supplmentaires, tels que la mmoire principale et les cartes graphiques. Quelle que soit la classe, la consommation nergtique typique ne doit pas dpasser la valeur indique dans le tableau suivant :

Type de produit Consommation nergtique typique (kilowatt-heure) Micro-ordinateur de bureau, tout-en-un Catgorie A Classe 1 98+Efa Classe 2 Classe 3 148+Efa 198+Efa Ordinateur portable Catgorie A Catgorie B 125+Efa Catgorie C 159+Efa Catgorie D 184+Efa Catgorie B 20+Efa 26+Efa 175+Efa 209+Efa 234+Efa 35+Efa 45+Efa 225+Efa 259+Efa 284+Efa 45+Efa 65+Efa 58 Chapitre 6 Avis relatifs lenvironnement pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail personnelles, tout-en-un et les terminaux de point de vente Type de produit Consommation nergtique typique (kilowatt-heure) Catgorie C 54,5+Efa 75,0+Efa 123,5+Efa REMARQUE : EFA est la somme du facteur de puissance de fonctions suppmentaires du produit. 2. Consommation nergtique typique Le chiffre de la consommation nergtique indiqu sur l'tiquette correspond aux donnes mesures avec la configuration reprsentative qui couvre toutes les configurations de l'unit d'enregistrement slectionne conformment la Rglementation sur la mise en place d'une tiquette de consommation nergtique des micro-ordinateurs pour la Chine . Par consquent, la consommation nergtique relle de ce micro-ordinateur spcifique peut ne pas tre la mme que celle des donnes de consommation nergtique typique prsentes sur ltiquette. 3. Catgorie de produit La catgorie de produit est dtermine par la norme selon la configuration du micro-ordinateur. La classification des produits est conforme aux rglementations dans le tableau suivant :

Type de produit Catgorie A Catgorie B Catgorie C Description de la configuration Micro-ordinateur de bureau, tout-en-un Ordinateur portable Micro-ordinateur de bureau et tout-en-un dont la configuration est en dehors du champ d'application de la catgorie B, C et D Ordinateur portable dont la configuration est en dehors du champ d'application de la catgorie B et C 2 curs physiques de processeurs et au moins 2 Go de mmoire systme Processeur graphique distinct Plus de 2 curs physiques de processeurs avec au moins l'une des fonctions suivantes :

Au moins 2 Go de mmoire systme Processeur graphique distinct Le produit possde au moins 2 curs physiques de processeurs et 2 Go de mmoire systme. Processeur graphique distinct avec une largeur de tampon de trame d'au moins 128 bits. 1. 2. 1. 2. Catgorie D Au moins 4 curs physiques de processeurs avec au moins l'une des fonctions suivantes :

Au moins 4 Go de mmoire systme Processeur graphique distinct avec une largeur de tampon de trame d'au moins 128 bits Pour plus de dtails sur la spcification, veuillez vous reporter la norme GB28380-2012. tiquette de consommation nergtique des ordinateurs pour la Chine 59 60 Chapitre 6 Avis relatifs lenvironnement pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail personnelles, tout-en-un et les terminaux de point de vente Restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour la Chine (ROHS) Tableau des substances/composants dangereux et leur contenu Comme requis par les Mthodes pour la gestion des substances dangereuses utilisation restreinte dans les produits lectriques et lectroniques de Chine Matires dangereuses Chrome Plomb

(Pb) Mercure Cadmium hexavalent Diphnyles

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI)) polybroms (PBB) thers diphnyles polybroms (PBDE) Nom de la pice Batterie Cbles Camra Chssis/Autre Ventilateur Lecteur de carte mmoire flash Lecteur de disquette Dissipateur thermique Disque dur Casque I/O PCAs Clavier cran LCD Support (CD/DVD/

disquette) Mmoire Carte mre, processeur, dissipateurs thermiques Souris Unit de disque optique Priphrique d'amarrage en option Adaptateur d'alimentation Source d'alimentation Projecteur Tlcommande X X X X X X X X X X X X X O X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour la Chine (ROHS) 61 Matires dangereuses Chrome Plomb

(Pb) Mercure Cadmium hexavalent Diphnyles

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI)) polybroms (PBB) thers diphnyles polybroms (PBDE) Nom de la pice Lecteur de carte Smart Card/Java Disques SSD Haut-parleurs externes Stylet Tapis tactile Tuner TV Unit mmoire flash USB Concentrateur USB Webcam Rcepteur sans fil Cartes sans fil Plateau de capture 3D/

plaque tournante

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Ce formulaire a t a prpar conformment aux dispositions de SJ/T 11364. O : Indique que la quantit de la substance dangereuse mentionne respecte les limites requises par GB/T 26572 dans tous les matriaux homognes du composant. X : Indique que la quantit de la substance dangereuse mentionne dpasse les limites requises par GB/T 26572 dans au moins un matriau homogne du composant. Tous les lments du tableau accompagns d'un X sont conformes la norme RoHS de l'Union europenne. REMARQUE :

d'utilisation du produit, telles que la temprature et l'humidit. La dure d'utilisation cologique en anne, en rfrence, a t dtermine sur la base de conditions normales

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(PBB)

(PBDE)

(Cr(VI)) O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 62 Chapitre 6 Avis relatifs lenvironnement pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail personnelles, tout-en-un et les terminaux de point de vente

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(PBB)

(PBDE)

(Cr(VI)) I/O PCA

(LCD) CD/DVD/

/Java port de chargement USB 3.0, identification USB 3D /

X X X X X X X X O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O SJ/T 11364 O GB/T 26572 Restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour la Chine (ROHS) 63

(Cr(VI))

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(PBB)

(PBDE) X GB/T 26572 X RoHS

(RoHS) Declaration of the Presence Condition of the Restricted Substances Marking Restricted substances and its chemical symbols Lead Mercury Cadmium

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd) Hexavalent chromium (CR

+6) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) Unit Cables

/ Chassis/Other

I/O PCAs

(LCD) AIOLiquid crystal display (LCD) panel

(for AIO only) Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Power supply Storage Devices 1 0.1 % 0.01 %

Note 1: "Exceeding 0.1 wt %" and "exceeding 0.01 wt %" indicate that the percentage content of the restricted substance exceeds the reference percentage value of presence condition. 2 Note 2: "" indicates that the percentage content of the restricted substance does not exceed the percentage of reference value of presence. 3 Note 3: The "" indicates that the restricted substance corresponds to the exemption. 64 Chapitre 6 Avis relatifs lenvironnement pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail personnelles, tout-en-un et les terminaux de point de vente http://www.hp.com/support To access the latest user guides or manuals for your product, go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Find your product, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour l'Inde

(RoHS) Ce produit, ainsi que ses consommables et pices, est conforme aux dispositions de la loi India E-waste Rule 2016 relatives la rduction des substances dangereuses. Il ne contient pas de concentrations de plomb, de mercure, de chrome hexavalent, de diphnyles polybroms ou de polybromodiphnylthers dpassant 0,1 %

du poids et 0,01 % du poids pour le cadmium, except dans les cas o les exemptions tablies l'annexe 2 de cette loi le permettent. Informations sur le rglement 1275/2008 de la Commission europenne Pour localiser les donnes sur la consommation lectrique des produits, y compris lorsque le produit est en mode veille en rseau et que tous les ports rseau cbls et les appareils sans fil sont connects, reportez-

vous la section P14 Informations supplmentaires des dclarations IT ECO l'adresse http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecodesktop-pc.html. Le cas chant, activez et dsactivez le rseau sans fil en suivant les instructions incluses dans le manuel de l'utilisateur du produit ou du systme d'exploitation. Des informations sont galement disponibles l'adresse http://www.hp.com/support. Dclarations IT ECO Ordinateurs de bureau et clients lgers http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecodesktop-pc.html?

jumpid=reg_R1002_USEN Stations de travail http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecoworkstatio.html Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour le Japon

(RoHS) A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers provide Material Content Declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, visit http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour l'Inde (RoHS) 65 Mehiki zakon o uporabi trajnostne energije Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico Se ha etiquetado este producto en conformidad con la Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico, que requiere la divulgacin del consumo de energa del modo de uso normal (modo inactivo) y del modo de espera. Su producto es una de las muchas configuraciones de esta familia de modelos; el consumo de energa del modo inactivo de su configuracin especfica puede diferir de la informacin de la etiqueta. El consumo real de energa de su producto puede ser mayor o menor que el valor informado en la etiqueta de energa de producto para Mxico a causa de factores como la configuracin (componentes y mdulos seleccionados) y el uso (tareas que se estn efectuando, software instalado y en ejecucin, etc.). REMARQUE : Esta ley no es aplicable a los workstations. This product has been labeled in compliance with the Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law requiring disclosure of power consumption in the normal use (idle mode) and standby modes. Your product is one of many configurations in this model family; the idle mode power consumption of your specific configuration may vary from the information on the label. Actual power consumption of your product may be higher or lower than the value reported on the Mexico product energy label due to factors such as configuration (components and modules chosen) and usage (tasks being performed, software installed and running, etc.). REMARQUE : Workstations are not labeled because the law is not applicable to the workstation product category. Rglementation EEE de la Turquie 66 Chapitre 6 Avis relatifs lenvironnement pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail personnelles, tout-en-un et les terminaux de point de vente Certifi TCO Cette section s'applique uniquement aux produits portant le logo TCO Certified. Certifi TCO 67 TCO Certified Edge Cette section s'applique uniquement aux produits portant le logo TCO Certified Edge. 68 Chapitre 6 Avis relatifs lenvironnement pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail personnelles, tout-en-un et les terminaux de point de vente Index 49, 64 A avis avis sur les appareils sans fil WWAN de Thalande 8 WWAN pour la Thalande 27 batterie 9, 28, 30, 34, 52, 55 Brsil 3, 22, 31, 36 Canada 3, 23 clavier 32 cordon d'alimentation pour le Japon 16, 25, 37 cordons d'alimentation 16, 31 Core du Sud 8, 27 environnement 41 Environnement 55 ergonomie 6, 25 Japon 7, 25 Macrovision Corporation 16 matriau compos de perchlorate 52, 57 Mexique 7, 27 mise au rebut des quipements 41, 55 modem 10, 18 niveau du volume du casque et des couteurs 31, 35 restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour l'Inde 51, 65 Symboles/Nombres transport arien 28 utilisation en vol 9 ventilateur 35 voyage 32 avis sur la mise au rebut des quipements 41, 55 avis sur la scurit des lasers 10, 29, 35 49, 64 avis, ordinateurs de bureau, clients avis sur le niveau du volume, casque Avis sur les priphriques sans fil Commission) 2 avis sur les appareils sans fil WWAN lgers et stations de travail et couteurs 31, 35 FCC (Federal Communications avis sur le niveau du volume du Commission) 21 avis, ordinateurs portables casque et des couteurs 31, 35 avis sur les appareils sans fil pour FCC (Federal Communications Singapour 8 avis, restriction d'utilisation de de Thalande 8 substances dangereuses pour la Chine 47, 61 avis sur les conditions d'utilisation avis, restriction d'utilisation de avis sur les cordons d'alimentation 41 16, 31 substances dangereuses pour le Japon 51, 65 avis de certification GS 6, 25 avis de mise la terre de cble 40 avis de restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour l'Inde 51, 65 avis pour la Core du Sud 8, 27 avis pour le Brsil 3, 22, 31, 36 avis pour le Canada 3 Avis pour le Canada 23 avis pour le Japon 7, 25 avis pour Macrovision Corporation 16 avis pour Tawan 8, 27 avis relatif au clavier 32 avis relatif aux appareils sans fil pour 14 le Mexique 7, 27 avis sur l'altitude 32, 39 Avis sur l'environnement 55 Avis sur l'environnement pour la avis sur les cordons d'alimentation pour le Japon 16, 37 Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation pour le Japon 25 avis sur les dplacements 32 avis sur les modems 10, 18 Canada 14, 20 Japon 14 Nouvelle-Zlande 15, 20 Systme amricain 12, 13, 19 avis sur les modems pour le Canada 14, 20 avis sur les modems pour le Japon avis sur les modems pour les tats-

Unis 12, 13, 19 Avis sur les priphriques sans fil WWAN pour la Thalande 27 avis sur les utilisations en vol 9 avis sur le ventilateur 35 avis sur une utilisation dans des conditions tropicales 32, 39 B bandes de frquences radio 5, 24 batterie 30, 34 batterie, avis 9, 28, 52, 55 Index 69 restriction d'utilisation de Chine 43, 58 substances dangereuses pour la Chine 47, 61 avis sur l'ergonomie 6, 25 avis sur la mise au rebut restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour le Japon 51, 65 scurit des lasers 10, 29, 35 Singapour 8 Tawan 8, 27 batterie 52, 55 batterie, remplacement par l'utilisateur 9, 28 batterie scelle en usine 9, 28 quipement 41, 55 cble des ordinateurs de bureau, Rglement 1275/2008 de la modifications, ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail FCC (Federal Communications Commission) 22 N niveaux de puissance maximale 5, notice de mise la terre des cbles 24 32 O ordinateurs portables, modifications FCC (Federal Communications Commission) 2 P priphriques de rseau local sans fil 22 priphriques LAN sans fil 3, 23 prise en charge vocale 15, 21 R recyclage de la batterie 41, 55 recyclage du matriel lectronique et de la batterie 41, 55 Commission europenne 51, 65 T tuner TV, notice de mise la terre des cbles 32 C Carte TV, avis de mise la terre de cble 40 Certification ENERGY STAR 42, 56 certification TCO Certified 53, 67 certification TCO Certified Edge 54, 68 D dclaration sur les modems pour la Nouvelle-Zlande 15, 20 E tiquette de consommation nergtique des ordinateurs pour la Chine 44, 58 tiquettes, conformit 1, 17 F FCC (Federal Communications Commission) Avis sur les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail 21 avis sur les ordinateurs portables 2 clients lgers et stations de travail 22 cbles pour ordinateurs portables 2 modifications apportes aux ordinateurs portables 2 modifications des ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail 22 I Informations sur le transport arien 28 L loi du Mexique sur l'utilisation durable de l'nergie 51 M matriel lectronique et de la batterie, recyclage 41, 55 70 Index

User Guide Product notice Software terms This user guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. Not all features are available in all editions or versions of Windows. Systems may require upgraded and/or separately purchased hardware, drivers, software or BIOS update to take full advantage of Windows functionality. Windows 10 is automatically updated, which is always enabled. ISP fees may apply and additional requirements may apply over time for updates. See http://www.microsoft.com. To access the latest user guides, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Then select User Guides. By installing, copying, downloading, or otherwise using any software product preinstalled on this computer, you agree to be bound by the terms of the HP End User License Agreement (EULA). If you do not accept these license terms, your sole remedy is to return the entire unused product (hardware and software) within 14 days for a full refund subject to the refund policy of your seller. For any further information or to request a full refund of the price of the computer, please contact your seller. Copyright 2018 HP Development Company, L.P. AMD is a trademark of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by HP Inc. under license. Intel, Celeron, and Pentium are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. Windows is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: August 2018 Document Part Number: L11079-001 Safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to come into contact with the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950-1). iii iv Safety warning notice Processor configuration setting (select products only) IMPORTANT: Select computer products are configured with an Intel Pentium N35xx/N37xx series or a Celeron N28xx/N29xx/N30xx/N31xx series processor and a Windows operating system. If your computer is configured as described, do not change the processor configuration setting in msconfig.exe from 4 or 2 processors to 1 processor. If you do so, your computer will not restart. You will have to perform a factory reset to restore the original settings. v vi Processor configuration setting (select products only) Table of contents 1 Welcome ....................................................................................................................................................... 1 Finding information ............................................................................................................................................... 2 2 Components .................................................................................................................................................. 3 Locating hardware ................................................................................................................................................. 3 Locating software .................................................................................................................................................. 3 Labels ..................................................................................................................................................................... 4 3 Network connections ..................................................................................................................................... 6 Connecting to a wireless network ......................................................................................................................... 6 Using the wireless controls ................................................................................................................. 6 Wireless button ................................................................................................................. 6 Operating system controls ............................................................................................... 6 Connecting to a WLAN ......................................................................................................................... 7 Using HP Mobile Broadband (select products only) ............................................................................ 7 Using GPS (select products only) ........................................................................................................ 8 Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select products only) ................................................................... 8 Connecting Bluetooth devices .......................................................................................... 8 Using NFC to share information (select products only) ...................................................................... 8 Sharing .............................................................................................................................. 9 Connecting to a wired network .............................................................................................................................. 9 Connecting to a local area network (LAN) (select products only) ....................................................... 9 Using HP LAN-Wireless Protection (select products only) ................................................................ 10 Turning on and customizing HP LAN-Wireless Protection ............................................. 10 Using HP MAC Address Pass Through to identify your computer on a network (select products only) ............. 11 Customizing MAC Address Pass Through .......................................................................................... 11 4 Navigating the screen .................................................................................................................................. 12 Using TouchPad and touch screen gestures ........................................................................................................ 12 Tap ..................................................................................................................................................... 12 Two-finger pinch zoom ..................................................................................................................... 13 Two-finger slide (TouchPad only) ..................................................................................................... 13 Two-finger tap (TouchPad only) ........................................................................................................ 13 Four-finger tap (TouchPad only) ....................................................................................................... 13 Three-finger swipe (TouchPad only) ................................................................................................. 14 One-finger slide (touch screen only) ................................................................................................. 15 vii Using an optional keyboard or mouse ................................................................................................................. 15 Using an on-screen keyboard (select products only) .......................................................................................... 15 5 Entertainment features ............................................................................................................................... 16 Using a camera (select products only) ................................................................................................................ 16 Using audio .......................................................................................................................................................... 16 Connecting speakers ......................................................................................................................... 16 Connecting headphones .................................................................................................................... 16 Connecting a microphone ................................................................................................................. 16 Connecting headsets ......................................................................................................................... 17 Using sound settings ......................................................................................................................... 17 Using video .......................................................................................................................................................... 17 Connecting a DisplayPort device using a USB Type-C cable (select products only) ......................... 17 Connecting a Thunderbolt device using a USB Type-C cable (select products only) ....................... 18 Connecting video devices by using a VGA cable (select products only) ........................................... 19 Connecting video devices using an HDMI cable (select products only) ............................................ 20 Setting up HDMI audio .................................................................................................... 21 Connecting a Thunderbolt DisplayPort device ................................................................................. 21 Discovering and connecting wired displays using MultiStream Transport ...................................... 22 Connect displays to computers with AMD or Nvidia graphics (with an optional hub) ... 22 Connect displays to computers with Intel graphics (with an optional hub) ................... 23 Connect displays to computers with Intel graphics (with a built-in hub) ...................... 23 Discovering and connecting to Miracast-compatible wireless displays (select products only) ...... 24 Discovering and connecting to Intel WiDi certified displays (select Intel products only) ................ 24 Using data transfer .............................................................................................................................................. 24 Connecting devices to a USB Type-C port (select products only) ..................................................... 24 6 Managing power .......................................................................................................................................... 26 Using Sleep and Hibernation ............................................................................................................................... 26 Initiating and exiting Sleep ............................................................................................................... 26 Initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) ................................................................. 27 Shutting down (turning off) the computer .......................................................................................................... 27 Using the Power icon and Power Options ............................................................................................................ 28 Running on battery power ................................................................................................................................... 28 Using HP Fast Charge (select products only) .................................................................................... 28 Displaying battery charge ................................................................................................................. 29 Finding battery information in HP Support Assistant (select products only) .................................. 29 Conserving battery power ................................................................................................................. 29 Identifying low battery levels ........................................................................................................... 29 Resolving a low battery level ............................................................................................................ 30 Resolving a low battery level when external power is available ................................... 30 viii Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available ................................. 30 Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation .................. 30 7 Security ...................................................................................................................................................... 31 Protecting the computer ..................................................................................................................................... 31 Using passwords .................................................................................................................................................. 31 Setting passwords in Windows ......................................................................................................... 32 Setting passwords in Computer Setup ............................................................................................. 33 Managing a BIOS administrator password ........................................................................................ 33 Entering a BIOS administrator password ....................................................................... 34 Using DriveLock Security Options ..................................................................................................... 35 Selecting Automatic DriveLock (select products only) ................................................... 35 Enabling Automatic DriveLock ..................................................................... 35 Disabling Automatic DriveLock .................................................................... 35 Entering an Automatic DriveLock password ................................................ 36 Selecting manual DriveLock ........................................................................................... 36 Setting a DriveLock master password ......................................................... 37 Enabling DriveLock and setting a DriveLock user password ......................................... 37 Disabling DriveLock ........................................................................................................ 38 Entering a DriveLock password ...................................................................................... 38 Changing a DriveLock password ..................................................................................... 38 Windows Hello (select products only) ................................................................................................................. 39 Using antivirus software ...................................................................................................................................... 39 Using firewall software ........................................................................................................................................ 39 Installing software updates ................................................................................................................................. 40 Using HP Client Security (select products only) .................................................................................................. 40 Using HP Device as a Service (HP DaaS) (select products only) .......................................................................... 40 Using an optional security cable (select products only) ..................................................................................... 40 Using a fingerprint reader (select products only) ............................................................................................... 41 Locating the fingerprint reader ......................................................................................................... 41 8 Maintenance ............................................................................................................................................... 42 Improving performance ....................................................................................................................................... 42 Using Disk Defragmenter .................................................................................................................. 42 Using Disk Cleanup ............................................................................................................................ 42 Using HP 3D DriveGuard (select products only) ................................................................................ 43 Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status .............................................................................. 43 Updating programs and drivers .......................................................................................................................... 43 Cleaning your computer ...................................................................................................................................... 43 Cleaning procedures .......................................................................................................................... 44 Cleaning the display ........................................................................................................ 44 ix Cleaning the sides or cover ............................................................................................. 44 Cleaning the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse (select products only) ............................. 44 Traveling with or shipping your computer .......................................................................................................... 44 9 Backing up, restoring, and recovering ........................................................................................................... 46 Using Windows tools ........................................................................................................................................... 46 Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) ........................................................................................... 46 Using HP Recovery Manager to create recovery media .................................................................... 47 Before you begin ............................................................................................................. 47 Creating the recovery media ........................................................................................... 47 Using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create recovery media .......................................... 48 Restoring and recovery ........................................................................................................................................ 48 Restoring, resetting, and refreshing using Windows tools .............................................................. 48 Restoring using HP Recovery Manager and the HP Recovery partition ........................................... 48 Recovering using HP Recovery Manager ........................................................................................... 48 Recovering using the HP Recovery partition (select products only) ................................................ 49 Recovering using HP Recovery media ............................................................................................... 49 Changing the computer boot order ................................................................................................... 50 Removing the HP Recovery partition (select products only) ............................................................ 50 10 Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start ............................................................................................ 51 Using Computer Setup ......................................................................................................................................... 51 Starting Computer Setup .................................................................................................................. 51 Navigating and selecting in Computer Setup ................................................................................... 51 Restoring factory settings in Computer Setup ................................................................................. 51 Updating the BIOS ............................................................................................................................. 52 Determining the BIOS version ......................................................................................... 52 Downloading a BIOS update ........................................................................................... 52 Changing the boot order using the f9 prompt .................................................................................. 53 TPM BIOS settings (select products only) ........................................................................................................... 53 Using HP Sure Start (select products only) ......................................................................................................... 54 11 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics .............................................................................................................. 55 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows (select products only) ................................................................. 55 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows ....................................................................... 55 Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows version ....................... 56 Downloading HP Hardware Diagnostics Windows by product name or number

(select products only) ..................................................................................................... 56 Installing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows ............................................................................. 56 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI ............................................................................................................. 56 x Starting HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI ....................................................................................... 57 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive .............................................. 57 Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version .............................. 57 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number

(select products only) ..................................................................................................... 57 Using Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings (select products only) ............................................. 58 Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI ................................................................. 58 Downloading the latest Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version ................. 58 Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number ............................................................................................................................ 58 Customizing Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings .................................................... 58 12 Specifications ............................................................................................................................................ 60 Input power .......................................................................................................................................................... 60 Operating environment ....................................................................................................................................... 61 13 Electrostatic Discharge .............................................................................................................................. 62 14 Accessibility .............................................................................................................................................. 63 Accessibility ......................................................................................................................................................... 63 Finding the technology tools you need ............................................................................................ 63 Our commitment ............................................................................................................................... 63 International Association of Accessibility Professionals (IAAP) ....................................................... 63 Finding the best assistive technology .............................................................................................. 64 Assessing your needs ..................................................................................................... 64 Accessibility for HP products .......................................................................................... 64 Standards and legislation .................................................................................................................................... 65 Standards .......................................................................................................................................... 65 Mandate 376 EN 301 549 ............................................................................................ 65 Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) ................................................................ 65 Legislation and regulations .............................................................................................................. 65 United States ................................................................................................................... 66 21st Century Communications and Video Accessibility Act (CVAA) ............................... 66 Canada ............................................................................................................................. 66 Europe ............................................................................................................................. 67 United Kingdom .............................................................................................................. 67 Australia .......................................................................................................................... 67 Worldwide ....................................................................................................................... 67 Useful accessibility resources and links .............................................................................................................. 68 Organizations .................................................................................................................................... 68 Educational institutions .................................................................................................................... 68 xi Other disability resources ................................................................................................................. 68 HP links .............................................................................................................................................. 68 Contacting support .............................................................................................................................................. 69 xii 1 Welcome After you set up and register the computer, we recommend the following steps to get the most out of your smart investment:

TIP: To quickly return to the computer Start screen from an open app or the Windows desktop, press the Windows key previous screen. on your keyboard. Pressing the Windows key again will return you to the Connect to the InternetSet up your wired or wireless network so that you can connect to the Internet. For more information, see Network connections on page 6. Update your antivirus softwareProtect your computer from damage caused by viruses. The software is preinstalled on the computer. For more information, see Using antivirus software on page 39. Get to know your computerLearn about your computer features. See Components on page 3 and Navigating the screen on page 12 for additional information. Find installed softwareAccess a list of the software preinstalled on the computer:

Select the Start button. or Right-click the Start button, and then select Apps and Features. Back up your hard drive by creating recovery discs or a recovery USB flash drive. See Backing up, restoring, and recovering on page 46. 1 Finding information To locate resources that provide product details, how-to information, and more, use this table. Contents Overview of computer setup and features Online chat with an HP technician Support telephone numbers Replacement parts videos (select products only) Maintenance and service guides HP service center locations Proper workstation setup Guidelines for posture and work habits that increase your comfort and decrease your risk of injury Electrical and mechanical safety information Important regulatory notices, including information about proper battery disposal, if needed. Specific warranty information about this computer Resource Setup Instructions HP support For HP support, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Safety & Comfort Guide To access this guide:

Select the Start button, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. or Go to http://www.hp.com/ergo. IMPORTANT: You must be connected to the Internet to access the latest version of the user guide. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices To access this document:

Select the Start button, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. Limited Warranty*

To access this document:

Select the Start button, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. or Go to http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments. IMPORTANT: You must be connected to the Internet to access the latest version of the user guide.

*You can find your HP Limited Warranty located with the user guides on your product and/or on the CD or DVD provided in the box. In some countries or regions, HP may provide a printed warranty in the box. For countries or regions where the warranty is not provided in printed format, you can request a copy from http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments. For products purchased in Asia Pacific, you can write to HP at POD, PO Box 161, Kitchener Road Post Office, Singapore 912006. Include your product name, and your name, phone number, and postal address. 2 Chapter 1 Welcome 2 Components Locating hardware To find out what hardware is installed on your computer:

Type device manager in the taskbar search box, and then select the Device Manager app. A list displays all the devices installed on your computer. For information about system hardware components and the system BIOS version number, press fn+esc

(select products only). Locating software To find out what software is installed on your computer:

Select the Start button. or Right-click the Start button, and then select Apps and Features. Locating hardware 3 Labels The labels affixed to the computer provide information you may need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the computer. Labels may be in paper form or imprinted on the product. IMPORTANT: Check the following locations for the labels described in this section: the bottom of the computer, inside the battery bay, under the service door, on the back of the display, or on the bottom of a tablet kickstand. Service labelProvides important information to identify your computer. When contacting support, you may be asked for the serial number, the product number, or the model number. Locate this information before you contact support. Your service label will resemble one of the examples shown below. Refer to the illustration that most closely matches the service label on your computer. Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) HP product name Model number Product ID Serial number Warranty period Component

(1)

(2) HP product name Product ID 4 Chapter 2 Components Component

(3)

(4) Serial number Warranty period Regulatory label(s)Provide(s) regulatory information about the computer. Wireless certification label(s)Provide(s) information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings for the countries or regions in which the devices have been approved for use. Labels 5 3 Network connections Your computer can travel with you wherever you go. But even at home, you can explore the globe and access information from millions of websites using your computer and a wired or wireless network connection. This chapter will help you get connected to that world. Connecting to a wireless network Your computer may be equipped with one or more of the following wireless devices:

WLAN deviceConnects the computer to wireless local area networks (commonly referred to as Wi-Fi networks, wireless LANs, or WLANs) in corporate offices, your home, and public places such as airports, restaurants, coffee shops, hotels, and universities. In a WLAN, the mobile wireless device in your computer communicates with a wireless router or a wireless access point. HP Mobile Broadband Module (select products only)A wireless wide area network (WWAN) device that gives you wireless connectivity over a much larger area. Mobile network operators install base stations

(similar to cell phone towers) throughout large geographic areas, effectively providing coverage across entire states, regions, or even countries. Bluetooth deviceCreates a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-enabled devices such as computers, phones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. In a PAN, each device communicates directly with other devices, and devices must be relatively close togethertypically within 10 meters (approximately 33 feet) of each other. Using the wireless controls You can control the wireless devices in your computer using one or more of these features:

Wireless button (also called airplane mode key or wireless key) (referred to in this chapter as wireless button) Operating system controls Wireless button The computer may have a wireless button, one or more wireless devices, and one or two wireless lights. All the wireless devices on your computer are enabled at the factory. The wireless light indicates the overall power state of your wireless devices, not the status of individual devices. Operating system controls The Network and Sharing Center allows you to set up a connection or network, connect to a network, and diagnose and repair network problems. To use operating system controls:

1. Type control panel in the taskbar search box, and then select Control Panel. Select Network and Internet, and then select Network and Sharing Center. 2. or 6 Chapter 3 Network connections On the taskbar, select the network status icon, and then select Network & Internet settings. Connecting to a WLAN NOTE: When you are setting up Internet access in your home, you must establish an account with an Internet service provider (ISP). To purchase Internet service and a modem, contact a local ISP. The ISP will help set up the modem, install a network cable to connect your wireless router to the modem, and test the Internet service. To connect to a WLAN, follow these steps:

1. Be sure that the WLAN device is on. 2. On the taskbar, select the network status icon, and then connect to one of the available networks. If the WLAN is a security-enabled WLAN, you are prompted to enter a security code. Enter the code, and then select Next to complete the connection. NOTE:

NOTE:

1. 2. 3. If no WLANs are listed, you may be out of range of a wireless router or access point. If you do not see the WLAN you want to connect to:

On the taskbar, right-click the network status icon, and then select Open Network & Internet settings. or On the taskbar, select the network status icon, and then select Network & Internet settings. Under the Network & Internet Status section, select Network and Sharing Center. Select Set up a new connection or network. A list of options is displayed, allowing you to manually search for and connect to a network or to create a new network connection. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the connection. 3. After the connection is made, select the network status icon at the far right of the taskbar, to verify the name and status of the connection. NOTE: The functional range (how far your wireless signals travel) depends on WLAN implementation, router manufacturer, and interference from other electronic devices or structural barriers such as walls and floors. Using HP Mobile Broadband (select products only) Your HP Mobile Broadband computer has built-in support for mobile broadband service. Your new computer, when used with a mobile operators network, gives you the freedom to connect to the Internet, send e-mail, or connect to your corporate network without the need for Wi-Fi hotspots. You might need the HP Mobile Broadband Module IMEI and/or MEID number to activate mobile broadband service. The number may be printed on a label located on the bottom of your computer, inside the battery bay, under the service door, or on the back of the display. or 1. 2. 3. On the taskbar, select the network status icon. Select Network & Internet settings. Under the Network & Internet section, select Cellular, and then select Advanced Options. Connecting to a wireless network 7 Some mobile network operators require the use of a SIM card. A SIM card contains basic information about you, such as a personal identification number (PIN), as well as network information. Some computers include a SIM card that is preinstalled. If the SIM card is not preinstalled, it may be provided in the HP Mobile Broadband information provided with your computer or the mobile network operator may provide it separately from the computer. For information about HP Mobile Broadband and how to activate service with a preferred mobile network operator, see the HP Mobile Broadband information included with your computer. Using GPS (select products only) Your computer may be equipped with a Global Positioning System (GPS) device. GPS satellites deliver location, speed, and direction information to GPS-equipped systems. To enable GPS, make sure location is enabled under the Windows privacy setting. 1. Type location in the taskbar search box, and then select Location privacy settings. Follow the on-screen instructions for using location settings. 2. Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select products only) Computers (desktop, notebook) Phones (cellular, cordless, smartphone) A Bluetooth device provides short-range wireless communications that replace the physical cable connections that traditionally link electronic devices such as the following:

Audio devices (headset, speakers) Imaging devices (printer, camera) External keyboard Mouse Connecting Bluetooth devices Before you can use a Bluetooth device, you must establish a Bluetooth connection. 1. Type bluetooth in the taskbar search box, and then select Bluetooth and other devices settings. Turn on Bluetooth, if it is not already turned on. Select Add Bluetooth or other device, and then in the Add a device dialog box, select Bluetooth. Select your device from the list, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 2. 3. 4. NOTE:

If the device requires verification, a pairing code is displayed. On the device you are adding, follow the on-screen instructions to verify that the code on your device matches the pairing code. For more information, refer to the documentation provided with the device. NOTE:

devices may have additional requirements; refer to the documentation provided with the device. If your device does not appear in the list, be sure that Bluetooth on that device is turned on. Some Using NFC to share information (select products only) Your computer supports Near Field Communication (NFC), which allows you to wirelessly share information between two NFC-enabled devices. Information is transferred by tapping the tapping area (antenna) of the 8 Chapter 3 Network connections computer with the antenna of your phone or other device. With NFC and supported apps, you can share websites, transfer contact information, transfer payments, and print on NFC-enabled printers. NOTE: To locate the tapping area on your computer, see Components on page 3. Sharing 1. 2. 3. Confirm that the NFC function is enabled. a. Type wireless in the taskbar search box, and then select Turn wireless devices on or off. Confirm that the selection for NFC is On. b. Tap the NFC tapping area with an NFC-enabled device. You may hear a sound when the devices connect. NOTE: To find the location of the antenna on the other NFC device, refer to your device instructions. Follow any on-screen instructions to continue. Connecting to a wired network Select products may allow wired connections: local area network (LAN) and modem connection. A LAN connection uses a network cable and is much faster than a modem, which uses a telephone cable. Both cables are sold separately. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not plug a modem cable or telephone cable into an RJ-45 (network) jack. Connecting to a local area network (LAN) (select products only) Use a LAN connection if you want to connect the computer directly to a router in your home (instead of working wirelessly), or if you want to connect to an existing network at your office. NOTE: A feature called HP LAN-Wireless Protection may be enabled on your computer. It closes your wireless (Wi-Fi) or WWAN connection when you connect directly to a LAN. For more information about HP LAN-

Wireless Protection, see Using HP LAN-Wireless Protection (select products only) on page 10. If there is no RJ-45 port on the computer, connecting to a LAN requires an 8-pin, RJ-45 network cable or an optional docking device or expansion product. To connect the network cable, follow these steps:

1. Plug the network cable into the network jack (1) on the computer or on an optional docking device or expansion product. Connecting to a wired network 9 2. Plug the other end of the network cable into a network wall jack (2) or router. If the network cable contains noise suppression circuitry (3), which prevents interference from NOTE:

TV and radio reception, orient the circuitry end of the cable toward the computer. Using HP LAN-Wireless Protection (select products only) In a LAN environment, you can set HP LAN-Wireless Protection to safeguard your LAN network from unauthorized wireless access. When HP LAN-Wireless Protection is enabled, the WLAN (Wi-Fi) or WWAN connection is turned off when the computer is connected directly to a LAN. Turning on and customizing HP LAN-Wireless Protection 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Connect a network cable to the network jack on the computer, or on an optional docking device or expansion product. Start Computer Setup (BIOS). Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Tablets without keyboards:

Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed. Tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. Select Advanced, and then select Built-in Device Options. Select the check box for LAN/WLAN Auto Switching and/or LAN/WWAN Auto Switching to turn off WLAN and/or WWAN connections when connected to a LAN network. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. 10 Chapter 3 Network connections Using HP MAC Address Pass Through to identify your computer on a network (select products only) MAC Address Pass Through provides a customizable way of identifying your computer and its communications on networks. This system MAC address provides unique identification even when your computer is connected through an Ethernet adapter. This address is enabled by default. Customizing MAC Address Pass Through 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start Computer Setup (BIOS). Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Tablets without keyboards:

Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed. Tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. Select Advanced, and then select MAC Address Pass Through. In the box to the right of Host Based MAC Address, select either System Address to enable MAC address Pass Through or Custom Address to customize the address. If you selected Custom, select MAC ADDRESS, enter your customized system MAC address, and then press enter to save the address. If the computer has an embedded LAN and you would like to use the embedded MAC address as the system MAC address, select Reuse Embedded LAN Address. or Select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Using HP MAC Address Pass Through to identify your computer on a network (select products only) 11 4 Navigating the screen Use touch gestures on the TouchPad Use touch gestures directly on the computer screen You can navigate the computer screen in one or more of the following ways:

Use an optional mouse or keyboard (purchased separately) Use an on-screen keyboard Use a pointing stick Using TouchPad and touch screen gestures The TouchPad helps you navigate the computer screen and control the pointer using simple touch gestures. You can also use the left and right TouchPad buttons as you would use the corresponding buttons on an external mouse. To navigate a touch screen (select products only), touch the screen directly using gestures described in this chapter. You can also customize gestures and view demonstrations of how they work. Type control panel in the taskbar search box, select Control Panel, and then select Hardware and Sound. Under Devices and Printers, select Mouse. NOTE: Unless noted, gestures can be used on the TouchPad or a touch screen (select products only). Tap Use the tap/double-tap gesture to select or open an item on the screen. Point to an item on the screen, and then tap one finger on the TouchPad zone or touch screen to select the item. Double-tap an item to open it. 12 Chapter 4 Navigating the screen Two-finger pinch zoom Use the two-finger pinch zoom to zoom out or in on images or text. Zoom out by placing two fingers apart on the TouchPad zone or touch screen and then moving your fingers together. Zoom in by placing two fingers together on the TouchPad zone or touch screen and then moving your fingers apart. Two-finger slide (TouchPad only) Use the two-finger slide to move up, down, or sideways on a page or image. Place two fingers slightly apart on the TouchPad zone and then drag them up, down, left, or right. Two-finger tap (TouchPad only) Use the two-finger tap to open the menu for an object on the screen. NOTE: The two-finger tap performs the same function as right-clicking with the mouse. Tap two fingers on the TouchPad zone to open the options menu for the selected object. Four-finger tap (TouchPad only) Use the four-finger tap to open the action center. Using TouchPad and touch screen gestures 13 Tap four fingers on the Touchpad to open the action center and view current settings and notifications. Three-finger swipe (TouchPad only) Swipe 3 fingers away from you to see all open windows. Use the three-finger swipe to view open windows and to switch between open windows and the desktop. Swipe 3 fingers left or right to switch between open windows. Swipe 3 fingers toward you to show the desktop. 14 Chapter 4 Navigating the screen One-finger slide (touch screen only) Use the one-finger slide to pan or scroll through lists and pages, or to move an object. To scroll across the screen, lightly slide one finger across the screen in the direction you want to move. To move an object, press and hold your finger on an object, and then drag your finger to move the object. Using an optional keyboard or mouse An optional keyboard or mouse allows you to type, select items, scroll, and perform the same functions as you do using touch gestures. The keyboard also allows you to use action keys and hot keys to perform specific functions. Using an on-screen keyboard (select products only) 1. 2. To display an on-screen keyboard, tap the keyboard icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Begin typing. NOTE: Suggested words may be displayed above the on-screen keyboard. Tap a word to select it. NOTE: Action keys and hot keys do not display or function on the on-screen keyboard. Using an optional keyboard or mouse 15 5 Entertainment features Use your HP computer for business or pleasure to meet with others via the camera, mix audio and video, or connect external devices like a projector, monitor, TV, or speakers. See Components on page 3 to locate the audio, video and camera features on your computer. Using a camera (select products only) Your computer has a camera (integrated camera) that records video and captures photographs. Some models allow you to video conference and chat online using streaming video. To access the camera, type camera in the taskbar search box, and then select Camera from the list of applications. Using audio You can download and listen to music, stream audio content (including radio) from the web, record audio, or mix audio and video to create multimedia. You can also play music CDs on the computer (on select models) or attach an external optical drive to play CDs. To enhance your listening enjoyment, attach headphones or speakers. Connecting speakers You can attach wired speakers to your computer by connecting them to a USB port or to the audio-out

(headphone)/audio-in (microphone) combo jack on your computer or on a docking station. To connect wireless speakers to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. To connect high-definition speakers to the computer, see Setting up HDMI audio on page 21. Before connecting speakers, lower the volume setting. Connecting headphones WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, lower the volume setting before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To access this guide:

Select the Start button, select HP, and then select HP Documentation. You can connect wired headphones to the headphone jack or to the audio-out (headphone)/audio-in

(microphone) combo jack on your computer. To connect wireless headphones to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. Connecting a microphone To record audio, connect a microphone to the microphone jack on the computer. For best results when recording, speak directly into the microphone and record sound in a setting free of background noise. 16 Chapter 5 Entertainment features Connecting headsets WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, lower the volume setting before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To access this guide:

Select the Start button, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. Headphones combined with a microphone are called headsets. You can connect wired headsets to the audio-

out (headphone)/audio-in (microphone) combo jack on your computer. To connect wireless headsets to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. Using sound settings Use sound settings to adjust system volume, change system sounds, or manage audio devices. To view or change sound settings:

Type control panel in the taskbar search box, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, and then select Sound. Your computer may include an enhanced sound system by Bang & Olufsen, DTS, Beats audio, or another provider. As a result, your computer may include advanced audio features that can be controlled through an audio control panel specific to your audio system. Use the audio control panel to view and control audio settings. Type control panel in the taskbar search box, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, and then select the audio control panel specific to your system. Using video Your computer is a powerful video device that enables you to watch streaming video from your favorite websites and download video and movies to watch on your computer when you are not connected to a network. To enhance your viewing enjoyment, use one of the video ports on the computer to connect an external monitor, projector, or TV. IMPORTANT: Be sure that the external device is connected to the correct port on the computer, using the correct cable. Follow the device manufacturer's instructions. For information on using your video features, refer to HP Support Assistant. Connecting a DisplayPort device using a USB Type-C cable (select products only) NOTE: To connect a USB Type-C DisplayPort device to your computer, you need a USB Type-C cable, purchased separately. To see video or high-resolution display output on an external DisplayPort device, connect the DisplayPort device according to the following instructions:

1. Connect one end of the USB Type-C cable to the USB SuperSpeed and DisplayPort port on the computer. Using video 17 2. 3. Connect the other end of the cable to the external DisplayPort device. Press f1 to alternate the computer screen image between 4 display states:

PC screen only: View the screen image on the computer only. Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across both the computer and external device. Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only. Each time you press f1 the display state changes. NOTE:

For best results, especially if you choose the "Extend" option, increase the screen resolution of the external device, as follows. Select the Start button, select Settings, and then select System. Under Display, select the appropriate resolution, and then select Keep changes. Connecting a Thunderbolt device using a USB Type-C cable (select products only) NOTE: To connect a USB Type-C Thunderbolt device to your computer, you need a USB Type-C cable, purchased separately. To see video or high-resolution display output on an external Thunderbolt device, connect the Thunderbolt device according to the following instructions:

1. Connect one end of the USB Type-C cable to the USB Type-C Thunderbolt port on the computer. 18 Chapter 5 Entertainment features 2. 3. Connect the other end of the cable to the external Thunderbolt device. Press fn+f4 to alternate the computer screen image between 4 display states:

PC screen only: View the screen image on the computer only. Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across both the computer and external device. Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only. Each time you press fn+f4 the display state changes. NOTE:

For best results, especially if you choose the "Extend" option, increase the screen resolution of the external device, as follows. Select the Start button, select Settings, and then select System. Under Display, select the appropriate resolution, and then select Keep changes. Connecting video devices by using a VGA cable (select products only) NOTE: To connect a VGA video device to your computer, you need an VGA cable, purchased separately. To see the computer screen image on an external VGA monitor or projected for a presentation, connect a monitor or projector to the computer's VGA port. 1. Connect the VGA cable from the monitor or projector to the VGA port on the computer as shown. Using video 19 2. Press f4 to alternate the screen image between 4 display states:

PC screen only: View the screen image on the computer only. Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and the external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across both the computer and the external device. Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only. Each time you press f4, the display state changes. NOTE:

For best results, especially if you choose the "Extend" option, increase the screen resolution of the external device, as follows. Select the Start button, select Settings, and then select System. Under Display, select the appropriate resolution, and then select Keep changes. Connecting video devices using an HDMI cable (select products only) NOTE: To connect an HDMI device to your computer, you need an HDMI cable, purchased separately. To see the computer screen image on a high-definition TV or monitor, connect the high-definition device according to the following instructions:

1. Connect one end of the HDMI cable to the HDMI port on the computer. 20 Chapter 5 Entertainment features 2. 3. Connect the other end of the cable to the high-definition TV or monitor. Press f4 to alternate the computer screen image between 4 display states:

PC screen only: View the screen image on the computer only. Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and the external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across both the computer and the external device. Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only. Each time you press f4, the display state changes. NOTE:

For best results, especially if you choose the "Extend" option, increase the screen resolution of the external device, as follows. Select the Start button, select Settings, and then select System. Under Display, select the appropriate resolution, and then select Keep changes. Setting up HDMI audio HDMI is the only video interface that supports high-definition video and audio. After you connect an HDMI TV to the computer, you can then turn on HDMI audio by following these steps:

1. Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then select Playback devices. On the Playback tab, select the name of the digital output device. Click Set Default, and then click OK. 2. 3. To return the audio stream to the computer speakers:

1. Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then click Playback devices. On the Playback tab, click Speakers. Click Set Default, and then click OK. 2. 3. Connecting a Thunderbolt DisplayPort device The Thunderbolt DisplayPort connects an optional high-resolution display device or a high-performance data device. This port delivers higher performance than the VGA external monitor port and improves digital connectivity. Using video 21 Install all the latest drivers for your Thunderbolt device before connecting the device to the NOTE:

Thunderbolt DisplayPort. Thunderbolt cable and Thunderbolt device (sold separately) must be compatible with Windows. To determine whether your device is Thunderbolt Certified for Windows, go to https://thunderbolttechnology.net/products. 1. Connect one end of the Thunderbolt DisplayPort cable to the Thunderbolt DisplayPort on the computer. 2. 3. Connect the other end of the cable to the digital display device. Press f4 to alternate the computer screen image between 4 display states:

PC screen only: View the screen image on the computer only. Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across both the computer and external device. Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only. Each time you press f4 the display state changes. NOTE:

For best results, especially if you choose the "Extend" option, increase the screen resolution of the external device, as follows. Select the Start button, select Settings, and then select System. Under Display, select the appropriate resolution, and then select Keep changes. Discovering and connecting wired displays using MultiStream Transport MultiStream Transport (MST) allows you to connect multiple wired display devices to your computer by connecting to the VGA or DisplayPorts on your computer and also to the VGA or DisplayPorts on a hub or an external docking station. You can connect in several ways, depending on the type of graphics controller installed on your computer and whether or not your computer includes a built-in hub. Go to Device Manager to find out what hardware is installed on your computer. Type device manager in the taskbar search box, and then select the Device Manager app. A list displays all the devices installed on your computer. Connect displays to computers with AMD or Nvidia graphics (with an optional hub) NOTE: With an AMD graphics controller and optional hub, you can connect up to 6 external display devices. NOTE: With an Nvidia graphics controller and optional hub, you can connect up to 4 external display devices. 22 Chapter 5 Entertainment features To set up multiple display devices, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. Connect an external hub (purchased separately) to the DisplayPort on your computer, using a DP-to-DP cable (purchased separately). Be sure that the hub power adapter is connected to AC power. Connect your external display devices to the VGA ports or DisplayPorts on the hub. To see all of your connected display devices, type device manager in the taskbar search box, and then select the Device Manager app. If you don't see all of your connected displays, be sure that each is connected to the correct port on the hub. NOTE: Multiple display choices include Duplicate, which mirrors your computer screen on all enabled display devices, or Extend, which spans your computer screen across all enabled display devices. Connect displays to computers with Intel graphics (with an optional hub) NOTE: With an Intel graphics controller and optional hub, you can connect up to 3 display devices. To set up multiple display devices, follow these steps:

1. Connect an external hub (purchased separately) to the DisplayPort on your computer, using a DP-to-DP cable (purchased separately). Be sure that the hub power adapter is connected to AC power. Connect your external display devices to the VGA ports or DisplayPorts on the hub. 2. 3. When Windows detects a monitor connected to the DP hub, the DisplayPort Topology Notification dialog box is displayed. Click the appropriate options to configure your displays. Multiple display choices include Duplicate, which mirrors your computer screen on all enabled display devices, or Extend, which extends the screen image across all enabled display devices. NOTE:

If this dialog box does not appear, be sure that each external display device is connected to the correct port on the hub. Select the Start button, select Settings, and then select System. Under Display, select the appropriate resolution, and then select Keep changes. Connect displays to computers with Intel graphics (with a built-in hub) With your internal hub and Intel graphics controller, you can connect up to 3 display devices in the following configurations:

Two 1920 x 1200 DP monitors connected to the computer + one 1920 x 1200 VGA monitor connected to an optional docking station One 2560 x 1600 DP monitor connected to the computer + one 1920 x 1200 VGA monitor connected to an optional docking station To set up multiple display devices, follow these steps:

1. Connect your external display devices to the VGA ports or DisplayPorts (DP) on the computer base or the docking station. 2. When Windows detects a monitor connected to the DP hub, the DisplayPort Topology Notification dialog box is displayed. Click the appropriate options to configure your displays. Multiple display choices include Duplicate, which mirrors your computer screen on all enabled display devices, or Extend, which extends the screen image across all enabled display devices. NOTE:

If this dialog box does not appear, be sure that each external display device is connected to the correct port on the hub. Select the Start button, select Settings, and then select System. Under Display, select the appropriate resolution, and then select Keep changes. Using video 23 Discovering and connecting to Miracast-compatible wireless displays (select products only) NOTE: To learn what type of display you have (Miracast-compatible or Intel WiDi), refer to the documentation that came with your TV or secondary display. To discover and connect to Miracast-compatible wireless displays without leaving your current apps, follow the steps below. To open Miracast:

Type project in the taskbar search box, and then click Project to a second screen. Click Connect to a wireless display, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Discovering and connecting to Intel WiDi certified displays (select Intel products only) Use Intel WiDi to wirelessly project individual files such as photos, music, or videos, or to duplicate your entire computer screen to a TV or a secondary display device. Intel WiDi, a premium Miracast solution, makes it easy and seamless to pair your secondary display device;

provides for full-screen duplication; and improves speed, quality, and scaling. To connect to Intel WiDi certified displays:

Type project in the taskbar search box, and then click Project to a second screen. Click Connect to a wireless display, and then follow the on-screen instructions. To open Intel WiDi:

Type Intel WiDi in the taskbar search box, and then click Intel WiDi. Using data transfer Your computer is a powerful entertainment device that enables you to transfer photos, videos, and movies from your USB devices to view on your computer. To enhance your viewing enjoyment, use one of the USB Type-C ports on the computer to connect a USB device, such as a cell phone, camera, activity tracker, or smartwatch, and transfer the files to your computer. IMPORTANT: Be sure that the external device is connected to the correct port on the computer, using the correct cable. Follow the device manufacturer's instructions. For information on using your USB Type-C features, refer to HP Support Assistant. Connecting devices to a USB Type-C port (select products only) NOTE: To connect a USB Type-C device to your computer, you need a USB Type-C cable, purchased separately. 1. Connect one end of the USB Type-C cable to the USB Type-C port on the computer. 24 Chapter 5 Entertainment features 2. Connect the other end of the cable to the external device. Using data transfer 25 6 Managing power Your computer can operate on either battery power or external power. When the computer is running on battery power and an external power source is not available to charge the battery, it is important to monitor and conserve the battery charge. Some power management features described in this chapter may not be available on your computer. Using Sleep and Hibernation CAUTION: Several well-known vulnerabilities exist when a computer is in the Sleep state. To prevent an unauthorized user from accessing data on your computer, even encrypted data, HP recommends that you always initiate Hibernation instead of Sleep anytime the computer will be out of your physical possession. This practice is particularly important when you travel with your computer. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of possible audio and video degradation, loss of audio or video playback functionality, or loss of information, do not initiate Sleep while reading from or writing to a disc or an external media card. Windows has two power-saving states, Sleep and Hibernation. SleepThe Sleep state is automatically initiated after a period of inactivity. Your work is saved to memory, allowing you to resume your work very quickly. You can also initiate Sleep manually. For more information, see Initiating and exiting Sleep on page 26. HibernationThe Hibernation state is automatically initiated if the battery reaches a critical level or the computer has been in the Sleep state for an extended period of time. In the Hibernation state, your work is saved to a hibernation file and the computer powers down. You can also initiate Hibernation manually. For more information, see Initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) on page 27. Initiating and exiting Sleep Select the Start button, select the Power icon, and then select Sleep. Close the display (select products only). You can initiate Sleep in any of the following ways:

Briefly press the power button (select products only). Press the Sleep hot key (select products only); for example, fn+f1 or fn+f12. Briefly press the power button. You can exit Sleep in any of the following ways:

Tap the TouchPad (select products only). Press a key on the keyboard (select products only). If the computer is closed, raise the display (select products only). When the computer exits Sleep, your work returns to the screen. NOTE:

before your work returns to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on exiting Sleep, you must enter your Windows password 26 Chapter 6 Managing power Initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) You can enable user-initiated Hibernation and change other power settings and timeouts using Power Options. 1. 2. 3. Right-click the Power icon

, and then select Power Options. In the left pane, select Choose what the power buttons do (wording may vary by product). Depending on your product, you can enable Hibernation for battery power or external power in any of the following ways:

Power buttonUnder Power and sleep buttons and lid settings (wording may vary by product), select When I press the power button, and then select Hibernate. Sleep button (select products only)Under Power and sleep buttons and lid settings (wording may vary by product), select When I press the sleep button, and then select Hibernate. Lid (select products only)Under Power and sleep buttons and lid settings (wording may vary by product), select When I close the lid, and then select Hibernate. Power menuSelect Change Settings that are currently unavailable, and then, under Shutdown settings, select the Hibernate check box. The Power menu can be accessed by selecting the Start button. Select Save changes. 4. To initiate Hibernation, use the method that you enabled in step 3. To exit Hibernation, briefly press the power button. NOTE:

password before your work returns to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on exiting Hibernation, you must enter your Windows Shutting down (turning off) the computer CAUTION: Unsaved information is lost when the computer shuts down. Be sure to save your work before shutting down the computer. The Shut down command closes all open programs, including the operating system, and then turns off the display and the computer. Shut down the computer when it will be unused and disconnected from external power for an extended period. The recommended procedure is to use the Windows Shut down command. NOTE:

pressing the power button. If the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation, first exit Sleep or Hibernation by briefly 1. 2. Save your work and close all open programs. Select the Start button, select the Power icon, and then select Shut down. Shutting down (turning off) the computer 27 If the computer is unresponsive and you are unable to use the preceding shutdown procedures, try the following emergency procedures in the sequence provided:

Press ctrl+alt+delete, select the Power icon, and then select Shut down. Press and hold the power button for at least 10 seconds. If your computer has a user-replaceable battery (select products only), disconnect the computer from external power, and then remove the battery. Using the Power icon and Power Options The Power icon is located on the Windows taskbar. The Power icon allows you to quickly access power settings and view the remaining battery charge. To view the percentage of remaining battery charge, place the mouse pointer over the Power icon

. To use Power Options, rightclick the Power icon

, and then select Power Options. Different Power icons indicate whether the computer is running on battery or external power. Placing the mouse pointer over the icon reveals a message if the battery has reached a low or critical battery level. Running on battery power WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased from HP. When a charged battery is in the computer and the computer is not plugged into external power, the computer runs on battery power. When the computer is off and unplugged from external power, the battery in the computer slowly discharges. The computer displays a message when the battery reaches a low or critical battery level. Computer battery life varies, depending on power management settings, programs running on the computer, screen brightness, external devices connected to the computer, and other factors. NOTE: When you disconnect external power, the display brightness is automatically decreased to conserve battery charge. Select computer products can switch between graphic controllers to conserve battery charge. Using HP Fast Charge (select products only) The HP Fast Charge feature allows you to quickly charge your computer battery. Charging time may vary by

+/- 10%. Depending on your computer model and the HP AC adapter provided with your computer, HP Fast Charge operates in one or more of the following ways:

When the remaining battery charge is between zero and 50%, the battery will charge to 50% of full capacity in no more than 30 to 45 minutes, depending on your computer model. When the remaining battery charge is between zero and 90%, the battery will charge to 90% of full capacity in no more than 90 minutes. To use HP Fast Charge, shut down your computer, and then connect the AC adapter to your computer and to external power. 28 Chapter 6 Managing power Displaying battery charge To view the percentage of remaining battery charge, place the mouse pointer over the Power icon

. Finding battery information in HP Support Assistant (select products only) To access battery information:

1. 2. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. Select Troubleshooting and fixes, and then in the Diagnostics section, select HP Battery Check. If HP Battery Check indicates that your battery should be replaced, contact support. HP Support Assistant provides the following tools and information about the battery:

Information about battery types, specifications, life cycles, and capacity HP Battery Check Conserving battery power To conserve battery power and maximize battery life:

Lower the brightness of the display. Select the Power saver setting in Power Options. Turn off wireless devices when you are not using them. Disconnect unused external devices that are not plugged into an external power source, such as an external hard drive connected to a USB port. Stop, disable, or remove any external media cards that you are not using. Before you leave your work, initiate Sleep or shut down the computer. Identifying low battery levels When a battery that is the sole power source for the computer reaches a low or critical battery level, the following behavior occurs:

The battery light (select products only) indicates a low or critical battery level. or The Power icon shows a low or critical battery notification. NOTE:

on page 28. For additional information about the Power icon, see Using the Power icon and Power Options Running on battery power 29 The computer takes the following actions for a critical battery level:

If Hibernation is disabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer remains briefly in the Sleep state and then shuts down and loses any unsaved information. If Hibernation is enabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer initiates Hibernation. Resolving a low battery level Resolving a low battery level when external power is available Connect one of the following to the computer and to external power:

Optional power adapter purchased as an accessory from HP Optional docking device or expansion product AC adapter Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available Save your work and shut down the computer. Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation 1. 2. Connect the AC adapter to the computer and to external power. Exit Hibernation by pressing the power button. 30 Chapter 6 Managing power 7 Security Protecting the computer Standard security features provided by the Windows operating system and the Windows Computer Setup utility (BIOS, which runs under any operating system) can protect your personal settings and data from a variety of risks. NOTE: Security solutions are designed to act as deterrents. These deterrents may not prevent a product from being mishandled or stolen. NOTE: Before you send your computer for service, back up and delete confidential files, and remove all password settings. NOTE: Some features listed in this chapter may not be available on your computer. NOTE: Your computer supports Computrace, which is an online security-based tracking and recovery service available in select regions. If the computer is stolen, Computrace can track the computer if the unauthorized user accesses the Internet. You must purchase the software and subscribe to the service in order to use Computrace. For information about ordering the Computrace software, go to http://www.hp.com. Computer risk Unauthorized use of the computer Security feature HP Client Security software, in combination with a password, smart card, contactless card, registered fingerprints, or other authentication credential BIOS power-on password Unauthorized access to Computer Setup (BIOS) BIOS administrator password in Computer Setup*

Unauthorized access to the contents of a hard drive DriveLock password (select products only) in Computer Setup*

Unauthorized startup from an optional external optical drive

(select products only), optional external hard drive (select products only), or internal network adapter Boot options feature in Computer Setup*

Unauthorized access to a Windows user account Windows user password Unauthorized access to data Windows BitLocker Unauthorized removal of the computer Security cable slot (used with an optional security cable on select products only)

*Computer Setup is an embedded, ROM-based utility that can be used even when the operating system is not working or will not load. You can use a pointing device (TouchPad, pointing stick, or USB mouse) or the keyboard to navigate and make selections in Computer Setup. NOTE: On tablets without keyboards, you can use the touch screen. Using passwords A password is a group of characters that you choose to secure your computer information. Several types of passwords can be set, depending on how you want to control access to your information. Passwords can be set in Windows or in Computer Setup, which is preinstalled on the computer. Protecting the computer 31 BIOS administrator, power-on, and DriveLock passwords are set in Computer Setup and are managed by the system BIOS. Windows passwords are set only in the Windows operating system. If you forget both the DriveLock user password and the DriveLock master password set in Computer Setup, the hard drive that is protected by the passwords is permanently locked and can no longer be used. You can use the same password for a Computer Setup feature and for a Windows security feature. Use the following tips for creating and saving passwords:

When creating passwords, follow requirements set by the program. Do not use the same password for multiple applications or websites, and do not reuse your Windows password for any other application or website. Use the Password Manager feature of HP Client Security to store your user names and passwords for your websites and applications. You can securely read them in the future if they cannot be remembered. Do not store passwords in a file on the computer. The following tables list commonly used Windows and BIOS administrator passwords and describe their functions. Setting passwords in Windows Password Administrator password*

Function Protects access to a Windows administrator-level account. NOTE: Setting the Windows administrator password does not set the BIOS administrator password. User password*

*For information about setting a Windows administrator password or a Windows user password, type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Protects access to a Windows user account. 32 Chapter 7 Security Setting passwords in Computer Setup Password Function BIOS administrator password*

Protects access to Computer Setup. Power-on password DriveLock master password*

DriveLock user password*

NOTE:

If features have been enabled to prevent removing the BIOS administrator password, you may not be able to remove it until those features have been disabled. Must be entered each time you turn on or restart the computer. If you forget your power-on password, you cannot turn on or restart the computer. Protects access to the internal hard drive that is protected by DriveLock, and is set under DriveLock Passwords during the enable process. This password is also used to remove DriveLock protection. Protects access to the internal hard drive that is protected by DriveLock, and is set under DriveLock Passwords during the enable process.

*For details about each of these passwords, see the following topics. Managing a BIOS administrator password To set, change, or delete this password, follow these steps:

Setting a new BIOS administrator password 1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Tablets without keyboards:

Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. 2. Select Security, select Create BIOS administrator password or Set Up BIOS administrator Password

(select products only), and then press enter. 3. When prompted, type a password. 4. When prompted, type the new password again to confirm. 5. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Changing a BIOS administrator password 1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Using passwords 33 Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Tablets without keyboards:

Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. 2. 3. Enter your current BIOS administrator password. Select Security, select Change BIOS administrator Password or Change Password (select products only), and then press enter. 4. When prompted, type your current password. 5. When prompted, type your new password. 6. When prompted, type your new password again to confirm. 7. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Deleting a BIOS administrator password 1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Tablets without keyboards:

Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. 2. 3. Enter your current BIOS administrator password. Select Security, select Change BIOS administrator Password or Change Password (select products only), and then press enter. 4. When prompted, type your current password. 5. When prompted for the new password, leave the field empty, and then press enter. 6. When prompted to type your new password again, leave the field empty, and then press enter. 7. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Entering a BIOS administrator password At the BIOS administrator password prompt, type your password (using the same kind of keys you used to set the password), and then press enter. After two unsuccessful attempts to enter the BIOS administrator password, you must restart the computer and try again. 34 Chapter 7 Security Using DriveLock Security Options DriveLock protection prevents unauthorized access to the contents of a hard drive. DriveLock can be applied only to the internal hard drive(s) of the computer. After DriveLock protection is applied to a drive, the appropriate password must be entered to access the drive. The drive must be inserted into the computer or an advanced port replicator in order for it to be unlocked. DriveLock Security Options offers the following features:

Automatic DriveLockSee Selecting Automatic DriveLock (select products only) on page 35. Set DriveLock Master PasswordSee Selecting manual DriveLock on page 36. Enable DriveLockSee Enabling DriveLock and setting a DriveLock user password on page 37. Selecting Automatic DriveLock (select products only) A BIOS administrator password must be set before you can enable Automatic DriveLock. When Automatic DriveLock is enabled, a random DriveLock user password and a DriveLock master password derived from the BIOS administrator password are created. When the computer is turned on, the random user password automatically unlocks the drive. If the drive is moved to another computer, you must enter the BIOS administrator password for the original computer at the DriveLock password prompt to unlock the drive. Enabling Automatic DriveLock To enable Automatic DriveLock, follow these steps:

1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

1. 2. Tablets without keyboards:

1. 2. Turn off the computer. Press the power button, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. 2. 3. 4. 5. At the BIOS administrator password prompt, enter the BIOS administrator password, and then press enter. Select Security, select Hard Drive Utilities, select DriveLock/Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. Use the enter key, left mouse click, or touch screen to select the Automatic DriveLock check box. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Disabling Automatic DriveLock To disable Automatic DriveLock, follow these steps:

1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Using passwords 35 Turn off the computer. Press the power button, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. 1. 2. Tablets without keyboards:

1. 2. Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. At the BIOS administrator password prompt, enter the BIOS administrator password, and then press enter. Select Security, select Hard Drive Utilities, select DriveLock/Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. Select an internal hard drive, and then press enter. Use the enter key, left mouse click, or touch screen to clear the Automatic DriveLock check box. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Entering an Automatic DriveLock password While Automatic DriveLock is enabled and the drive remains attached to the original computer, you will not be prompted to enter a DriveLock password to unlock the drive. However, if the drive is moved to another computer, or the system board is replaced on the original computer, you will be prompted to provide the DriveLock password. If this happens, at the DriveLock Password prompt, type the BIOS administrator password for the original computer (using the same kind of keys you used to set the password), and then press enter to unlock the drive. After three incorrect attempts to enter the password, you must shut down the computer and try again. Selecting manual DriveLock CAUTION: To prevent a DriveLock-protected hard drive from becoming permanently unusable, record the DriveLock user password and the DriveLock master password in a safe place away from your computer. If you forget both DriveLock passwords, the hard drive will be permanently locked and can no longer be used. To manually apply DriveLock protection to an internal hard drive, a master password must be set, and DriveLock must be enabled in Computer Setup. Note the following considerations about using DriveLock protection:

After DriveLock protection is applied to a hard drive, the hard drive can be accessed only by entering either the DriveLock user password or the master password. The owner of the DriveLock user password should be the day-to-day user of the protected hard drive. The owner of the DriveLock master password may be either a system administrator or the day-to-day user. The DriveLock user password and the DriveLock master password can be identical. 36 Chapter 7 Security Setting a DriveLock master password To set a DriveLock master password, follow these steps:

1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

1. 2. Tablets without keyboards:

1. 2. Turn off the computer. Press the power button, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Select Security, make the selection for Hard Drive Utilities, select DriveLock/Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. Select the hard drive you want to protect, and then press enter. Select Set DriveLock Master Password, and then press enter. Carefully read the warning. Follow the on-screen instructions to set a DriveLock master password. NOTE: You can enable DriveLock and set a DriveLock user password before exiting from Computer Setup. For more information, see Enabling DriveLock and setting a DriveLock user password on page 37. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Enabling DriveLock and setting a DriveLock user password To enable DriveLock, and set a DriveLock user password, follow these steps:

1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

1. 2. Tablets without keyboards:

1. 2. Turn off the computer. Press the power button, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. 2. 3. 4. Select Security, select Hard Drive Utilities, select DriveLock/Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. Select the hard drive you want to protect, and then press enter. Select Enable DriveLock and then press enter. Using passwords 37 5. 6. 7. Carefully read the warning. Follow the on-screen instructions to set a DriveLock user password and enable DriveLock. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Disabling DriveLock 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

1. 2. Tablets without keyboards:

1. 2. Turn off the computer. Press the power button, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. Select Security, select Hard Drive Utilities, select DriveLock/Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. Select the hard drive you want to manage, and then press enter. Select Disable DriveLock, and then press enter. Follow the on-screen instructions to disable DriveLock. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Entering a DriveLock password Be sure that the hard drive is inserted into the computer (not into an optional docking device or external MultiBay). At the DriveLock Password prompt, type your DriveLock user or master password (using the same kind of keys you used to set the password), and then press enter. After three incorrect attempts to enter the password, you must shut down the computer and try again. Changing a DriveLock password To change a DriveLock password in Computer Setup, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. Turn off the computer. Press the power button. At the DriveLock Password prompt, type the current DriveLock user password or master password that you are changing, press enter, and then press or tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. Select Security, select Hard Drive Utilities, select DriveLock/Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. 4. 38 Chapter 7 Security Select the hard drive you want to manage, and then press enter. 5. 6. Make the selection for the DriveLock password that you want to change, and then follow the on-screen instructions to enter passwords. NOTE: The Change DriveLock Master Password option is visible only if the DriveLock master password was provided at the DriveLock Password prompt in step 3. 7. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Windows Hello (select products only) On products equipped with a fingerprint reader or an infrared camera, you can use Windows Hello to sign in by swiping your finger or looking at the camera. To set up Windows Hello:

1. 2. 3. Select the Start button, select Settings, select Accounts, and then select Sign-in options. To add a password, select Add. Select Get Started, and then follow the on-screen instructions enroll your fingerprint or facial ID and set up a PIN. NOTE: The PIN is not limited in length, but it must consist of numbers only. To include alphabetic or special characters, select the include letters and symbols checkbox. Using antivirus software When you use the computer to access e-mail, a network, or the Internet, you potentially expose it to computer viruses. Computer viruses can disable the operating system, programs, or utilities, or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and, in most cases, repair any damage they have caused. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. Windows Defender is preinstalled on your computer. It is strongly recommended that you continue to use an antivirus program in order to fully protect your computer. For more information about computer viruses, access the HP Support Assistant. Using firewall software Firewalls are designed to prevent unauthorized access to a system or network. A firewall can be a software program you install on your computer and/or network, or it can be a solution made up of both hardware and software. There are two types of firewalls to consider:

Host-based firewallsSoftware that protects only the computer it is installed on. Network-based firewallsInstalled between your DSL or cable modem and your home network to protect all the computers on the network. Windows Hello (select products only) 39 When a firewall is installed on a system, all data sent to and from the system is monitored and compared with a set of user-defined security criteria. Any data that does not meet those criteria is blocked. Your computer or networking equipment may already have a firewall installed. If not, firewall software solutions are available. NOTE: Under some circumstances a firewall can block access to Internet games, interfere with printer or file sharing on a network, or block authorized e-mail attachments. To temporarily resolve the problem, disable the firewall, perform the task that you want to perform, and then reenable the firewall. To permanently resolve the problem, reconfigure the firewall. Installing software updates HP, Windows, and third-party software installed on your computer should be regularly updated to correct security problems and improve software performance. IMPORTANT: Microsoft sends out alerts regarding Windows updates, which may include security updates. To protect the computer from security breaches and computer viruses, install all updates from Microsoft as soon as you receive an alert. You can install these updates automatically. To view or change the settings:

1. 2. 3. Select the Start button, select Settings, and then select Update & Security. Select Windows Update, and then follow the on-screen instructions. To schedule a time for installing updates, select Advanced Options, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP Client Security (select products only) HP Client Security software is preinstalled on your computer. This software can be accessed through the HP Client Security icon at the far right of the taskbar or Windows Control Panel. It provides security features that help protect against unauthorized access to the computer, networks, and critical data. For more information, see the HP Client Security software Help. Using HP Device as a Service (HP DaaS) (select products only) HP DaaS is a cloud-based IT solution that enables businesses to effectively manage and secure their company assets. HP DaaS helps protect devices against malware and other attacks, monitors device health, and helps reduce time spent solving device and security issues. You can quickly download and install the software, which is highly cost effective relative to traditional in-house solutions. For more information, go to https://www.hptouchpointmanager.com/. Using an optional security cable (select products only) A security cable (purchased separately) is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. To connect a security cable to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. 40 Chapter 7 Security Using a fingerprint reader (select products only) Integrated fingerprint readers are available on select products. In order to use the fingerprint reader, you must enroll your fingerprints in HP Client Security's Credential Manager. Refer to the HP Client Security software Help. After you enroll your fingerprints in Credential Manager, you can use HP Client Security's Password Manager to store and fill in your user names and passwords in supported websites and applications. Locating the fingerprint reader On the right side of the keyboard Near the bottom of the TouchPad The fingerprint reader is a small metallic sensor that is located in one of the following areas of your computer:

On the upper-right side of the display On the left side of the display On the back of the display Depending on your product, the reader may be oriented horizontally or vertically. Using a fingerprint reader (select products only) 41 8 Maintenance It is important to perform regular maintenance to keep your computer in optimal condition. This chapter explains how to use tools like Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. It also provides instructions for updating programs and drivers, steps to clean the computer, and tips for traveling with (or shipping) the computer. Improving performance You can improve the performance of your computer by performing regular maintenance tasks with tools such as Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. Using Disk Defragmenter HP recommends using Disk Defragmenter to defragment your hard drive at least once a month. NOTE:

It is not necessary to run Disk Defragmenter on solid-state drives. To run Disk Defragmenter:

1. 2. Connect the computer to AC power. Type defragment in the taskbar search box, and then select Defragment and optimize your drives. Follow the on-screen instructions. 3. For additional information, access the Disk Defragmenter software Help. Using Disk Cleanup Use Disk Cleanup to search the hard drive for unnecessary files that you can safely delete to free up disk space and help the computer run more efficiently. To run Disk Cleanup:

1. Type disk in the taskbar search box, and then select Disk Cleanup. Follow the on-screen instructions. 2. 42 Chapter 8 Maintenance Using HP 3D DriveGuard (select products only) HP 3D DriveGuard protects a hard drive by parking the drive and halting data requests under either of the following conditions:

You move the computer with the display closed while the computer is running on battery power. You drop the computer. A short time after the end of one of these events, HP 3D DriveGuard returns the hard drive to normal operation. NOTE: Only internal hard drives are protected by HP 3D DriveGuard. A hard drive installed in an optional docking device or connected to a USB port is not protected by HP 3D DriveGuard. NOTE: Because solid-state drives (SSDs) lack moving parts, HP 3D DriveGuard is unnecessary for these drives. Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status The hard drive light on the computer changes color to show that the drive in a primary hard drive bay and/or the drive in a secondary hard drive bay (select products only) is parked. Updating programs and drivers HP recommends that you update your programs and drivers on a regular basis. Updates can resolve issues and bring new features and options to your computer. For example, older graphics components might not work well with the most recent gaming software. Without the latest driver, you would not be getting the most out of your equipment. Go to http://www.hp.com/support to download the latest versions of HP programs and drivers. In addition, register to receive automatic notifications when updates become available. If you would like to update your programs and drivers, follow these instructions:

1. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. Select My notebook, select the Updates tab, and then select Check for updates and messages. Follow the on-screen instructions. 2. 3. Cleaning your computer Alcohol-free glass-cleaning fluid Use the following products to safely clean your computer:

Solution of water and mild soap Static-free cloth wipes Dry microfiber cleaning cloth or a chamois (static-free cloth without oil) Updating programs and drivers 43 CAUTION: Avoid strong cleaning solvents or germicidal wipes that can permanently damage your computer. If you are not sure that a cleaning product is safe for your computer, check the product contents to make sure that ingredients such as alcohol, acetone, ammonium chloride, methylene chloride, and hydrocarbons are not included in the product. Fibrous materials, such as paper towels, can scratch the computer. Over time, dirt particles and cleaning agents can get trapped in the scratches. Cleaning procedures Follow the procedures in this section to safely clean your computer. WARNING! To prevent electric shock or damage to components, do not attempt to clean your computer while it is on. 1. 2. 3. CAUTION: To prevent damage to internal components, do not spray cleaning agents or liquids directly on any computer surface. Liquids dripped on the surface can permanently damage internal components. Turn off the computer. Disconnect AC power. Disconnect all powered external devices. Cleaning the display Gently wipe the display using a soft, lint-free cloth moistened with an alcohol-free glass cleaner. Be sure that a display is dry before you close the computer. Cleaning the sides or cover To clean the sides or cover, use a soft microfiber cloth or chamois moistened with one of the cleaning solutions listed previously, or use an acceptable disposable wipe. NOTE: When cleaning the cover of the computer, use a circular motion to aid in removing dirt and debris. Cleaning the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse (select products only) WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. CAUTION: To prevent damage to internal components, do not allow liquids to drip between the keys. To clean the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse, use a soft microfiber cloth or a chamois moistened with one of the cleaning solutions listed previously. To prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles from the keyboard, use a can of compressed air with a straw extension. Traveling with or shipping your computer If you have to travel with or ship your computer, follow these tips to keep your equipment safe. Prepare the computer for traveling or shipping:

Back up your information to an external drive. Remove all discs and all external media cards, such as memory cards. 44 Chapter 8 Maintenance Turn off and then disconnect all external devices. Shut down the computer. Take along a backup of your information. Keep the backup separate from the computer. When traveling by air, carry the computer as hand luggage; do not check it in with the rest of your luggage. CAUTION: Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-through devices and security wands. Airport conveyer belts and similar security devices that check carry-on baggage use X-rays instead of magnetism and do not damage drives. If you plan to use the computer during a flight, listen for the in-flight announcement that tells you when you are allowed to use your computer. In-flight computer use is at the discretion of the airline. If you are shipping the computer or a drive, use suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. The use of wireless devices may be restricted in some environments. Such restrictions may apply aboard aircraft, in hospitals, near explosives, and in hazardous locations. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of a wireless device in your computer, ask for authorization to use your computer before you turn it on. If you are traveling internationally, follow these suggestions:

Check the computer-related customs regulations for each country or region on your itinerary. Check the power cord and adapter requirements for each location in which you plan to use the computer. Voltage, frequency, and plug configurations vary. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. Traveling with or shipping your computer 45 9 Backing up, restoring, and recovering This chapter provides information about the following processes, which are standard procedure for most products:

Backing up your personal informationYou can use Windows tools to back up your personal information (see Using Windows tools on page 46). Creating a restore pointYou can use Windows tools to create a restore point (see Using Windows tools on page 46). Creating recovery media (select products only)You can use HP Recovery Manager or HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool (select products only) to create recovery media (see Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 46). Restoring and recoveryWindows offers several options for restoring from backup, refreshing the computer, and resetting the computer to its original state (see Using Windows tools on page 46). Removing the Recovery PartitionTo remove the Recovery partition to reclaim hard drive space

(select products only), select the Remove Recovery Partition option of HP Recovery Manager. For more information, see Removing the HP Recovery partition (select products only) on page 50. Using Windows tools IMPORTANT: Windows is the only option that allows you to back up your personal information. Schedule regular backups to avoid information loss. You can use Windows tools to back up personal information and create system restore points and recovery media, allowing you to restore from backup, refresh the computer, and reset the computer to its original state. NOTE:

If computer storage is 32 GB or less, Microsoft System Restore is disabled by default. For more information and steps, see the Get Help app. 1. 2. Select the Start button, and then select the Get Help app. Enter the task you want to perform. NOTE: You must be connected to the Internet to access the Get Help app. Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) After you have successfully set up the computer, use HP Recovery Manager to create a backup of the HP Recovery partition on the computer. This backup is called HP Recovery media. In cases where the hard drive is corrupted or has been replaced, the HP Recovery media can be used to reinstall the original operating system. To check for the presence of the Recovery partition in addition to the Windows partition, right-click the Start button, select File Explorer, and then select This PC. NOTE:

If your computer does not list the Recovery partition in addition to the Windows partition, contact support to obtain recovery discs. Go to http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 46 Chapter 9 Backing up, restoring, and recovering On select products, you can use the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create HP Recovery media on a bootable USB flash drive. For more information, see Using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create recovery media on page 48. Using HP Recovery Manager to create recovery media NOTE:

http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If you cannot create recovery media yourself, contact support to obtain recovery discs. Go to Before you begin Before you begin, note the following:

Only one set of recovery media can be created. Handle these recovery tools carefully, and keep them in a safe place. HP Recovery Manager examines the computer and determines the required media storage capacity. To create recovery media, use one of the following options:

NOTE:

If the computer does not have a recovery partition, HP Recovery Manager displays the Windows Create a Recovery Drive feature. Follow the on-screen instructions to create a recovery image on a blank USB flash drive or hard drive. If your computer has an optical drive with DVD writer capability, be sure to use only high-quality blank DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-R DL, or DVD+R DL discs. Do not use rewritable discs such as CDRW, DVDRW, double-layer DVDRW, or BD-RE (rewritable Blu-ray) discs, which are not compatible with HP Recovery Manager software. If your computer does not include an integrated optical drive with DVD writer capability, you can use an external optical drive (purchased separately) to create recovery discs, as described above. If an external optical drive is used, you must connect it directly to a USB port on the computer. It cannot be connected to a USB port on an external device, such as a USB hub. To create a recovery USB flash drive, use a high-quality blank USB flash drive. Be sure that the computer is connected to AC power before you begin creating the recovery media. The creation process can take an hour or more. Do not interrupt this process. If necessary, you can exit the program before you have finished creating all of the recovery media. HP Recovery Manager will finish the current DVD or USB flash drive. The next time you start HP Recovery Manager, you will be prompted to continue. Creating the recovery media To create HP Recovery media using HP Recovery Manager:

IMPORTANT:

beginning these steps. For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the tablet to the keyboard base before 1. Type recovery in the taskbar search box, and then select HP Recovery Manager. Select Create recovery media, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 2. If you need to recover the system, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 48. Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) 47 Using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create recovery media To create HP Recovery media using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool:

1. 2. Go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Software and Drivers, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Restoring and recovery Restoring and recovery can be performed using one or more of the following options: Windows tools, HP Recovery Manager, or the HP Recovery partition. IMPORTANT: Not all methods are available on all products. Restoring, resetting, and refreshing using Windows tools Windows offers several options for restoring, resetting, and refreshing the computer. For details, see Using Windows tools on page 46. Restoring using HP Recovery Manager and the HP Recovery partition You can use HP Recovery Manager and the HP Recovery partition (select products only) to restore the computer to the original factory state:

Resolving problems with preinstalled applications or driversTo correct a problem with a preinstalled application or driver:

1. Type recovery in the taskbar search box, and then select HP Recovery Manager. Select Reinstall drivers and/or applications, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 2. Using System RecoveryTo recover the Windows partition to original factory content, select the System Recovery option from the HP Recovery partition (select products only) or use the HP Recovery media. For more information, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 48. If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 46. Using Factory Reset (select products only)Restores the computer to its original factory state by deleting all information from the hard drive and recreating the partitions and then reinstalling the operating system and the software that was installed at the factory (select products only). To use the Factory Reset option, you must use HP Recovery media. If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 46. NOTE:

install the operating system and the software that was installed at the factory. If you have replaced the hard drive in the computer, you can use the Factory Reset option to Recovering using HP Recovery Manager You can use HP Recovery Manager software to recover the computer to its original factory state by using the HP Recovery media that you either created or that you obtained from HP, or by using the HP Recovery partition (select products only). If you have not already created HP Recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 46. IMPORTANT: HP Recovery Manager does not automatically provide backups of your personal data. Before beginning recovery, back up any personal data that you want to retain. See Using Windows tools on page 46. 48 Chapter 9 Backing up, restoring, and recovering IMPORTANT: Recovery through HP Recovery Manager should be used as a final attempt to correct computer issues. NOTE: When you start the recovery process, only the options available for your computer are displayed. Before you begin, note the following:

HP Recovery Manager recovers only software that was installed at the factory. For software not provided with this computer, you must either download the software from the manufacturer's website or reinstall the software from the media provided by the manufacturer. If the computer hard drive fails, HP Recovery media must be used. This media is created using HP Recovery Manager. See Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 46. If your computer does not allow the creation of HP Recovery media or if the HP Recovery media does not work, contact support to obtain recovery media. Go to http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Recovering using the HP Recovery partition (select products only) The HP Recovery partition allows you to perform a system recovery without recovery discs or a recovery USB flash drive. This type of recovery can be used only if the hard drive is still working. The HP Recovery partition (select products only) allows System Recovery only. To start HP Recovery Manager from the HP Recovery partition:

IMPORTANT:

beginning these steps (select products only). For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the tablet to the keyboard base before 1. 2. 3. Type recovery in the taskbar search box, select HP Recovery Manager, and then select Windows Recovery Environment. or For computers or tablets with keyboards attached:

Press f11 while the computer boots, or press and hold f11 as you press the power button. For tablets without keyboards:

Turn on or restart the tablet, quickly hold down the volume up button, and then select f11. Select Troubleshoot from the boot options menu. Select Recovery Manager, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If your computer does not automatically restart in HP Recovery Manager, change the computer NOTE:

boot order, and then follow the on-screen instructions. See Changing the computer boot order on page 50. Recovering using HP Recovery media If your computer does not have an HP Recovery partition or if the hard drive is not working properly, you can use HP Recovery media to recover the original operating system and software programs that were installed at the factory. Insert the HP Recovery media, and then restart the computer. Restoring and recovery 49 If your computer does not automatically restart in HP Recovery Manager, change the computer NOTE:

boot order, and then follow the on-screen instructions. See Changing the computer boot order on page 50. Changing the computer boot order If your computer does not restart in HP Recovery Manager, you can change the computer boot order. This is the order of devices listed in BIOS where the computer looks for startup information. You can change the selection to an optical drive or a USB flash drive, depending on the location of your HP Recovery media. To change the boot order:

IMPORTANT:

beginning these steps. For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the tablet to the keyboard base before 1. 2. Insert the HP Recovery media. Access the system Startup menu. For computers or tablets with keyboards attached:

Turn on or restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f9 for boot options. For tablets without keyboards:

Turn on or restart the tablet, quickly hold down the volume up button, and then select f9. or Turn on or restart the tablet, quickly hold down the volume down button, and then select f9. 3. Select the optical drive or USB flash drive from which you want to boot, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Removing the HP Recovery partition (select products only) HP Recovery Manager software allows you to remove the HP Recovery partition (select products only) to free up hard drive space. IMPORTANT: After you remove the HP Recovery partition, you will not be able to perform System Recovery or create HP Recovery media. Before removing the Recovery partition, create HP Recovery media. See Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 46. Follow these steps to remove the HP Recovery partition:

1. Type recovery in the taskbar search box, and then select HP Recovery Manager. Select Remove Recovery Partition, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 2. 50 Chapter 9 Backing up, restoring, and recovering 10 Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start Using Computer Setup Computer Setup, or Basic Input/Output System (BIOS), controls communication between all the input and output devices on the system (such as disk drives, display, keyboard, mouse, and printer). Computer Setup includes settings for the types of devices installed, the startup sequence of the computer, and the amount of system and extended memory. NOTE: Use extreme care when making changes in Computer Setup. Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. Starting Computer Setup Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Navigating and selecting in Computer Setup To select a menu or a menu item, use the tab key and the keyboard arrow keys and then press enter, or use a pointing device to select the item. To scroll up and down, select the up arrow or the down arrow in the upper-right corner of the screen, or use the up arrow key or the down arrow key on the keyboard. To close open dialog boxes and return to the main Computer Setup screen, press esc, and then follow the on-screen instructions. To exit Computer Setup, choose one of the following methods:

To exit Computer Setup menus without saving your changes, select Main, select Ignore Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup menus, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Restoring factory settings in Computer Setup NOTE: Restoring defaults will not change the hard drive mode. To return all settings in Computer Setup to the values that were set at the factory, follow these steps:

1. 2. Start Computer Setup. See Starting Computer Setup on page 51. Select Main, select Apply Factory Defaults and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Using Computer Setup 51 NOTE: On select products, the selections may display Restore Defaults instead of Apply Factory Defaults and Exit. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. NOTE: Your password settings and security settings are not changed when you restore the factory settings. Updating the BIOS Updated versions of the BIOS may be available on the HP website. Most BIOS updates on the HP website are packaged in compressed files called SoftPaqs. Some download packages contain a file named Readme.txt, which contains information regarding installing and troubleshooting the file. Determining the BIOS version To decide whether you need to update Computer Setup (BIOS), first determine the BIOS version on your computer. BIOS version information (also known as ROM date and System BIOS) can be accessed by pressing fn+esc (if you are already in Windows) or by using Computer Setup. 1. 2. 3. Start Computer Setup. See Starting Computer Setup on page 51. Select Main, and then select System Information. To exit Computer Setup menus without saving your changes, select Main, select Ignore Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. To check for later BIOS versions, see Downloading a BIOS update on page 52. Downloading a BIOS update CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the computer or an unsuccessful installation, download and install a BIOS update only when the computer is connected to reliable external power using the AC adapter. Do not download or install a BIOS update while the computer is running on battery power, docked in an optional docking device, or connected to an optional power source. During the download and installation, follow these instructions:

Do not disconnect power on the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Sleep. Do not insert, remove, connect, or disconnect any device, cable, or cord. 1. 2. 3. 4. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. Select Updates, and then select Check for updates and messages. Follow the on-screen instructions. At the download area, follow these steps:

52 Chapter 10 Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start a. b. Identify the most recent BIOS update and compare it to the BIOS version currently installed on your computer. Make a note of the date, name, or other identifier. You may need this information to locate the update later, after it has been downloaded to your hard drive. Follow the on-screen instructions to download your selection to the hard drive. Make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the BIOS update is downloaded. You will need to access this path when you are ready to install the update. NOTE:

any software updates, especially system BIOS updates. If you connect your computer to a network, consult the network administrator before installing BIOS installation procedures vary. Follow any instructions that are displayed on the screen after the download is complete. If no instructions are displayed, follow these steps:

1. Type file in the taskbar search box, and then select File Explorer. Select your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:). Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder that contains the update. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe). The BIOS installation begins. Complete the installation by following the on-screen instructions. 2. 3. 4. 5. NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from your hard drive. Changing the boot order using the f9 prompt To dynamically choose a boot device for the current startup sequence, follow these steps:

1. Access the Boot Device Options menu:

Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f9 to enter the Boot Device Options menu. 2. Select a boot device, press enter, and then follow the on-screen instructions. TPM BIOS settings (select products only) IMPORTANT: Before enabling Trusted Platform Module (TPM) functionality on this system, you must ensure that your intended use of TPM complies with relevant local laws, regulations and policies, and approvals or licenses must be obtained if applicable. For any compliance issues arising from your operation/usage of TPM which violates the above mentioned requirement, you shall bear all the liabilities wholly and solely. HP will not be responsible for any related liabilities. TPM provides additional security for your computer. You can modify the TPM settings in Computer Setup

(BIOS). NOTE:

If you change the TPM setting to Hidden, TPM is not visible in the operating system. To access TPM settings in Computer Setup:

1. 2. Start Computer Setup. See Starting Computer Setup on page 51. Select Security, select TPM Embedded Security, and then follow the on-screen instructions. TPM BIOS settings (select products only) 53 Using HP Sure Start (select products only) Select computer models are configured with HP Sure Start, a technology that monitors the computer's BIOS for attacks or corruption. If the BIOS becomes corrupted or is attacked, HP Sure Start automatically restores the BIOS to its previously safe state, without user intervention. HP Sure Start is configured and already enabled so that most users can use the HP Sure Start default configuration. The default configuration can be customized by advanced users. To access the latest documentation on HP Sure Start, go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Find your product, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 54 Chapter 10 Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start 11 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows (select products only) HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is a Windows-based utility that allows you to run diagnostic tests to determine whether the computer hardware is functioning properly. The tool runs within the Windows operating system in order to diagnose hardware failures. If HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is not installed on your computer, first you must download and install it. To download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows, see Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows on page 55. After HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is installed, follow these steps to access it from HP Help and Support or HP Support Assistant. 1. To access HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from HP Help and Support:

a. b. Select the Start button, and then select HP Help and Support. Right-click HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows, select More, and then select Run as administrator. or To access HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from HP Support Assistant:

a. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. Select Troubleshooting and fixes. Select Diagnostics, and then select HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows. b. c. 2. When the tool opens, select the type of diagnostic test you want to run, and then follow the on-screen instructions. NOTE:

If you need to stop a diagnostic test at any time, select Cancel. 3. When HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows detects a failure that requires hardware replacement, a 24-

digit Failure ID code is generated. For assistance in correcting the problem, contact support, and then provide the Failure ID code. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows The HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows download instructions are provided in English only. You must use a Windows computer to download this tool because only .exe files are provided. Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows (select products only) 55 Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows version To download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows, follow these steps:

1. 2. Go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags. The HP PC Diagnostics home page is displayed. In the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics section, select Download, and then select a location on your computer or a USB flash drive. The tool is downloaded to the selected location. Downloading HP Hardware Diagnostics Windows by product name or number (select products only) NOTE:

product name or number. For some products, it may be necessary to download the software to a USB flash drive by using the To download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows by product name or number, follow these steps:

1. 2. Go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Get software and drivers, select your type of product, and then enter the product name or number in the search box that is displayed. In the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics section, select Download, and then select a location on your computer or a USB flash drive. 3. The tool is downloaded to the selected location. Installing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows To install HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows, follow these steps:

Navigate to the folder on your computer or the USB flash drive where the .exe file was downloaded, double-click the .exe file, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI NOTE:

For Windows 10 S computers, you must use a Windows computer and a USB flash drive to download and create the HP UEFI support environment because only .exe files are provided. For more information, see Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive on page 57. HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface) allows you to run diagnostic tests to determine whether the computer hardware is functioning properly. The tool runs outside the operating system so that it can isolate hardware failures from issues that are caused by the operating system or other software components. If your PC will not boot into Windows, you can use HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to diagnose hardware issues. When HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI detects a failure that requires hardware replacement, a 24-digit Failure ID code is generated. For assistance in correcting the problem, contact support, and provide the Failure ID code. NOTE: To start diagnostics on a convertible computer, your computer must be in notebook mode, and you must use the attached keyboard. NOTE:

If you need to stop a diagnostic test, press esc. 56 Chapter 11 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Starting HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI To start HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI, follow these steps:

1. 2. Turn on or restart the computer, and quickly press esc. Press f2. The BIOS searches three places for the diagnostic tools, in the following order:

a. Connected USB flash drive NOTE: To download the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI tool to a USB flash drive, see Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version on page 57. b. c. Hard drive BIOS 3. When the diagnostic tool opens, select a language, select the type of diagnostic test you want to run, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is not included in the preinstall image. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive can be useful in the following situations:

HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is not included in the HP Tool partition. The hard drive is damaged. NOTE: The HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI download instructions are provided in English only, and you must use a Windows computer to download and create the HP UEFI support environment because only .exe files are provided. Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version To download the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version to a USB flash drive:

1. 2. Go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags. The HP PC Diagnostics home page is displayed. In the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI section, select Download UEFI Diagnostics, and then select Run. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number (select products only) NOTE:

product name or number. For some products, it may be necessary to download the software to a USB flash drive by using the To download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number (select products only) to a USB flash drive:

1. 2. 3. Go to http://www.hp.com/support. Enter the product name or number, select your computer, and then select your operating system. In the Diagnostics section, follow the on-screen instructions to select and download the specific UEFI Diagnostics version for your computer. Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI 57 Using Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings (select products only) Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is a firmware (BIOS) feature that downloads HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to your computer. It can then execute the diagnostics on your computer, and it may upload results to a preconfigured server. For more information on Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI, go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags, and then select Find out more. Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI NOTE: HP Remote PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is also available as a Softpaq that can be downloaded to a server. Downloading the latest Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version To download the latest Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version, follow these steps:

1. 2. Go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags. The HP PC Diagnostics home page is displayed. In the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI section, select Download Remote Diagnostics, and then select Run. Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number NOTE:

number. For some products, it may be necessary to download the software by using the product name or To download HP Remote PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number, follow these steps:

1. 2. Go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Get software and drivers, select your type of product, enter the product name or number in the search box that is displayed, select your computer, and then select your operating system. In the Diagnostics section, follow the on-screen instructions to select and download the Remote UEFI version for the product. 3. Customizing Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings Using the Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics setting in Computer Setup (BIOS), you can perform the following customizations:

Set a schedule for running diagnostics unattended. You can also start diagnostics immediately in interactive mode by selecting Execute Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics. Set the location for downloading the diagnostic tools. This feature provides access to the tools from the HP website or from a server that has been preconfigured for use. Your computer does not require the traditional local storage (such as a disk drive or USB flash drive) to run remote diagnostics. Set a location for storing the test results. You can also set the user name and password settings used for uploads. Display status information about the diagnostics run previously. To customize Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings, follow these steps:

1. 2. Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Select Advanced, and then select Settings. 58 Chapter 11 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics 3. Make your customization selections. 4. Your changes take effect when the computer restarts. Select Main, and then Save Changes and Exit to save your settings. Using Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings (select products only) 59 12 Specifications Input power The power information in this section may be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. The AC power source must be rated at 100240 V, 5060 Hz. Although the computer can be powered from a standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source supplied and approved by HP for use with this computer. The computer can operate on DC power within the following specifications. The voltage and current for your computer is located on the regulatory label. Input Power Rating Operating voltage and current 5 V dc @ 2 A / 12 V dc @ 3 A /15 V dc @ 3 A 45 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 12 V dc @ 3.75 A /15 V dc @ 3 A 45 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 10 V dc @ 3.75 A / 12 V dc @ 3.75 A /

15 V dc @ 3 A / 20 V dc @ 2.25 A 45 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc @ 4.33 A / 20 V dc @ 3.25 A 65 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3A / 10 V dc @ 5 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc

@ 4.33 A / 20 V dc @ 3.25 A 65 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 10 V dc @ 5 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc

@ 5 A / 20 V dc @ 4.5 A 90 W USB-C 19.5 V dc @ 2.31 A 45 W 19.5 V dc @ 3.33 A 65 W 19.5 V dc @ 4.62 A 90 W 19.5 V dc @ 6.15 A 120 W 19.5 V dc @ 6.9 A 135 W 19.5 V dc @ 7.70 A 150 W 19.5 V dc @ 10.3 A 200 W 19.5 V dc @ 11.8 A 230 W 19.5 V dc @ 16.92 A 330 W NOTE: This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. 60 Chapter 12 Specifications Operating environment Factor Temperature Operating (writing to optical disc) Nonoperating Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Metric U.S. 5C to 35C

-20C to 60C 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

41F to 95F

-4F to 140F 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

Operating Nonoperating

-15 m to 3,048 m

-15 m to 12,192 m

-50 ft to 10,000 ft

-50 ft to 40,000 ft Operating environment 61 13 Electrostatic Discharge Electrostatic discharge is the release of static electricity when two objects come into contactfor example, the shock you receive when you walk across the carpet and touch a metal door knob. A discharge of static electricity from fingers or other electrostatic conductors may damage electronic components. To prevent damage to the computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information, observe these precautions:

If removal or installation instructions direct you to unplug the computer, first be sure that it is properly grounded. Keep components in their electrostatic-safe containers until you are ready to install them. Avoid touching pins, leads, and circuitry. Handle electronic components as little as possible. Use nonmagnetic tools. Before handling components, discharge static electricity by touching an unpainted metal surface. If you remove a component, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. 62 Chapter 13 Electrostatic Discharge 14 Accessibility Accessibility HP is working to weave diversity, inclusion and work/life into the fabric of our company, so it is reflected in everything we do. Here are some examples of how we are putting differences to work to create an inclusive environment focused on connecting people to the power of technology throughout the world. Finding the technology tools you need Technology can unleash your human potential. Assistive technology removes barriers and helps you create independence at home, at work, and in the community. Assistive technology helps increase, maintain, and improve the functional capabilities of electronic and information technology. For more information, see Finding the best assistive technology on page 64. Our commitment HP is committed to providing products and services that are accessible for people with disabilities. This commitment supports our company's diversity objectives and helps us ensure that the benefits of technology are available to all. Our accessibility goal is to design, produce, and market products and services that can be effectively used by everyone, including people with disabilities, either on a stand-alone basis or with appropriate assistive devices. To achieve our goal, this Accessibility Policy establishes seven key objectives to guide our actions as a company. All HP managers and employees are expected to support these objectives and their implementation in accordance with their roles and responsibilities:

Raise the level of awareness of accessibility issues within our company, and provide our employees with the training they need to design, produce, market, and deliver accessible products and services. Develop accessibility guidelines for products and services, and hold product development groups accountable for implementing these guidelines where competitively, technically, and economically feasible. Involve people with disabilities in the development of accessibility guidelines, and in the design and testing of products and services. Document accessibility features and make information about our products and services publicly available in an accessible form. Establish relationships with leading assistive technology and solution providers. Support internal and external research and development that will improve assistive technology relevant to our products and services. Support and contribute to industry standards and guidelines for accessibility. International Association of Accessibility Professionals (IAAP) IAAP is a not-for-profit association focused on advancing the accessibility profession through networking, education, and certification. The objective is to help accessibility professionals develop and advance their careers and to better enable organizations to integrate accessibility into their products and infrastructure. Accessibility 63 HP is a founding member, and we joined to participate with other organizations to advance the field of accessibility. This commitment supports our companys accessibility goal of designing, producing, and marketing products and services that can be effectively used by people with disabilities. IAAP will make our profession strong by globally connecting individuals, students, and organizations to learn from one another. If you are interested in learning more, go to http://www.accessibilityassociation.org to join the online community, sign up for newsletters, and learn about membership options. Finding the best assistive technology Everyone, including people with disabilities or age-related limitations, should be able to communicate, express themselves, and connect with the world using technology. HP is committed to increasing accessibility awareness within HP and with our customers and partners. Whether its large fonts that are easy on the eyes, voice recognition that lets you give your hands a rest, or any other assistive technology to help with your specific situationa variety of assistive technologies make HP products easier to use. How do you choose?

Assessing your needs Technology can unleash your potential. Assistive technology removes barriers and helps you create independence at home, at work, and in the community. Assistive technology (AT) helps increase, maintain, and improve the functional capabilities of electronic and information technology. You may choose from many AT products. Your AT assessment should allow you to evaluate several products, answer your questions, and facilitate your selection of the best solution for your situation. You will find that professionals qualified to do AT assessments come from many fields, including those licensed or certified in physical therapy, occupational therapy, speech/language pathology, and other areas of expertise. Others, while not certified or licensed, may also provide evaluation information. You will want to ask about the individual's experience, expertise, and fees to determine if they are appropriate for your needs. Accessibility for HP products HP PCsWindows 7 Accessibility Options The following links provide information on accessibility features and assistive technology, if applicable, included in various HP products. These resources will help you select the specific assistive technology features and product(s) most appropriate for your situation. HP Elite x3Accessibility Options (Windows 10 Mobile) HP Slate 7 TabletsEnabling Accessibility Features on Your HP Tablet (Android 4.1/Jelly Bean) HP SlateBook PCsEnabling Accessibility Features (Android 4.3,4.2/Jelly Bean) HP PCsWindows 10 Accessibility Options HP PCsWindows 8 Accessibility Options HP Chromebook PCsEnabling Accessibility Features on Your HP Chromebook or Chromebox (Chrome OS) HP Shoppingperipherals for HP products If you need additional support with the accessibility features on your HP product, see Contacting support on page 69. Additional links to external partners and suppliers that may provide additional assistance:

Microsoft Accessibility information (Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10, Microsoft Office) Google Products accessibility information (Android, Chrome, Google Apps) 64 Chapter 14 Accessibility Assistive Technologies sorted by impairment type Assistive Technologies sorted by product type Assistive Technology vendors with product descriptions Assistive Technology Industry Association (ATIA) Standards and legislation Standards Section 508 of the Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR) standards was created by the US Access Board to address access to information and communication technology (ICT) for people with physical, sensory, or cognitive disabilities. The standards contain technical criteria specific to various types of technologies, as well as performance-based requirements which focus on functional capabilities of covered products. Specific criteria cover software applications and operating systems, web-based information and applications, computers, telecommunications products, video and multi-media, and self-contained closed products. Mandate 376 EN 301 549 The EN 301 549 standard was created by the European Union within Mandate 376 as the basis for an online toolkit for public procurement of ICT products. The standard specifies the functional accessibility requirements applicable to ICT products and services, together with a description of the test procedures and evaluation methodology for each accessibility requirement. Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) from the W3C's Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI) helps web designers and developers create sites that better meet the needs of people with disabilities or age-related limitations. WCAG advances accessibility across the full range of web content (text, images, audio, and video) and web applications. WCAG can be precisely tested, is easy to understand and use, and allows web developers flexibility for innovation. WCAG 2.0 has also been approved as ISO/IEC 40500:2012. WCAG specifically addresses barriers to accessing the web experienced by people with visual, auditory, physical, cognitive, and neurological disabilities, and by older web users with accessibility needs. WCAG 2.0 provides characteristics of accessible content:

Perceivable (for instance, by addressing text alternatives for images, captions for audio, adaptability of presentation, and color contrast) Operable (by addressing keyboard access, color contrast, timing of input, seizure avoidance, and navigability) Understandable (by addressing readability, predictability, and input assistance) Robust (for instance, by addressing compatibility with assistive technologies) Legislation and regulations Accessibility of IT and information has become an area of increasing legislative importance. This section provides links to information on key legislation, regulations, and standards. United States Canada Europe Standards and legislation 65 United Kingdom Australia Worldwide United States Section 508 of the Rehabilitation Act specifies that agencies must identify which standards apply to the procurement of ICT, perform market research to determine the availability of accessible products and services, and document the results of their market research. The following resources provide assistance in meeting Section 508 requirements:

www.section508.gov Buy Accessible The U.S. Access Board is currently updating the Section 508 standards. This effort will address new technologies and other areas where the standards need to be modified. For more information, go to Section 508 Refresh. Section 255 of the Telecommunications Act requires telecommunications products and services to be accessible to people with disabilities. FCC rules cover all hardware and software telephone network equipment and telecommunications equipment used in the home or office. Such equipment includes telephones, wireless handsets, fax machines, answering machines, and pagers. FCC rules also cover basic and special telecommunications services, including regular telephone calls, call waiting, speed dialing, call forwarding, computer-provided directory assistance, call monitoring, caller identification, call tracing, and repeat dialing, as well as voice mail and interactive voice response systems that provide callers with menus of choices. For more information, go to Federal Communication Commission Section 255 information. 21st Century Communications and Video Accessibility Act (CVAA) The CVAA updates federal communications law to increase the access of persons with disabilities to modern communications, updating accessibility laws enacted in the 1980s and 1990s to include new digital, broadband, and mobile innovations. Regulations are enforced by the FCC and documented as 47 CFR Part 14 and Part 79. FCC Guide on the CVAA Other U.S. legislation and initiatives Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Telecommunications Act, the Rehabilitation Act and others Canada The Accessibility for Ontarians with Disabilities Act was established to develop and implement accessibility standards to make goods, services, and facilities accessible to Ontarians with disabilities and to provide for the involvement of persons with disabilities in the development of the accessibility standards. The first standard of the AODA is the customer service standard; however, standards for transportation, employment, and information and communication are also being developed. The AODA applies to the Government of Ontario, the Legislative Assembly, every designated public sector organization, and to every other person or organization that provides goods, services, or facilities to the public or other third parties and that has at least one employee in Ontario; and accessibility measures must be implemented on or before January 1, 2025. For more information, go to Accessibility for Ontarians with Disability Act (AODA) . 66 Chapter 14 Accessibility Europe EU Mandate 376 ETSI Technical Report ETSI DTR 102 612: "Human Factors (HF); European accessibility requirements for public procurement of products and services in the ICT domain (European Commission Mandate M 376, Phase 1)" has been released. Background: The three European Standardization Organizations have set up two parallel project teams to carry out the work specified in the European Commission "Mandate 376 to CEN, CENELEC and ETSI, in Support of Accessibility Requirements for Public Procurement of Products and Services in the ICT Domain."

ETSI TC Human Factors Specialist Task Force 333 has developed ETSI DTR 102 612. Further details about the work performed by STF333 (e.g., Terms of Reference, specification of the detailed work tasks, time plan for the work, previous drafts, listing of comments received and means to contact the task force) can be found at the Special Task Force 333. The parts relating to the assessment of suitable testing and conformity schemes were carried out by a parallel project, detailed in CEN BT/WG185/PT. For further information, go to the CEN project team website. The two projects are closely coordinated. European Commission mandate for e-accessibility (PDF 46KB) Commission takes low profile on e-accessibility CEN project team United Kingdom The Disability Discrimination Act of 1995 (DDA) was enacted to ensure that websites are accessible to blind and disabled users in the United Kingdom. W3C UK Policies Australia The Australian government has announced their plan to implement Web Content Accessibility Guidelines 2.0. All Australian government websites will require Level A compliance by 2012, and Double A by 2015. The new standard replaces WCAG 1.0, which was introduced as a mandated requirement for agencies in 2000. Worldwide JTC1 Special Working Group on Accessibility (SWG-A) G3ict: The Global Initiative for Inclusive ICT Italian accessibility legislation W3C Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI) Standards and legislation 67 Useful accessibility resources and links The following organizations may be good resources for information about disabilities and age-related limitations. NOTE: This is not an exhaustive list. These organizations are provided for informational purposes only. HP assumes no responsibility for information or contacts you may encounter on the Internet. Listing on this page does not imply endorsement by HP. Organizations American Association of People with Disabilities (AAPD) The Association of Assistive Technology Act Programs (ATAP) Hearing Loss Association of America (HLAA) Information Technology Technical Assistance and Training Center (ITTATC) Lighthouse International National Association of the Deaf National Federation of the Blind Rehabilitation Engineering & Assistive Technology Society of North America (RESNA) Telecommunications for the Deaf and Hard of Hearing, Inc. (TDI) W3C Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI) Educational institutions California State University, Northridge, Center on Disabilities (CSUN) University of Wisconsin - Madison, Trace Center University of Minnesota computer accommodations program Other disability resources ADA (Americans with Disabilities Act) Technical Assistance Program Business & Disability network EnableMart European Disability Forum Job Accommodation Network Microsoft Enable U.S. Department of Justice - A Guide to disability rights Laws HP links Our contact webform HP comfort and safety guide HP public sector sales 68 Chapter 14 Accessibility Contacting support NOTE: Support is in English only. Customers who are deaf or hard of hearing that have questions about technical support or accessibility of HP products:

Use TRS/VRS/WebCapTel to call (877) 656-7058 Monday through Friday, 6 a.m. to 9 p.m. Mountain Time. Customers with other disabilities or age-related limitations who have questions about technical support or accessibility of HP products, choose one of the following options:

Call (888) 259-5707 Monday through Friday, 6 a.m. to 9 p.m. Mountain Time. Complete the Contact form for people with disabilities or age-related limitations. Contacting support 69

Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Caution:

Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Radiation Exposure Statement:

This device meets the governments requirements for exposure to radio waves. This device is designed and manufactured not to exceed the emission limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S. Government. The exposure standard for wireless device employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6W/kg. *Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions accepted by the FCC with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Note: The country code selection is for non-US model only and is not available to all US model. Per FCC regulation, all WiFi product marketed in US must fixed to US operation channels only. Industry Canada statement This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1) 2) this device may not cause interference, and this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes:

l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. 1) 2) This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada. This device and its antenna(s) must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter, except tested built-in radios. Cet appareil et son antenne ne doivent pas tre situs ou fonctionner en conjonction avec une autre antenne ou un autre metteur, exception faites des radios intgres qui ont t testes. The County Code Selection feature is disabled for products marketed in the US/ Canada. La fonction de slection de l'indicatif du pays est dsactive pour les produits commercialiss aux tats-Unis et au Canada. Radiation Exposure Statement:

The product comply with the Canada portable RF exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment and are safe for intended operation as described in this manual. The further RF exposure reduction can be achieved if the product can be kept as far as possible from the user body or set the device to lower output power if such function is available. Dclaration d'exposition aux radiations:

Le produit est conforme aux limites d'exposition pour les appareils portables RF pour les Etats-Unis et le Canada tablies pour un environnement non contrl. Le produit est sr pour un fonctionnement tel que dcrit dans ce manuel. La rduction aux expositions RF peut tre augmente si l'appareil peut tre conserv aussi loin que possible du corps de l'utilisateur ou que le dispositif est rgl sur la puissance de sortie la plus faible si une telle fonction est disponible. Caution :

1) the device for operation in the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems;

2) the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5470-5725 MHz shall comply with the e.i.r.p. limit; and 3) the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-5825 MHz shall comply with the e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point and non point-to-point operation as appropriate. 4) the worst-case tilt angle(s) necessary to remain compliant with the e.i.r.p. elevation mask requirement set forth in Section 6.2.2(3) shall be clearly indicated. 5) Users should also be advised that high-power radars are allocated as primary users (i.e. priority users) of the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5650-5850 MHz and that these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices. Avertissement:

1) les dispositifs fonctionnant dans la bande 5150-5250 MHz sont rservs uniquement pour une utilisation lintrieur afin de rduire les risques de brouillage prjudiciable aux systmes de satellites mobiles utilisant les mmes canaux;

2) le gain maximal dantenne permis pour les dispositifs utilisant les bandes 5250-5350 MHz et 5470-5725 MHz doit se conformer la limite de p.i.r.e.;

3) le gain maximal dantenne permis (pour les dispositifs utilisant la bande 5725-5825 MHz) doit se conformer la limite de p.i.r.e. spcifie pour lexploitation point point et non point point, selon le cas. 4) les pires angles dinclinaison ncessaires pour rester conforme lexigence de la p.i.r.e. applicable au masque dlvation, et nonce la section 6.2.2 3), doivent tre clairement indiqus. 5) De plus, les utilisateurs devraient aussi tre aviss que les utilisateurs de radars de haute puissance sont dsigns utilisateurs principaux (c.--d., quils ont la priorit) pour les bandes 5250-5350 MHz et 5650-5850 MHz et que ces radars pourraient causer du brouillage et/ou des dommages aux dispositifs LAN-EL.

Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices User Guide Copyright 2018 HP Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by HP Inc. under license. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks. Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: March 2018 Document Part Number: L25269-001 About This Guide This guide provides regulatory, safety and environmental information that is compliant with U.S., Canadian, and international regulations for notebook computers, desktops, thin clients, and personal workstations. To access the latest user guides or manuals for your product, go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Find your product, and then follow the on-screen instructions. WARNING! Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions could result in bodily harm or loss of life. CAUTION: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions could result in damage to equipment or loss of information. NOTE: Text set off in this manner provides important supplemental information. iii iv About This Guide Table of contents 1 Regulatory notices for notebook and tablet computers .................................................................................... 1 Accessing regulatory labels ................................................................................................................................... 1 Federal Communications Commission notice ....................................................................................................... 1 Modifications ....................................................................................................................................... 2 Cables .................................................................................................................................................. 2 Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules ............................................. 2 Brazil notice ........................................................................................................................................................... 3 Canada notices ....................................................................................................................................................... 3 European Union regulatory notices ....................................................................................................................... 4 Declaration of Conformity ................................................................................................................... 4 Products with radio functionality (EMF) ........................................................................... 4 Restrictions for products with radio functionality (select products only) ....................... 4 Radio frequency bands and maximum power levels (select products only) ................... 4 European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) ................................................. 5 Ergonomics notice ............................................................................................................. 5 Germany .......................................................................................................... 5 Germany (Deutscher text) .............................................................................. 5 Australia and New Zealand notice ......................................................................................................................... 5 China WWAN notice ................................................................................................................................................ 6 Japan notice ........................................................................................................................................................... 6 Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings ................................................ 6 Mexico notice ......................................................................................................................................................... 6 Singapore wireless notice ...................................................................................................................................... 7 South Korea notices ............................................................................................................................................... 7 Thailand WWAN wireless notice ............................................................................................................................ 7 Taiwan NCC notices ................................................................................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN 802.11a devices ............................................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN 802.11 devices/Bluetooth devices/Short range devices .............................................. 8 Airline travel notice ................................................................................................................................................ 8 User-replaceable battery notices .......................................................................................................................... 8 Factory-sealed battery notices ............................................................................................................................. 8 Laser compliance ................................................................................................................................................... 8 Modem notices ....................................................................................................................................................... 9 Telecommunications device approvals ............................................................................................... 9 U.S. modem statements ...................................................................................................................... 9 U.S. modem declarations .................................................................................................................. 10 v Canada modem statements .............................................................................................................. 12 Japan modem statements ................................................................................................................ 12 New Zealand modem statements ..................................................................................................... 12 Voice support .................................................................................................................. 13 Power cord notice ................................................................................................................................................ 13 Japan power cord notice ................................................................................................................... 13 DC plug of external HP power supply ................................................................................................ 13 Macrovision Corporation notice ........................................................................................................................... 13 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals ....................................................................................................................................................... 14 Accessing regulatory labels ................................................................................................................................. 14 Modem notices ..................................................................................................................................................... 15 Telecommunications device approvals ............................................................................................. 15 U.S. modem statements .................................................................................................................... 15 Canadian modem statements ........................................................................................................... 16 Japanese modem statements ........................................................................................................... 16 New Zealand modem statements ..................................................................................................... 16 Voice support .................................................................................................................. 17 Electromagnetic compatibility notices ................................................................................................................ 17 Federal Communications Commission notice ................................................................................... 17 Modifications ................................................................................................................... 18 Cables .............................................................................................................................. 18 Products with wireless LAN devices ............................................................................... 18 Australia telecom statement ............................................................................................................ 19 Brazil notice ....................................................................................................................................... 19 Canadian notice ................................................................................................................................. 19 European Union regulatory notices .................................................................................................. 19 Declaration of Conformity .............................................................................................. 19 Products with radio functionality (EMF) ...................................................... 20 Restrictions for products with radio functionality (select products only) .............................................................................................................. 20 Radio frequency bands and maximum power levels (select products only) .............................................................................................................. 20 European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) ............................................... 21 Ergonomics notice .......................................................................................................... 21 Germany ....................................................................................................... 21 Germany (Deutscher text) ............................................................................ 21 Japan notice ....................................................................................................................................... 21 Japan power cord notice ................................................................................................. 21 Wireless LAN and Bluetooth certification markings ....................................................... 22 vi Mexico notice ..................................................................................................................................... 22 South Korea notices .......................................................................................................................... 22 Thailand WWAN wireless notice ........................................................................................................ 22 Taiwan NCC notices ............................................................................................................................ 23 Wireless LAN 802.11a devices ........................................................................................ 23 Wireless LAN 802.11 devices/Bluetooth devices/Short range devices ......................... 23 Airline travel notice .............................................................................................................................................. 23 User-replaceable battery notices ........................................................................................................................ 23 Factory-sealed battery notices ........................................................................................................................... 23 Laser compliance ................................................................................................................................................. 24 3 Safety notices for notebook and tablet computers ......................................................................................... 25 Heat-related safety warning notice .................................................................................................................... 25 Potential safety conditions notice ....................................................................................................................... 25 Battery notices ..................................................................................................................................................... 25 Headset and earphone volume level notice ........................................................................................................ 26 Power cord notices .............................................................................................................................................. 26 Brazil notice ....................................................................................................................................... 26 Cleaning the keyboard ......................................................................................................................................... 26 Travel notice ........................................................................................................................................................ 26 China safety notices ............................................................................................................................................. 27 China: Altitude notice ........................................................................................................................ 27 China: Tropical warning notice .......................................................................................................... 27 Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner ...................................................... 27

......................................................................................................................................... 27 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals ........ 28 Important safety information ............................................................................................................................. 28 Installation conditions ......................................................................................................................................... 29 Battery notices ..................................................................................................................................................... 29 Fan notices ........................................................................................................................................................... 30 Headset and earphone volume level notice ........................................................................................................ 30 Laser safety ......................................................................................................................................................... 30 Power supply and power cord set requirements ................................................................................................ 30 Power supply class I grounding requirements .................................................................................. 30 Brazil notice .................................................................................................................... 31 Denmark .......................................................................................................................... 31 Finland ............................................................................................................................. 31 Norway ............................................................................................................................ 31 Sweden ............................................................................................................................ 31 Power supply requirements .............................................................................................................. 31 vii For use in Norway ........................................................................................................... 31 Power cord set requirements ............................................................................................................ 31 Japan power cord requirements ....................................................................................................... 32 Pinch hazard ........................................................................................................................................................ 32 TV antenna connectors protection ...................................................................................................................... 32 External television antenna grounding ............................................................................................ 32 Lightning protection .......................................................................................................................... 32 Note to CATV system installer ........................................................................................................... 33 China safety notices ............................................................................................................................................. 34 China: Altitude notice ........................................................................................................................ 34 China: Tropical warning notice .......................................................................................................... 34 Germany acoustics notice .................................................................................................................................... 35 Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner ...................................................... 35

......................................................................................................................................... 35 5 Environmental notices for notebook and tablet computers ............................................................................. 36 Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling ....................................................................................... 36 Disposal of waste equipment by users ............................................................................................................... 36 Brazil alkaline battery disposal ........................................................................................................................... 36 Brazil hardware recycling information ................................................................................................................ 36 ENERGY STAR Certification (select models only) ............................................................................................... 37 Chemical substances ........................................................................................................................................... 38 China environmental notices ............................................................................................................................... 38 China PC energy label .......................................................................................................................................... 38 China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ............................................................................................. 41 The Table of Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content ................................................... 41

........................................................................................... 42

(RoHS) ......................................................................................................... 43

....................................................................................................... 43 India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) .............................................................................................. 44 Information for European Union Commission Regulation 1275/2008 .............................................................. 45 IT ECO declarations .............................................................................................................................................. 45 Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ............................................................................................ 45 Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law ................................................................................................................... 45 Turkey EEE regulation .......................................................................................................................................... 45 Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply ........................................................................................... 45 TCO Certified ........................................................................................................................................................ 46 TCO Certified Edge ................................................................................................................................................ 47 viii 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals ....................................................................................................................................................... 48 Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling ....................................................................................... 48 Disposal of waste equipment by users ............................................................................................................... 48 Brazil alkaline battery disposal ........................................................................................................................... 48 Brazil hardware recycling information ................................................................................................................ 48 ENERGY STAR Certification (select models only) ............................................................................................... 49 Chemical substances ........................................................................................................................................... 50 Mercury statement .............................................................................................................................................. 50 Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply ............................................................................................. 50 China environmental notices ............................................................................................................................... 50 China PC energy label .......................................................................................................................................... 51 China restriction of hazard substances (ROHS) ................................................................................................... 54 The Table of Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content ................................................... 54

........................................................................................... 55

(RoHS) ......................................................................................................... 57

....................................................................................................... 57 India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) .............................................................................................. 58 Information for European Union Commission Regulation 1275/2008 .............................................................. 58 IT ECO declarations .............................................................................................................................................. 58 Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ............................................................................................ 58 Mehiki zakon o uporabi trajnostne energije ...................................................................................................... 58 Turkey EEE regulation .......................................................................................................................................... 59 TCO Certified ........................................................................................................................................................ 59 TCO Certified Edge ................................................................................................................................................ 60 Index ............................................................................................................................................................. 62 ix x 1 Regulatory notices for notebook and tablet computers This chapter provides country- and region-specific non-wireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply aboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. Accessing regulatory labels Regulatory labels, which provide country or regional regulatory information (for example, FCC ID), may be physically located on the bottom of the computer, inside the battery bay (select models only), under the removable service door (select models only), on the back of the display, or on the wireless or modem module. Some products may also provide electronic regulatory labels (e-labels) that can be accessed through the system BIOS. NOTE: Electronic labels are not available on all products. NOTE: Devices not for sale or use in the United States may not contain a FCC ID. To view electronic regulatory labels:

1. 2. 3. Turn on or restart the computer. Press esc or f10 to enter Computer Setup. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Advanced, select Electronic Labels, and then press enter. To view an electronic label, use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select one of the listed items, and then press OK. NOTE: The list of available electronic label items varies depending on the computer model and installed devices. To exit Computer Setup menus without making any changes:

Select the Exit icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select Main, select Ignore Changes and Exit, and then press enter. 4. 5. Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to Accessing regulatory labels 1 radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. 2. This device may not cause harmful interference, and This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. For questions regarding this product:

Write to:

HP Inc. 1501 Page Mill Road Palo Alto, CA 94304 Call HP at 650-857-1501 or Email techregshelp@hp.com To identify this product, refer to the part, series, or model number found on the product. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. 2 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook and tablet computers WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers. During normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers with displays equal to or less than 30.5 cm

(12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. During normal operation of notebook computers with displays greater than 30.5 cm (12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. Brazil notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Este equipamento atende aos limites de Taxa de Absoro Especfica referente exposio a campos eltricos, magnticos e eletromagnticos de radiofreqncias adotados pela ANATEL. Ao operar o dispositivo a uma distncia muito prxima do seu corpo, utilize um acessrio de armazenamento no metlico para posicionar o dispositivo a uma distncia mnima de 1,5 cm do corpo. Canada notices This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations, CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B). If this device has WLAN or Bluetooth capability, the device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation: The radiated output power of this device is below the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation. During normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers with displays equal to or less than 30.5 cm

(12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. During normal operation of notebook computers with displays greater than 30.5 cm (12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a, n, or ac wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-

channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antennas for this device are not replaceable. Any attempt at user access will damage your computer. Brazil notice 3 European Union regulatory notices Declaration of Conformity Products bearing the CE marking have been constructed so that they can operate in at least one EU Member State and comply with one or more of the following EU Directives as may be applicable:

RED 2014/53/EU; Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU; EMC Directive 2014/30/EU; Ecodesign Directive 2009/125/EC; RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU. Compliance with these directives is assessed using applicable European Harmonised Standards. The full Declaration of Conformity can be found at the following website: http://www.hp.eu/certificates

(Search with the product model name or its Regulatory Model Number (RMN), which may be found on the regulatory label.) The point of contact for regulatory matters is HP Deutschland GmbH, HQ-TRE, 71025, Boeblingen, Germany. Email techregshelp@hp.com Products with radio functionality (EMF) This product incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. For notebook computers in normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with EU requirements. Products designed to be operated at closer proximities, such as tablet computers, comply with applicable EU requirements in typical operating positions. Products can be operated without maintaining a separation distance unless otherwise indicated in instructions specific to the product. Restrictions for products with radio functionality (select products only) CAUTION: IEEE 802.11x wireless LAN with 5.155.35 GHz frequency band is restricted for indoor use only for all countries reflected in the matrix. Using this WLAN application outdoors might lead to interference issues with existing radio services. CAUTION: Fixed outdoor installations for WiGig application (5766 GHz frequency band) are excluded for all countries reflected in the matrix. Radio frequency bands and maximum power levels (select products only) Radio Technology Bluetooth; 2,4 GHz NFC; 13,56 MHz RFID; 125 kHz/13,56 MHz WLAN Wi-Fi 802.11x; 2,4 GHz WLAN Wi-Fi 802.11x; 5 GHz WWAN 4G LTE; 700/800/900/1800/2100/2600 MHz WWAN 3G UTMS; 900/2100 MHz Maximum Transmit Power EIRP (mW) 100 10 Less than 1 100 200 200 250 4 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook and tablet computers Radio Technology WWAN 2G GSM GPRS EDGE; 900 MHz WWAN 2G GSM GPRS EDGE; 1800 MHz WiGig 802.11ad; 60 GHz Maximum Transmit Power EIRP (mW) 2000 1000 316 Wireless Charging Qi; 110 kHz - 205 kHz Less than 1 NOTE: Use only HP-supported software drivers and correct country settings to ensure compliance. European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) The product herewith complies with the requirements of the applicable Directive and carries the CE marking accordingly. However, due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in different countries/

regions, the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network termination point. In the event of problems, you should contact your equipment supplier in the first instance. Ergonomics notice Germany When a mobile computer is used at the office workstation for display work tasks where the Visual Display Unit

(VDU) Directive 90/270/EEC is applicable, an adequate external keyboard is required. Depending on the application and task, an adequate external monitor may also be necessary to attain working conditions comparable to a workstation setup. Ref: EK1-ITB 2000 (voluntary GS certification) Mobile computers bearing the "GS" approval mark meet the applicable ergonomic requirements. Without external keyboards, they are suitable only for short-time use of VDU tasks. During mobile use with disadvantageous illumination conditions (e.g. direct sun light) reflections may occur, which result in reduced readability. Germany (Deutscher text) Wird ein mobiler Computer fr Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben verwendet, wo die Richtlinie 90/270/EEG

(Bildschirmarbeitsrichtlinie) anzuwenden ist, wird eine geeignete externe Tastatur notwendig. Abhngig von der Anwendung und der Aufgabe kann ein geeigneter externer Monitor erforderlich sein, um vergleichbare Arbeitsbedingungen zu einem stationren Arbeitsplatz zu erreichen. Ref: EK1-ITB 2000 (freiwillige GS Zertifizierung) Mobile Computer, welche das "GS" Zeichen tragen, entsprechen den ergonomischen Anforderungen und sind nur fr kurzzeitige Benutzung von Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben geeignet. Bei mobiler Nutzung mit ungnstigen Lichtverhltnissen (z.B. direkte Sonneneinstrahlung) kann es zu Reflexionen und damit zu Einschrnkungen der Lesbarkeit der dargestellten Zeichen kommen. Australia and New Zealand notice This equipment incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. In normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with the Australian and New Zealand Standards. Australia and New Zealand notice 5 China WWAN notice Japan notice V-2 VCCI32-1 5GHz Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings This product contains certified radio equipment. Some products may use electronic regulatory labels (e-labels). To view the certification mark and numbers on an e-label, please refer to the previous Accessing regulatory labels section. e e Mexico notice Declaracin para Mxico La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. The regulatory model number for this product is on the regulatory label. 6 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook and tablet computers If your product is provided with wireless accessories such as a keyboard or mouse and you need to identify the model of the accessory, refer to the label included on that accessory. The regulatory model number for this product is on the regulatory label. Singapore wireless notice Turn off any WWAN devices while you are aboard aircraft. The use of these devices aboard aircraft is illegal, may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, and may disrupt the cellular network. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular services to the offender, or legal action, or both. Users are reminded to restrict the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants, and where blasting operations are in progress. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, no part of the human body should be allowed to come too close to the antennas during operation of the equipment. This device has been designed to comply with applicable requirements for exposure to radio waves, based on scientific guidelines that include margins intended to assure the safety of all people, regardless of health and age. These radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the specific absorption rate (SAR). Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods, with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands. The SAR data information is based on CENELEC's standards EN50360 and EN50361, which use the limit of 2 watts per kilogram, averaged over 10 grams of tissue. South Korea notices Thailand WWAN wireless notice

.

(This telecommunication equipment conforms to the requirements of NBTC.) Taiwan NCC notices Wireless LAN 802.11a devices Singapore wireless notice 7 Wireless LAN 802.11 devices/Bluetooth devices/Short range devices Airline travel notice Use of electronic equipment aboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. User-replaceable battery notices When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery disposal. HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, refer to the HP website at http://www.hp.com/

recycle. For information about removing a user-replaceable battery, refer to the user guide included with the product. Factory-sealed battery notices The battery[ies] in this product cannot be easily replaced by users themselves. Removing or replacing the battery could affect your warranty coverage. If a battery is no longer holding a charge, contact support. When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for battery disposal. Laser compliance WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in the laser product installation guide, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified in the laser product installation guide. Allow only authorized service providers to repair the unit. 8 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook and tablet computers This product may be provided with an optical storage device (for example, a CD or DVD drive) and/or a fiber optic transceiver. Each of these devices that contain a laser is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product in accordance with IEC/EN 60825-1 and meets the requirements for safety of that standard. Each laser product complies with US FDA regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50 dated June 24, 2007. Modem notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries and regions whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country or region in which the product is located. Selecting a country or region other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country or region. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country or region selection is not made. If, when you select a country or region, a message appears that states that the country or region is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country or region and thus should not be used. U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Modem notices 9 Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-

distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. U.S. modem declarations Refer to the following modem vendor declarations for the modem device installed in your computer:

10 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook and tablet computers Modem notices 11 Canada modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japan modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the V.92 56K Data/Fax Modem is below:

New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:

a. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. b. c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). d. 12 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook and tablet computers Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. Power cord notice If you were not provided with a power cord for the computer or for an external power accessory intended for use with the computer, you should purchase a power cord that is approved for use in your country or region. The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the product's electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage and current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm/

18AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 1.0 m (3.2 ft) and 2 m (6.56 ft). If you have questions about the type of power cord to use, contact your authorized service provider. A power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. Japan power cord notice DC plug of external HP power supply Macrovision Corporation notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Power cord notice 13 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals Accessing regulatory labels Regulatory labels, which provide country or regional regulatory information (for example, FCC ID), may be physically located on the bottom of the computer, inside the battery bay, under the removable service door, on the back of the display, or on the wireless or modem module. Some products may also provide electronic regulatory labels (e-labels) that can be accessed through the system BIOS. NOTE: Electronic labels are not available on all products. NOTE: Devices not for sale or use in the United States may not contain a FCC ID. To view electronic regulatory labels:

1. 2. 3. Turn on or restart the computer. Press esc or f10 to enter Computer Setup. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Advanced, select Electronic Labels, and then press enter. To view an electronic label, use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select one of the listed items, and then press OK. NOTE: The list of available electronic label items varies depending on the computer model and installed devices. To exit Computer Setup menus without making any changes:

Select the Exit icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select Main, select Ignore Changes and Exit, and then press enter. 4. 5. 14 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-

sale terminals Modem notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (Ethernet network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries and regions whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country or region in which the product is located. Selecting a country or region other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country or region. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country or region selection is not made. If, when you select a country or region, a message appears that states that the country or region is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country or region and thus should not be used. U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the Modem notices 15 telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-

distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. Canadian modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japanese modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the LSI Corporation PCI-SV92EX Soft modem is below:

New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any 16 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-

sale terminals item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:

a. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. b. c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). d. Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. Electromagnetic compatibility notices This guide provides country- and region-specific nonwireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply aboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be Electromagnetic compatibility notices 17 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. 2. This device may not cause harmful interference, and This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. For questions regarding this product:

Write to:

HP Inc. 1501 Page Mill Road Palo Alto, CA 94304 Call HP at 650-857-1501 or Email techregshelp@hp.com To identify this product, refer to the part, series, or model number found on the product. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP Inc. may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables Connections to this device must be made with shielded cables with metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods in order to maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations. Products with wireless LAN devices This product may be equipped with a wireless LAN device. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation. During normal operation: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches). To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the documentation included with the computer. 18 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-

sale terminals Australia telecom statement The computer must be connected to the Telecommunication Network through a line cord that meets the requirements of AS/CA S008. WARNING! Modems without integral RJ11 connector that are shipped with this computer should not be installed in any other device. This equipment incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. In normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with the Australian and New Zealand Standards. Brazil notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. CAUTION: A alimentao de energia predefinida para 220/230Vv. Se voc possuir tomada eltrica de 110/115Vv, por favor, altere a chave na parte traseira do seu computador para a tenso correta. Canadian notice This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations, CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B). If this device has WLAN or Bluetooth capability, this device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation. During normal operation: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches). To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the documentation included with the computer. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a, n, or ac wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-

channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antenna for this device is not replaceable. Any attempt at user modification may damage your computer. European Union regulatory notices Declaration of Conformity Products bearing the CE marking have been constructed so that they can operate in at least one EU Member State and comply with one or more of the following EU Directives as may be applicable:

RED 2014/53/EU; Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU; EMC Directive 2014/30/EU; Ecodesign Directive 2009/125/EC; RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU. Compliance with these directives is assessed using applicable European Harmonised Standards. Electromagnetic compatibility notices 19 The full Declaration of Conformity can be found at the following website: http://www.hp.eu/certificates

(Search with the product model name or its Regulatory Model Number (RMN), which may be found on the regulatory label.) The point of contact for regulatory matters is HP Deutschland GmbH, HQ-TRE, 71025, Boeblingen, Germany. Email techregshelp@hp.com Products with radio functionality (EMF) This product incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. For computers in normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with EU requirements. Products designed to be operated at closer proximities, such as tablet computers, comply with applicable EU requirements in typical operating positions. Products can be operated without maintaining a separation distance unless otherwise indicated in instructions specific to the product. Restrictions for products with radio functionality (select products only) CAUTION: IEEE 802.11x wireless LAN with 5.155.35 GHz frequency band is restricted for indoor use only for all countries reflected in the matrix. Using this WLAN application outdoors might lead to interference issues with existing radio services. CAUTION: Fixed outdoor installations for WiGig application (5766 GHz frequency band) are excluded for all countries reflected in the matrix. Radio frequency bands and maximum power levels (select products only) Radio Technology Bluetooth; 2,4 GHz NFC; 13,56 MHz RFID; 125 kHz/13,56 MHz Wireless HD; 60 GHz WLAN Wi-Fi 802.11x; 2,4 GHz WLAN Wi-Fi 802.11x; 5 GHz WWAN 4G LTE; 700/800/900/1800/2100/2600 MHz WWAN 3G UTMS; 900/2100 MHz WWAN 2G GSM GPRS EDGE; 900 MHz WWAN 2G GSM GPRS EDGE; 1800 MHz WiGig 802.11ad; 60 GHz Maximum Transmit Power EIRP (mW) 100 10 Less than 1 Less than 10000 100 200 200 250 2000 1000 316 Wireless Charging Qi; 110kHz - 205 kHz Less than 1 NOTE: Use only HP-supported software drivers and correct country settings to ensure compliance. 20 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-

sale terminals European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) The product herewith complies with the requirements of the applicable Directive and carries the CE marking accordingly. However, due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in different countries/

regions, the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network termination point. In the event of problems, you should contact your equipment supplier in the first instance. This equipment has been designed to work with analogue DTMF Networks. This equipment may have internetworking difficulties in PSTN networks that only support Pulse Dialing. Please consult with your network operator for further assistance. Ergonomics notice Germany A computer system comprising HP brand products meets the applicable ergonomic requirements if all affected constituent products bear the "GS" approval mark, for example Business Desktop PC, keyboard, PC-

mouse and monitor. Germany (Deutscher text) Ein aus HP Produkten bestehendes Computersystem erfllt die anwendbaren ergonomischen Anforderungen, wenn alle verwendeten Komponenten das GS Zeichen tragen, wie z. B. Business Desktop PC, Tastatur, PC-

Maus und Bildschirm. Japan notice V-2 VCCI32-1 5GHz Japan power cord notice Electromagnetic compatibility notices 21 Wireless LAN and Bluetooth certification markings If this device contains radio equipment, it is certified radio equipment. Some products may use electronic regulatory labels (e-labels). To view the certification mark and numbers on an e-label, please refer to the previous Accessing regulatory labels section. e e Mexico notice Declaracin para Mxico La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. If your product is provided with wireless accessories such as a keyboard or mouse and you need to identify the model of the accessory, refer to the label included on that accessory. South Korea notices Thailand WWAN wireless notice

.

(This telecommunication equipment conforms to the requirements of NBTC.) This radio communication equipment has the electromagnetic field strength in compliance with the Safety Standard for the Use of Radio communication Equipment on Human Health announced by the National Telecommunications Commission. 22 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-

sale terminals Taiwan NCC notices Wireless LAN 802.11a devices Wireless LAN 802.11 devices/Bluetooth devices/Short range devices Airline travel notice Use of electronic equipment aboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. User-replaceable battery notices When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery disposal. HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, refer to the HP website at http://www.hp.com/

recycle. For information about removing a user-replaceable battery, refer to the user guide included with the product. Factory-sealed battery notices The battery[ies] in this product cannot be easily replaced by users themselves. Removing or replacing the battery could affect your warranty coverage. If a battery is no longer holding a charge, contact support. When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for battery disposal. Airline travel notice 23 Laser compliance WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in the laser product installation guide, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified in the laser product installation guide. Allow only authorized service providers to repair the unit. This product may be provided with an optical storage device (for example, a CD or DVD drive) and/or a fiber optic transceiver. Each of these devices that contain a laser is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product in accordance with IEC/EN 60825-1 and meets the requirements for safety of that standard. Each laser product complies with US FDA regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50 dated June 24, 2007. 24 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-

sale terminals 3 Safety notices for notebook and tablet computers WARNING! To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety & Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup, posture, and health and work habits for computer users, and provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is located on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo and on the Documentation CD that is included with the product. Heat-related safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC/EN 60950-1). Potential safety conditions notice If you notice any of the following conditions (or if you have other safety concerns), do not use the computer:

crackling, hissing, or popping sound, or a strong odor or smoke coming from the computer. It is normal for these conditions to appear when an internal electronic component fails in a safe and controlled manner. However, these conditions may also indicate a potential safety issue. Do not assume it is a safe failure. Turn off the computer, disconnect it from its power source, and contact technical support for assistance. Battery notices WARNING! Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture; do not short external contacts; do not dispose of in fire or water. WARNING! Keep new and used batteries away from children. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Fast charging may not be available for non-compatible or non-HP batteries. WARNING! Do not ingest battery, a Chemical Burn Hazard. WARNING! This product contains a coin/button cell battery. If the coin/button cell battery is swallowed, it can cause severe internal burns in just 2 hours and can lead to death. WARNING!

from children. If the battery compartment does not close securely, stop using the product and keep it away Heat-related safety warning notice 25 If you think batteries might have been swallowed or placed inside any part of the body, seek WARNING!

immediate medical attention. WARNING!

explosion or the leakage of flammable liquid or gas. WARNING! A battery subjected to extremely low air pressure may result in an explosion or the leakage of flammable liquid or gas. Leaving a battery in an extremely high temperature surrounding environment can result in an Headset and earphone volume level notice WARNING!

To prevent possible hearing damage, do not listen at high volume levels for long periods. Adjustment of the volume control as well as the equalizer to other settings than the center position may increase the ear-/headphones output voltage and therefore the sound pressure level. The use of factors influencing the ear-/headphones output other than those specified by the manufacturer (e.g. operating system, equalizer software, firmware, driver) may increase the ear-/headphones output voltage and therefore the sound pressure level. Power cord notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-

pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Brazil notice Este equipamento deve ser conectado obrigatoriamente em tomada de rede de energia eltrica que possua aterramento (trs pinos), conforme a norma nbr abnt 5410,visando a segurana dos usurios contra choques eltricos. Cleaning the keyboard WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. Clean the keyboard regularly to prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles that can become trapped beneath the keys. A can of compressed air with a straw extension can be used to blow air around and under the keys to loosen and remove debris. Travel notice WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. 26 Chapter 3 Safety notices for notebook and tablet computers China safety notices China: Altitude notice Altitude warning for products not certified for use in >5000 m Icon Description China: Tropical warning notice Tropical warning for products not certified for use in tropical regions. Icon Description Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner CAUTION: To reduce potential safety issues, use a galvanic isolator when connecting to a cable distribution system.

:

(1) 30 10

(2) 2 2 1 China safety notices 27 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals Important safety information WARNING! To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety & Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup, posture, and health and work habits for computer users, and provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is located on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo and on the Documentation CD that is included with the product. To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-

pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. The computer may be heavy; be sure to use ergonomically correct lifting procedures when moving it. Install the computer near an AC outlet. The AC power cord is your computers main AC disconnecting device and must be easily accessible at all times. For your safety, the power cord provided with your computer has a grounded plug. Always use the power cord with a properly grounded wall outlet, to avoid the risk of electrical shock. To reduce the possibility of an electric shock from the telephone network, plug your computer into the AC outlet before connecting it to the telephone line. Also, disconnect the telephone line before unplugging your computer from the AC power outlet. Always disconnect the modem cord from the telephone system before installing or removing your computer cover. Do not operate the computer with the cover removed. For your safety, always unplug the computer from its power source and from any telecommunications systems (such as telephone lines), networks, or modems before performing any service procedures. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or equipment damage. Hazardous voltage levels are inside the power supply and modem of this product. As a safety precaution, if the system power load exceeds the specific configurations capacities, the system may temporarily disable some USB ports. CAUTION:

the voltage select switch has been pre-set to the correct voltage setting for use in the particular country/

region where it was initially sold. Changing the voltage select switch to the incorrect position can damage your computer and void any implied warranty. If your computer is provided with a voltage select switch for use in a 115 or 230 V power system, This product has not been evaluated for connection to an IT power system (an AC distribution system with no direct connection to earth, according to IEC/EN 60950-1). 28 Chapter 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals Installation conditions See installation instructions before connecting this equipment to the input supply. WARNING! The equipment must be provided with a proper AC protective earth (PE) ground connection. Energized and moving parts may be inside the computer. Disconnect power to the equipment before removing the enclosure. Replace and secure the enclosure before re-energizing the equipment. Battery notices WARNING! The product may contain an internal lithium manganese dioxide, vanadium pentoxide, or alkaline battery or battery pack. There is risk of fire and burns if the battery pack is not handled properly. WARNING! Do not attempt to recharge the battery. WARNING! Do not expose to temperatures higher than 60 C (140 F). WARNING! Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts, or dispose of in fire or water. WARNING! Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. WARNING! Replace only with the HP spare designated for this product. WARNING! Do not ingest battery, a Chemical Burn Hazard. WARNING! This product contains a coin/button cell battery. If the coin/button cell battery is swallowed, it can cause severe internal burns in just 2 hours and can lead to death. WARNING! Keep new and used batteries away from children. WARNING!

from children. WARNING!

immediate medical attention. WARNING!

explosion or the leakage of flammable liquid or gas. WARNING! A battery subjected to extremely low air pressure may result in an explosion or the leakage of flammable liquid or gas. Leaving a battery in an extremely high temperature surrounding environment can result in an If the battery compartment does not close securely, stop using the product and keep it away If you think batteries might have been swallowed or placed inside any part of the body, seek Icon Description Batteries, battery packs, and accumulators should not be disposed of together with the general household waste. In order to forward them to recycling or proper disposal, please use the public collection system or return them to HP, an authorized HP partner, or their agents. Icon Description The Taiwan EPA requires dry battery manufacturing or importing firms, in accordance with Article 15 of the Waste Disposal Act, to indicate the recovery marks on the batteries used in sales, giveaways, or promotions. Contact a qualified Taiwanese recycler for proper battery disposal. Installation conditions 29 Fan notices WARNING!

WARNING! Keep body parts away from moving parts. WARNING! Keep body parts away from fan blades. WARNING! Keep body parts out of the motion path. Headset and earphone volume level notice WARNING!

To prevent possible hearing damage, do not listen at high volume levels for long periods. Adjustment of the volume control as well as the equalizer to other settings than the center position may increase the ear-/headphones output voltage and therefore the sound pressure level. The use of factors influencing the ear-/headphones output other than those specified by the manufacturer (e.g. operating system, equalizer software, firmware, driver) may increase the ear-/headphones output voltage and therefore the sound pressure level. Laser safety For products equipped with optical drives or fiber optic transceivers. This product may be provided with an optical storage device (i.e., CD or DVD drive) and/or fiber optic transceiver. These contain lasers and are classified as Class 1 Laser Products in accordance with the standard IEC/EN 60825-1 and comply with its requirements. Each laser product complies with US FDA Regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007. WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein or in the laser products installation guide may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified herein. Allow only HP Authorized Service technicians to repair the unit. Power supply and power cord set requirements Power supply class I grounding requirements For protection from fault currents, the equipment shall be connected to a grounding terminal. Plug the system power cord into an AC outlet that provides a ground connection. Substitute cords may not provide adequate fault protection. Only use the power cord supplied with this product or an HP Inc. authorized replacement. 30 Chapter 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals Brazil notice Este equipamento deve ser conectado obrigatoriamente em tomada de rede de energia eltrica que possua aterramento (trs pinos), conforme a norma nbr abnt 5410,visando a segurana dos usurios contra choques eltricos. Denmark Apparatets stikprop skal tilsluttes en stikkontakt med jord, som giver forbindelse til stikproppens jord. Finland Norway Sweden Laite on liitettv suojakoskettimilla varustettuun pistorasiaan. Apparatet m tilkoples jordet stikkontakt. Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag. Power supply requirements The power supplies on some products have external power switches. The voltage select switch feature on the product permits it to operate from any line voltage between 100-127 or 200-240 volts AC. Power supplies on those products that do not have external power switches are equipped with internal circuits that sense the incoming voltage and automatically switch to the proper voltage. For safety reasons, use only the AC adapter provided with the unit or an authorized replacement adapter from HP Inc. Replacement part numbers may be found at http://www.hp.com/cgi-bin/hpsupport/index.pl. For use in Norway This product is also designed for an IT power system with phase-to-phase voltage 230V. Power cord set requirements The power cord set received with the product meets the requirements for use in the country where the equipment was originally purchased. Use only the power cord provided with the unit or an authorized replacement power cord from HP Inc. or an approved HP Inc. source. Replacement part numbers may be found at http://www.hp.com/cgi-bin/hpsupport/index.pl. Power cord sets for use in other countries must meet the requirements of the country where you use the product. For more information on power cord set requirements, contact your authorized HP dealer, reseller, or service provider. WARNING! Do not use power cords from other products. Mismatched power cords may result in a shock and fire hazard. The requirements listed below are applicable to all countries:

1. 2. The power cord must be approved by an acceptable accredited agency responsible for evaluation in the country where the power cord set will be installed. The length of the power cord must be between 1.8 m (6 feet) and 3.6 m (12 feet). For a power cord 2.0 m

(6.56 feet) or less, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm2 or 18AWG. If the power cord is longer than 2.0 m (6.56 feet), the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 1.0 mm2 or 16AWG. Power supply and power cord set requirements 31 The power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. WARNING! Do not operate this product with a damaged power cord set. If the power cord set is damaged in any manner, replace it immediately. Damaged cords may result in user exposure to hazards. Japan power cord requirements For use in Japan, use only the power cord received with this product. CAUTION: Do not use the power cord received with this product on any other products. Pinch hazard WARNING! Observe pinch hazard areas. Keep fingers away from closing parts. TV antenna connectors protection External television antenna grounding If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is electrically grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper electrical grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna-

discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna-discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. Lightning protection For added protection of any product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug the product from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product from lightning and power line surges. 32 Chapter 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals Table 4-1 Antenna Grounding Reference Grounding Component 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Electric Service Equipment Power Service Grounding Electrode System (NEC Art 250, Part III) Ground Clamps Grounding Conductors (NEC Section 810.21) Antenna Discharge Unit (NEC Section 810.20) Ground Clamp Antenna Lead-in Wire Note to CATV system installer This reminder is provided to call the CATV systems installers attention to section 820.93 of the National Electric Code, which provides guidelines for proper grounding and in particular, specify that the Coaxial cable shield shall be connected to grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. TV antenna connectors protection 33 China safety notices China: Altitude notice Altitude warning for products not certified for use in >5000 m Icon Description China: Tropical warning notice Tropical warning for products not certified for use in tropical regions. Icon Description 34 Chapter 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals Germany acoustics notice Sound pressure level (LpA) is far below 70dB(A) (operator position, normal operation, according to ISO 7779) Product noise emission data can be found in the product related IT ECO Declarations at Internet address:

http://www.hp.com/go/ted Schalldruckpegel (LpA) ist weit unterhalb 70 dB(A) (Benutzerposition, normaler Betrieb, nach ISO 7779) Die Schallemissionswerte der Produkte knnen in den produktbezogenen IT ECO Declarations auf folgender Internet Adresse gefunden werden: http://www.hp.com/go/ted Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner CAUTION: To reduce potential safety issues, use a galvanic isolator when connecting to a cable distribution system.

:

(1) 30 10

(2) 2 2 1 Germany acoustics notice 35 5 Environmental notices for notebook and tablet computers This chapter provides country- and region-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges packaging, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. For information about recycling the product in Japan, refer to http://www.hp.com/jp/hardwarerecycle/. Disposal of waste equipment by users This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste. Instead, you should protect human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. For more information, please contact your household waste disposal service or go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. Brazil alkaline battery disposal Icon Description Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no daven ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum Brazil hardware recycling information Icon Description Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no daven ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. 36 Chapter 5 Environmental notices for notebook and tablet computers Icon Description No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar ENERGY STAR Certification (select models only) ENERGY STAR is a U.S. Environmental Protection Agency voluntary program that helps businesses and individuals save money and protect our climate through superior energy efficiency. Products that earn the ENERGY STAR prevent greenhouse gas emissions by meeting strict energy efficiency criteria or requirements set by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. As an ENERGY STAR Partner, HP Inc. has followed the U.S. EPAs enhanced product certification process to ensure that products marked with the ENERGY STAR logo are ENERGY STAR certified per the applicable ENERGY STAR guidelines. The following logo appears on all ENERGY STAR-certified computers:

A key ENERGY STAR requirement for computer products is power management features that significantly reduce energy consumption when the product is not in use. Power management allows a computer to automatically enter a low power sleep mode, or other low power mode, after a defined period of inactivity. The power management features have been preset as follows when the computer is operating on AC power:

Computer type Time to activate display sleep mode Time to activate computer sleep mode (minutes) Resuming from sleep mode Notebooks, Mobile Workstations Less than or equal to 15 minutes (varies by model) Less than or equal to 30 minutes (varies by model) Product will exit sleep mode when the power/sleep button is pressed. If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is enabled, the system can resume from sleep in response to a network signal. Tablets/Slates Less than or equal to 1 minute Not applicable Not applicable For computers that support an always-on, always-connected use profile where internet access is available

(such as tablets and slates), alternative low power modes - such as Short or Long Idle modes (as defined in the ENERGY STAR Computer Program Requirements) are provided that consume very little power (</= 10 Watts) and when applicable, maximize product battery life. These alternative low power modes are dynamic, with the display sleep mode activated within 1 minute of user inactivity. The computer exits Sleep when the power/Sleep button is pressed. When the Wake On LAN (WOL) feature is enabled, the computer can also exit Sleep in response to a network signal. Additional information on the potential energy and financial savings of the power management feature can be found on the EPA ENERGY STAR Power Management website at http://www.energystar.gov/

powermanagement. Additional information on the ENERGY STAR program and its environmental benefits are available on the EPA ENERGY STAR website at http://www.energystar.gov. ENERGY STAR Certification (select models only) 37 ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered trademarks owned by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Chemical substances HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No 1907/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at http://www.hp.com/go/reach. China environmental notices China PC energy label In accordance with The Regulation of the Implementation on China Energy Label for Microcomputers, this microcomputer has an Energy Efficiency Label. The energy efficiency grade, TEC (Typical Energy Consumption), and product category presented on the label are determined and calculated according to the standard GB28380-2012. 1. Energy Efficiency Grades The grade is determined by the standard with the calculation of base consumption level with the sum of all the allowances for additional components such as main memory and graphics card. For products of any grade, the TEC should not exceed the value specified in the following table:

Product Type Desktop microcomputer, AIO Category A Category B Category C Category D TEC (kilowatt hour) Grade 1 98.0+Efa 125.0+Efa 159.0+Efa 184.0+Efa Grade 2 148.0+Efa 175.0+Efa 209.0+Efa 234.0+Efa Grade 3 198.0+Efa 225.0+Efa 259.0+Efa 284.0+Efa 38 Chapter 5 Environmental notices for notebook and tablet computers Product Type Portable Computer TEC (kilowatt hour) Category A Category B Category C 20.0+Efa 26.0+Efa 54.5+Efa 35.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 75.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 65.0+Efa 123.5+Efa NOTE: Efa is the sum of power factor of product additional functions. 2. 3. Typical Energy Consumption The energy consumption figure presented on the label is the data measured with the representative configuration that covers all the configurations in the registration unit which is selected according to

"The Regulation of the Implementation on China Energy Label for Microcomputers". Thus, actual energy consumption of this specific microcomputer may not be the same as the TEC data presented in the label. Product Category The product category is determined by the standard according to the microcomputers configuration. The categorization of products complies with the regulations in the following table:

Product Type Category A Category B Category C Category D Configuration Description Desktop microcomputer, AIO Portable Computer The desktop microcomputer and AIO whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B, C, and D The portable computer whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B and C CPU physical core number of 2, and system memory of not less than 2GB A Discrete GPU CPU physical core number of over 2, with at least one of the following features:

1. 2. System memory of not less than 2 GB A Discrete GPU The product that has a CPU physical core number of not less than 2, system memory of not less than 2GB, A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit. CPU physical core number of not less than 4, with at least one of the following features:

1. 2. System memory of not less than 4 GB A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit For more details on the specification, please refer to the standard GB28380-2012. China PC energy label 39 40 Chapter 5 Environmental notices for notebook and tablet computers China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) The Table of Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content As required by Chinas Management Methods for Restricted Use of Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Products Part Name Battery Cables Camera Chassis/Other Flash memory card reader Floppy disk drive Hard disk drive Headphones I/O PCAs Keyboard Liquid crystal display

(LCD) panel Media (CD/DVD/floppy) Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Mouse Optical disk drive Optional docking device Power adapter Power pack Power supply Remote control Smart card/Java card reader Speakers, external TV tuner Hazardous Substances Lead (Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) X X X X X X X X X X X O X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) 41 Hazardous Substances Part Name USB flash memory drive USB hub Web camera Wireless receiver Wireless cards Lead (Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O This form has been prepared in compliance with the provisions of SJ/T 11364. O: Indicates that the content of said hazardous substance in all of the homogenous materials in the component is within the limits required by GB/T 26572. X: Indicates that the content of said hazardous substance exceeds the limits required by GB/T 26572 in at least one homogenous material in the component. All parts named in this table with an X are in compliance with the European Unions RoHS Legislation. NOTE: The referenced Environmental Protection Use Period Marking was determined according to normal operating use conditions of the product such as temperature and humidity.

/

I/O PCA

(LCD) CD/DVD/

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI))

(PBB)

(PBDE) X X X X X X X X X X X O X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 42 Chapter 5 Environmental notices for notebook and tablet computers

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI))

(PBB)

(PBDE) O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

/Java USB USB X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O SJ/T 11364 O GB/T 26572 X GB/T 26572 X RoHS

(RoHS) Declaration of the Presence Condition of the Restricted Substances Marking Restricted substances and its chemical symbols Unit Lead (Pb) Mercury (Hg) Cadmium (Cd) Hexavalent chromium (CR+6) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) Cables

(RoHS) 43 Restricted substances and its chemical symbols

/

Chassis/Other

/

I/O PCAs

(LCD) Liquid crystal display (LCD) panel Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Power pack Power supply Storage Devices Wireless Devices 1 0.1 % 0.01 %

Note 1: "Exceeding 0.1 wt %" and "exceeding 0.01 wt %" indicate that the percentage content of the restricted substance exceeds the reference percentage value of presence condition. 2 Note 2: "" indicates that the percentage content of the restricted substance does not exceed the percentage of reference value of presence. 3 Note 3: The "" indicates that the restricted substance corresponds to the exemption. http://www.hp.com/support To access the latest user guides or manuals for your product, go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Find your product, and then follow the on-screen instructions. India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) This product, as well as its related consumables and spares, complies with the reduction in hazardous substances provisions of the "India E-waste Rule 2016." It does not contain lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations exceeding 0.1 44 Chapter 5 Environmental notices for notebook and tablet computers weight % and 0.01 weight % for cadmium, except where allowed pursuant to the exemptions set in Schedule 2 of the Rule. Information for European Union Commission Regulation 1275/2008 To locate product power consumption data, including when the product is in networked standby with all wired network ports connected and wireless devices connected, refer to section P14 Additional information of the product IT ECO Declaration at http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/

itecodesktop-pc.html. Where applicable, activate and deactivate a wireless network using the instructions included in the product user guide or the operating system. Information is also available at http://www.hp.com/support. IT ECO declarations For notebook PCs, go to http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/

iteconotebook-o.html. Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers provide Material Content Declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, visit http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law This product has been labeled in compliance with the Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law requiring disclosure of power consumption in the normal use (idle mode) and standby modes. Your product is one of many configurations in this model family; the idle mode power consumption of your specific configuration may vary from the information on the label. Actual power consumption of your product may be higher or lower than the value reported on the Mexico product energy label due to factors such as configuration (components and modules chosen) and usage (tasks being performed, software installed and running, etc.). Turkey EEE regulation Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. Information for European Union Commission Regulation 1275/2008 45 This products real-time clock battery or coin cell battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. TCO Certified This section applies only to products bearing the TCO Certified logo. 46 Chapter 5 Environmental notices for notebook and tablet computers TCO Certified Edge This section applies only to products bearing the TCO Certified Edge logo. TCO Certified Edge 47 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals This chapter provides country- and region-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges packaging, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. For information about recycling the product in Japan, refer to http://www.hp.com/jp/hardwarerecycle/. Disposal of waste equipment by users Icon Description This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste. Instead, you should protect human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. For more information, please contact your household waste disposal service or go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. Brazil alkaline battery disposal Icon Description Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no daven ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum Brazil hardware recycling information Icon Description Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no daven ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas 48 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals Icon Description No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar ENERGY STAR Certification (select models only) ENERGY STAR is a U.S. Environmental Protection Agency voluntary program that helps businesses and individuals save money and protect our climate through superior energy efficiency. Products that earn the ENERGY STAR prevent greenhouse gas emissions by meeting strict energy efficiency criteria or requirements set by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. As an ENERGY STAR Partner, HP Inc. has followed the U.S. EPAs enhanced product certification process to ensure that products marked with the ENERGY STAR logo are ENERGY STAR certified per the applicable ENERGY STAR guidelines. The following logo appears on all ENERGY STAR-certified computers:

A key ENERGY STAR requirement for computer products is power management features that significantly reduce energy consumption when the product is not in use. Power management allows a computer to automatically enter a low power sleep mode, or other low power mode, after a defined period of inactivity. The power management features have been preset as follows when the computer is operating on AC power:

Computer type Time to activate display sleep mode Time to activate computer sleep mode (minutes) Resuming from sleep mode Desktops, Integrated Desktops, Workstations Less than or equal to 15 minutes (varies by model) Less than or equal to 30 minutes (varies by model) Thin clients Less than or equal to 15 minutes (varies by model) Less than or equal to 30 minutes when sleep mode is supported by the operating system (varies by model) Product will exit sleep mode when user interacts with any input device, including the mouse or keyboard. If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is enabled, the system can resume from sleep in response to a network signal. When sleep mode is supported by operating system product will exit sleep mode when user interacts with any input device, including the mouse or keyboard. If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is enabled, the system can resume from sleep in response to a network signal. The computer exits Sleep when the power/Sleep button is pressed. When the Wake On LAN (WOL) feature is enabled, the computer can also exit Sleep in response to a network signal. Additional information on the potential energy and financial savings of the power management feature can be found on the EPA ENERGY STAR Power Management website at http://www.energystar.gov/

powermanagement. ENERGY STAR Certification (select models only) 49 Additional information on the ENERGY STAR program and its environmental benefits are available on the EPA ENERGY STAR website at http://www.energystar.gov. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered trademarks owned by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Chemical substances HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No. 1907/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at http://www.hp.com/go/reach. Mercury statement This statement applies to all-in-one computers with built-in display panels that do not use LED backlighting. This HP product may contain the following material that might require special handling at end-of-life:

Mercury in the fluorescent lamp in the display LCD Disposal of mercury can be regulated because of environmental considerations. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA)

(http://www.eiae.org). Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply The computers real-time clock battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/. China environmental notices 50 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals China PC energy label In accordance with The Regulation of the Implementation on China Energy Label for Microcomputers, this microcomputer has an Energy Efficiency Label. The energy efficiency grade, TEC (Typical Energy Consumption), and product category presented on the label are determined and calculated according to the standard GB28380-2012. 1. Energy Efficiency Grades The grade is determined by the standard with the calculation of base consumption level with the sum of all the allowances for additional components such as main memory and graphics card. For products of any grade, the TEC should not exceed the value specified in the following table:

Product Type Desktop microcomputer, AIO Category A Portable Computer Category B Category C Category D Category A Category B Category C TEC (kilowatt hour) Grade 1 98.0+Efa 125.0+Efa 159.0+Efa 184.0+Efa 20.0+Efa 26.0+Efa 54.5+Efa Grade 2 148.0+Efa 175.0+Efa 209.0+Efa 234.0+Efa 35.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 75.0+Efa Grade 3 198.0+Efa 225.0+Efa 259.0+Efa 284.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 65.0+Efa 123.5+Efa NOTE: Efa is the sum of power factor of product additional functions. 2. 3. Typical Energy Consumption The energy consumption figure presented on the label is the data measured with the representative configuration that covers all the configurations in the registration unit which is selected according to The Regulation of the Implementation on China Energy Label for Microcomputers". Thus, actual energy consumption of this specific microcomputer may not be the same as the TEC data presented in the label. Product Category The product category is determined by the standard according to the microcomputers configuration. The categorization of products complies with the regulations in the following table:

Product Type Category A Category B Category C Configuration Description Desktop microcomputer, AIO Portable Computer The desktop microcomputer and AIO whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B, C, and D The portable computer whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B and C CPU physical core number of 2, and system memory of not less than 2 GB A Discrete GPU CPU physical core number of over 2, with at least one of the following features:

1. System memory of not less than 2 GB The product that has a CPU physical core number of not less than 2, system memory of not less than 2GB, A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit. China PC energy label 51 Product Type Category D Configuration Description 2. A Discrete GPU CPU physical core number of not less than 4, with at least one of the following features:

1. 2. System memory of not less than 4 GB A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit For more details on the specification, please refer to the standard GB28380-2012. 52 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals China PC energy label 53 China restriction of hazard substances (ROHS) The Table of Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content As required by Chinas Management Methods for Restricted Use of Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Products Part Name Battery Cables Camera Chassis/Other Fan Flash memory card reader Floppy disk drive Hard disk drive Headphones Heat sink I/O PCAs Keyboard Liquid crystal display

(LCD) panel Media (CD/DVD/floppy) Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Mouse Optical disk drive Optional docking device Power adapter Power supply Projector Remote control Smart card/Java card reader Hazardous Substances Lead (Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) X X X X X X X X X X X X X O X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 54 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals Part Name Solid-state drives Speakers, external Stylus Touch mat TV tuner USB flash memory drive USB hub Web camera Wireless receiver Wireless cards 3D Capture Stage/

Turntable Hazardous Substances Lead (Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O This form has been prepared in compliance with the provisions of SJ/T 11364. O: Indicates that the content of said hazardous substance in all of the homogenous materials in the component is within the limits required by GB/T 26572. X: Indicates that the content of said hazardous substance exceeds the limits required by GB/T 26572 in at least one homogenous material in the component. All parts named in this table with an X are in compliance with the European Unions RoHS Legislation. NOTE: The referenced Environmental Protection Use Period Marking was determined according to normal operating use conditions of the product such as temperature and humidity.

/

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd) X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O

(Cr(VI)) O O O O O O

(PBB)

(PBDE) O O O O O O O O O O O O China restriction of hazard substances (ROHS) 55 I/O PCA

(LCD) CD/DVD/

/Java USB USB 3D /

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI))

(PBB)

(PBDE) X X X X X X X O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O SJ/T 11364 O GB/T 26572 X GB/T 26572 X RoHS 56 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI))

(PBB)

(PBDE)

(RoHS) Declaration of the Presence Condition of the Restricted Substances Marking Restricted substances and its chemical symbols Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent chromium (CR

+6) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Unit Cables

/ Chassis/Other

/

I/O PCAs

(LCD) Liquid crystal display

(LCD) panel (for AIO only) Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Power supply Storage Devices Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) 1 0.1 % 0.01 %

Note 1: "Exceeding 0.1 wt %" and "exceeding 0.01 wt %" indicate that the percentage content of the restricted substance exceeds the reference percentage value of presence condition. 2 Note 2: "" indicates that the percentage content of the restricted substance does not exceed the percentage of reference value of presence. 3 Note 3: The "" indicates that the restricted substance corresponds to the exemption. http://www.hp.com/support To access the latest user guides or manuals for your product, go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Find your product, and then follow the on-screen instructions.

(RoHS) 57 India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) This product, as well as its related consumables and spares, complies with the reduction in hazardous substances provisions of the "India E-waste Rule 2016." It does not contain lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations exceeding 0.1 weight % and 0.01 weight % for cadmium, except where allowed pursuant to the exemptions set in Schedule 2 of the Rule. Information for European Union Commission Regulation 1275/2008 To locate product power consumption data, including when the product is in networked standby with all wired network ports connected and wireless devices connected, refer to section P14 Additional information of the product IT ECO Declaration at http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/

itecodesktop-pc.html. Where applicable, activate and deactivate a wireless network using the instructions included in the product user guide or the operating system. Information is also available at http://www.hp.com/support. IT ECO declarations Desktop PCs and Thin Clients http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecodesktop-pc.html?

jumpid=reg_R1002_USEN Workstations http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecoworkstatio.html Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers provide Material Content Declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, visit http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. Mehiki zakon o uporabi trajnostne energije Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico Se ha etiquetado este producto en conformidad con la Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico, que requiere la divulgacin del consumo de energa del modo de uso normal (modo inactivo) y del modo de espera. Su producto es una de las muchas configuraciones de esta familia de modelos; el consumo de energa del modo inactivo de su configuracin especfica puede diferir de la informacin de la etiqueta. El consumo real de energa de su producto puede ser mayor o menor que el valor informado en la etiqueta de 58 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals energa de producto para Mxico a causa de factores como la configuracin (componentes y mdulos seleccionados) y el uso (tareas que se estn efectuando, software instalado y en ejecucin, etc.). NOTE: Esta ley no es aplicable a los workstations. This product has been labeled in compliance with the Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law requiring disclosure of power consumption in the normal use (idle mode) and standby modes. Your product is one of many configurations in this model family; the idle mode power consumption of your specific configuration may vary from the information on the label. Actual power consumption of your product may be higher or lower than the value reported on the Mexico product energy label due to factors such as configuration (components and modules chosen) and usage (tasks being performed, software installed and running, etc.). NOTE: Workstations are not labeled because the law is not applicable to the workstation product category. Turkey EEE regulation TCO Certified This section applies only to products bearing the TCO Certified logo. Turkey EEE regulation 59 TCO Certified Edge This section applies only to products bearing the TCO Certified Edge logo. 60 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals TCO Certified Edge 61 Index Symbols/Numerics 43, 57 43, 57 A airline travel notice 8, 23 altitude notice 27, 34 B battery 25, 29 battery notice 8, 23, 46, 48 battery recycling 36, 48 Brazil notice 3, 19, 26, 31 C cable grounding notice 27, 35 Canada modem statement 12, 16 Canada notices 3, 19 China environmental notices 38, 50 China PC energy label 38, 51 China restriction of hazardous substances notice 41, 54 D disposal notices battery 46, 48 battery, user replacement 8, 23 equipment 36, 48 factory sealed battery 8, 23 E electronic hardware and battery recycling 36, 48 ENERGY STAR certification 37, 49 environmental notices 36, 48 equipment disposal notice 36, 48 ergonomics notice 5, 21 European Union Commission Regulation 1275/2008 45, 58 F fan notice 30 62 Index Federal Communications Commission desktops, thin clients, and workstations notice 17 desktops, thin clients, workstations cables 18 desktops, thin clients, modem statements Canada 12, 16 Japan 12 New Zealand 12, 16 U.S. 9, 10, 15 modifications, desktops, thin clients, workstations modifications 18 workstations notebook computers cables 2 notebook computers modifications 2 notebook computers notice 2 G GS Notice 5, 21 H headset and earphone volume level notice 26, 30 I India restriction of hazardous substances notice 44, 58 J Japan modem statement 12 Japan notice 6, 21 Japan power cord notice 13, 21, 32 Japan restriction of hazardous substances notice 45, 58 K keyboard notice 26 L labels, regulatory 1, 14 laser safety notice 9, 24, 30 M Macrovision Corporation notice 13 maximum power levels 4, 20 Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law 45 Mexico wireless notice 6, 22 modem notices 9, 15 Federal Communications Commission 18 modifications, notebook computers Federal Communications Commission 2 N New Zealand modem statement 12, 16 notices airline travel 8, 23 battery 8, 23, 25, 29, 46, 48 Brazil 3, 19, 26, 31 Canada 3, 19 China restriction of hazardous substances 41, 54 environmental 36, 48 equipment disposal 36, 48 ergonomics 5, 21 fan 30 headset and earphone volume level 26, 30 India restriction of hazardous substances 44, 58 Japan 6, 21 Japan power cord 13, 21, 32 Japan restriction of hazardous substances 45, 58 keyboard 26 laser safety 9, 24, 30 Macrovision Corporation 13 Mexico 6, 22 modem 9, 15 perchlorate material 45, 50 power cords 13, 26 Singapore 7 South Korea 7, 22 Taiwan 7, 23 Thailand WWAN wireless notice 7, 22 travel 26 notices, desktops, thin clients, and workstations Federal Communications Commission 17 notices, notebook computers Federal Communications Commission 2 P power cord notice 13, 26 R radio frequency bands 4, 20 recycling, electronic hardware and battery 36, 48 S Singapore wireless notice 7 South Korea notice 7, 22 T Taiwan notice 7, 23 TCO Certified Certification 46, 59 TCO Certified Edge Certification 47, 60 Thailand WWAN wireless notice 7, 22 travel notice 26 tropical warning notice 27, 34 TV tuner, cable grounding notice 27, 35 U U.S. modem statement 9, 10, 15 V voice support 13, 17 volume level notice, headset and earphone 26, 30 W wireless LAN devices 3, 18, 19 Index 63

Label & Label Location forTPN-Q213 Bottom Side Contains Intel Radio Model: AX200D2WL Contains FCC ID: B94-AX200D2LZ Contains IC: 466Q-AX200D2LCN

Date: 2020.01.20 TO:

Federal Communication Commission Equipment Authorization Branch 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MID 21046 Regarding: FCC ID B94-AX201D2WS To whom it may concern:

We, the undersigned, hereby authorize << SGS Taiwan Ltd.>> to act on our behalf in all manners relating to application for equipment authorization with respect to the FCC ID above, including signing of all documents relating to these matters. Any and all acts carried out by the agent on our behalf shall have the same effect as acts of our own. a. Name, address and contact information of third party:

SGS Taiwan Ltd. Jim Chang Telephone: +886 2 2299 3279 Ext 1194 E-mail: jim.chang@sgs.com No. 134, Wu Kung Rd., New Taipei Industrial Park, Wu Ku District,New Taipei City, 24803 Taiwan b. Term of designation, unless earlier terminated by HP: 1 year. We, the undersigned, hereby certify that we are not subject to a denial of federal benefits, that includes FCC benefits, pursuant to Section 5301 of the Anti-Drug Abuse Act of 1988, 21 U.S.C. 862(a). Where our agent signs the application for certification on our behalf, I acknowledge that all responsibility for complying with the terms and conditions for Certification, as specified by Telefication B.V., still resides with << HP Inc. >>. This authorization is valid until further written notice from the applicant. Title: Regulatory Program Manager, Worldwide Technical Regulations Name (Printed): Liang Rong Chiao Signature:

On behalf of Company: HP Inc. Telephone: +886 2 3789-2469

Date: Feb. 19, 2020 Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia MD 21046 C.C.: SGS Taiwan Limited Subject: Requesting Class II permissive change for FCC ID: B94-AX201D2WS To Whom It May Concern:

The purpose of this letter is to request a Class II Permissive change for FCC ID:

B94-AX201D2WS, Original grant date: 06/13/2019, Applicant: HP Inc. The major change filed under this application is 1. The subject approved module is being used in different host (Portable category Configuration, Host Brand/Model:

HP/TPN-Q239). 2. SAR Testing is performed to demonstrate RF Compliance. 3. The difference compared with the original design is adding 4 antennas to this EUT. Antenna is of same type and lower gain from original approval 4. Software security remains unchanged from original application. Best Regards Jim Chang / Manager SGS Taiwan Ltd.

(Signature)

Authorization on Behalf of HP Inc. For the US Federal Communications Commission Office of Engineering and Technology and Other FCC Programs and Offices 1. I, Richard P Tarsio, am on the Worldwide Technical Regulations staff of HP Inc. (HP) and Applicant/Grantee Contact of Record for HP Inc. together with its subsidiaries and affiliates worldwide (collectively, HP) for HPs dealings with the United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC). I am duly authorized by HP Inc. to make this Authorization on HP Inc.s behalf. 2. This Authorization will designate the person named below to act on my behalf and HP Inc.s behalf as authorized agent and representative, until further notice, with the additional power to designate one or more third party agents for HP Inc. with regard to particular matters and applications. All acts carried out and requests made by this named representative relating to any matter before the FCC, including requests for confidentiality, shall have the same effect as mine. Name:

Title:

Address:

Rong-Chiao Liang Regulatory Program Manager HP Inc. 10F, No. 66 Jingmao 2nd Rd NanGang District Taipei, Taiwan 11568 866 2 37892469 frances.liang@hp.com Telephone:

E-mail:

3. Questions about the scope and effect of this Authorization should be addressed as follows:

4. I declare under penalty of perjury that the foregoing is true and correct, and that this Authorization was executed at Fort Collins, Colorado on the date indicated below my signature. Richard P Tarsio US Canada Technical Regulations 3390 East Harmony Road, MS 66 Fort Collins, CO 80528 970 898 8713 Telephone richard.tarsio@hp.com ____________________________ Signature Richard P Tarsio US Canada Technical Regulations HP Inc. Date: 24 June 2016

FCC, Request for non-disclosure RF_501, Issue 6 Date: 16-Jul-10 Page 1 of 1 Company Name: HP Inc. Address:

USA 80528 City:

Country:

Fort Collins USA 3390 East Harmony Road, Fort Collins Colorado , Edisonstraat 12A 6902 PK ZEVENAAR The Netherlands To: Telefication B.V., Dept. FCC TCB Subject: Request for confidentiality FCC ID: B94-AX201D2WS Reference number: ######

Dear FCC TCB, 1. Long-Term Confidentiality Pursuant to 47 CFR Section 0.459(a) & (b), we hereby requests non-disclosure and confidential treatment of the following materials submitted in support of FCC certification application:

Bill(s) of Material Block Diagrams Operational Description Schematic Diagrams Tune-up Procedure Above materials contain secrets, proprietary and technical information, which would customarily be guarded from competitors under 47 CFR, section 0.457(d)(2). Disclosure or publication or any portion of this company confidential material to other parties could cause substantial competitive harm and provide unjustified benefits for competitors. 2. Short-Term Confidentiality (STC) Pursuant to Public Notice DA 04-1705 of the Commissions policy, in order to comply with the marketing regulations in 47 CFR 2.803 and the importation rules in 47 CFR 2.1204, applicant hereby requests Short-Term Confidential treatment of the following materials (note 1):

Internal Photos Users Manual Test Set-up Photos External Photos Justification: Ensuring that business sensitive information remains confidential until the actual marketing of newly authorized devices. Planned Release Date STC: 180 days (notes 2, 3, 4, 5) Name and signature of applicant: Jim Chang Date: 2020/02/12 Notes:

1) A document or type of document can only have ONE type of confidentiality!

2) Short-Term confidentiality is in principle for 45 days from date of grant; it can be extended max 3 times (total time 180 days max.)!

3) FCC must be informed when marketing begins earlier. 4) Release takes place automatically thus extension must be requested in time. Telefication does not remind you of this!

5) Request for extension or for release must be received by Telefication at least 7 days before date of actual marketing or before expiration of the STC period

HP Inc. 3390 East Harmony Road, Fort Collins, Colorado 80528, United States Tel: 970-898-8713 Federal Communications Commission Office of Engineering and Technology Laboratory Division 7435 Oakland Mills Rd Columbia MD 21046-1609 SUBJECT: Class II Permissive Change for FCC ID: B94-AX201D2WS The intension of this application is to enable the modular FCC ID: B94-AX201NGWS, granted on 06/13/2019 to be integrated in HP Notebook PC, Model: TPN-Q226. The module installed into host platform mentioned above is electronically and mechanically identical to the original certified module. The Original FCC testing on module under FCC ID: B94-AX201D2WS was performed with an antenna of higher gain, and the antenna was connected to the module in an open environment. The current host platform under application uses an antenna of the same type but of lower gain and is installed inside the host platform enclosure. The physical restraints introduced by the host platform should have resulted in equal or lower level of radiated emission. Therefore, additional Radiated emission testing is not necessary. Software security remains unchanged from the original application. Should you have any enquiries or comments, please have my best attention. Sincerely yours, Peter Tevlin peter.tevlin@hp.com TEL: +1 512 319 7260

HP Inc. 3390 East Harmony Road, Fort Collins, Colorado 80528, United States Tel: 970-898-8713 Date: November 19, 2019 Federal Communications Commission Office of Engineering and Technology Laboratory Division 7435 Oakland Mills Rd Columbia MD 21046-1609 Subject: Request for Confidentiality FCC ID: B94-AX201D2WS To Whom It May Concern, Pursuant to the provisions of Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of Commissions rules (47CFR0.457, 0.459), we are requesting the Commission to withhold the following attachment(s) as confidential document from public disclosure indefinitely. Operational Description Tune up procedure Above mentioned document contains detailed system and equipment description are considered as proprietary information in operation of the equipment. The public disclosure of above documents might be harmful to our company and would give competitor an unfair advantage in the market. In additional to above mentioned documents, pursuant to Public Notice DA 04-1705 of the Commission s policy, in order to comply with the marketing regulations in 47 CFT 2.803 and the importation rules in 47 CFR 2.1204, while ensuring that business sensitive information remains confidential until the actual marketing of newly authorized devices. We are requesting the commission to grant short-term confidentiality request on the following attachment(s) for 180 days after the grant as outlined in Public Notice DA 04-1705. External Photos Internal Photos Test Setup Photos User Manual It is our understanding that all measurement test reports, FCC ID label format and correspondent during certification review process cannot be granted as confidential documents and those information will be available for public review once the grant of equipment authorization is issued. Best Regards, Peter Tevlin peter.tevlin@hp.com TEL: +1 512 319 7260

Authorization on Behalf of HP Inc. For the US Federal Communications Commission Office of Engineering and Technology and Other FCC Programs and Offices 1. I, Richard P Tarsio, am on the Worldwide Technical Regulations staff of HP Inc. (HP) and Applicant/Grantee Contact of Record for HP Inc. together with its subsidiaries and affiliates worldwide (collectively, HP) for HPs dealings with the United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC). I am duly authorized by HP Inc. to make this Authorization on HP Inc.s behalf. 2. This Authorization will designate the person named below to act on my behalf and HP Inc.s behalf as authorized agent and representative, until further notice, with the additional power to designate one or more third party agents for HP Inc. with regard to particular matters and applications. All acts carried out and requests made by this named representative relating to any matter before the FCC, including requests for confidentiality, shall have the same effect as mine. Name:

Title:

Address:

Peter Tevlin Product Submittal Compliance HP Inc. Post A48313 11445 Compaq Center Dr Houston, TX 77070 512-319-7260 Peter.Tevlin@hp.com Telephone:

E-mail:

3. Questions about the scope and effect of this Authorization should be addressed as follows:

4. I declare under penalty of perjury that the foregoing is true and correct, and that this Authorization was executed at Fort Collins, Colorado on the date indicated below my signature. Richard P Tarsio US Canada Technical Regulations 3390 East Harmony Road, MS 66 Fort Collins, CO 80528 970 898 8713 Telephone richard.tarsio@hp.com ____________________________ Signature Richard P Tarsio US Canada Technical Regulations HP Inc. Date: 22 June 2016

HP Inc. 3390 East Harmony Road, Fort Collins, Colorado 80528, United States Tel: 970-898-8713 Date: November 19, 2019 To whom it may concern, Please be notified that I, Peter Tevlin, have designated Jones Tsai in Sporton International Inc. as the person being responsible for this project and to sign the form 731 and other documentation. Any and all acts carried out by Jones Tsai in Sporton International Inc. on the matters of relating to all processes required in the FCC approval and any communication needed with the national authority, shall have the same legal authority as acts on our own behalf. We further certify that neither the applicant nor any party to this application, as defined in 47 CFR Ch. 1.2002 (b), is subject to a denial to Federal benefits, that include FCC benefits, pursuant to section 5301 of the Anti-Drug Abuse Act of 1998, 21 U.S.C. 862. This authorization is limited to the product of as following:

FCC ID: B94-AX201D2WS If you have any acknowledgement and response, please send it to Sporton International Inc. directly. Should you have any questions or comments regarding this matter, please dont hesitate to contact me. Sincerely yours, Peter Tevlin peter.tevlin@hp.com TEL: +1 512 319 7260